Owner’s Manual
AV Receiver English
En 2
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
Features and capabilities ...................................................3
About this manual............................................................. 4
Supplied accessories......................................................... 4
Part names and functions.................................................. 5
Front panel........................................................................5
Rear panel.........................................................................6
Front panel display ........................................................... 7
Remote control .................................................................8
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers ..........................................................9
Speaker channels and functions........................................ 9
Speaker layout ................................................................ 10
Connecting speakers and subwoofer ..............................11
Connecting external components....................................14
Cable plugs and jacks .....................................................14
Connecting a TV monitor...............................................15
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices............17
Connecting video cameras and portable audio players .. 21
Transmitting input A/V to external components ............ 21
Connecting the FM/AM antennas ..................................22
Set up the speaker parameters automatically
(YPAO) .............................................................................. 23
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure ...............................................28
Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control) ..... 28
Changing input settings with a single key
(SCENE function) ............................................................29
Registering input sources/sound field program .............. 29
Enjoying sound field programs....................................... 29
Selecting sound field programs and sound decoders...... 29
Sound field programs .....................................................32
FM/AM tuning ................................................................. 34
Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning)..... 34
Registering and recalling a frequency (Preset tuning) ... 35
Recalling a preset station................................................ 37
Clearing preset stations .................................................. 37
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only) ..................................... 37
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ........... 39
Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock ................. 39
Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™ .................................... 39
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components....... 42
Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver ........................................................................... 42
Pairing Bluetooth™ components ................................... 42
Using Bluetooth™ components ..................................... 43
SETUP
Configuring the settings specific for each input source
(Option menu) .................................................................. 44
Option menu display and setup ...................................... 44
Option menu items ......................................................... 44
Setting various functions (Setup menu)......................... 48
Setup menu display and settings .................................... 48
Setup menu items ........................................................... 49
Manages settings for speakers........................................ 49
Setting the audio output function of this unit................. 53
Setting HDMI functions ................................................. 54
Making the receiver easier to use ................................... 57
Setting the sound field program ..................................... 58
Prohibiting setting changes ............................................ 58
Setting sound field program parameters ....................... 59
CINEMA DSP parameters ............................................. 60
Parameters usable in certain sound field programs ........ 60
Parameters usable in surround decoder .......................... 61
Controlling other components with the remote
control ............................................................................... 62
Keys connecting external components ........................... 62
Default remote control code settings.............................. 62
Registering remote control codes for external
component operations .................................................... 63
Resetting all remote control codes ................................. 64
Extended functionality that can be configured
as needed (Advanced Setup menu) ................................ 65
Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu............... 65
Setting the impedance of speakers
(U.S.A. and Canada models only).................................. 65
Avoiding crossing remote control signals when using
multiple Yamaha receivers ............................................. 66
Changing FM/AM frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)..................................... 66
Initializing various settings for this unit ........................ 66
Using the HDMI Control function ................................. 67
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting ............................................................... 70
General........................................................................... 70
HDMI™ ......................................................................... 73
Tuner (FM/AM) ............................................................. 73
iPod™/iPhone™ ............................................................ 74
Bluetooth™.................................................................... 75
Remote control............................................................... 75
Glossary............................................................................ 76
Audio information.......................................................... 76
Sound field program information................................... 77
Video information .......................................................... 77
Information on HDMI™................................................. 78
About trademarks ........................................................... 78
Specifications.................................................................... 79
Index ................................................................................. 81
En 3
INTRODUCTION
■ Built-in high-quality, high-power 5-channel amplifier
■ 1-button input/sound field program switching (SCENE function) .......................29
■ Speaker connections for 2- to 7.1-channel configurations
– (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Speaker impedance configuration.....................................................12
– Speaker channels and functions .................................................................................................................9
– Speaker layout..........................................................................................................................................10
– Speaker cable connection.........................................................................................................................11
– Subwoofer cable connection ....................................................................................................................13
– Using with 6.1/7.1-channel speaker layout..............................................................................................11
■ Acoustic parameter adjustment to match your speakers and listening
environment
– Automatic settings for speaker acoustic parameters
(YPAO - Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer).......................................................................23
– Specifying the settings for each speaker ..................................................................................................49
– Volume control for each speaker..............................................................................................................51
– Speaker distance settings .........................................................................................................................51
– Sound quality control with the equalizer <Graphic Equalizer> ..............................................................51
– Test tone speaker adjustment ...................................................................................................................52
– Bass and treble level adjustment <Tone Control> ...................................................................................28
■ External component connection (max. 14 inputs) and playback
– External component connection...............................................................................................................15
– Audio signal output from the TV transmitted through the HDMI jack ...................................................56
– HDMI/AV video input combining other audio input...............................................................................46
– Correction of lag between audio and video signals <Lipsync>...............................................................53
– Protective cover for front panel jacks ........................................................................................................4
– Input source name changing <Input Rename> ........................................................................................57
– Configuring the settings specific for each input source <Option menu> ................................................44
– Playback from external components........................................................................................................28
– Playback from an iPod/iPhone (iPod/iPhone and components sold separately) .....................................39
– Playback from a Bluetooth component (Bluetooth and components sold separately) ............................42
■ HDMI settings
– Setting the HDMI functions.....................................................................................................................54
– Controlling this unit from HDMI compatible device such as TVs <HDMI Control function> ..............67
– Listening to TV audio with single HDMI cable connection <Audio Return Channel function>............69
■ FM/AM tuner
– FM/AM broadcast listening .....................................................................................................................34
– Simple preset tuning ................................................................................................................................35
– (U.K. and Europe models) Radio Data System tuning ............................................................................37
– (U.K. and Europe models) Automatic traffic information reception.......................................................38
– Changing FM mode (Stereo/Monaural)...................................................................................................35
– (Asia and General models only) Changing FM/AM frequency steps initializing various settings
for this unit...............................................................................................................................................34
■ Multi-channel, multi-format playback
– Sound field effect selection......................................................................................................................29
– Playback without sound field effects .......................................................................................................30
– Stereo playback........................................................................................................................................30
– Sound field effect configuration ..............................................................................................................59
– Compressed-music playback ...................................................................................................................29
– Setting the decode format of digital audio signals <Decoder Mode> .....................................................45
– Selecting the 5.1-channel signal playback method <EXTD Surround>..................................................45
■ Front panel information display
– Front panel display information switching ................................................................................................7
– Front panel display brightness adjustment <Dimmer>............................................................................58
– Digital video/audio signal information display <Signal Info> ................................................................46
■ Volume adjustment functions
– Easy listening at low volumes <Adaptive DRC> ....................................................................................53
– Maximum volume settings.......................................................................................................................54
– Startup volume settings............................................................................................................................54
– Adjusting volume between input sources <Volume Trim> .....................................................................45
■ Remote control operation
– External component operation with this unit’s remote control................................................................62
– Multiple Yamaha receiver operation without signal interference <Remote ID Switching>....................66
■ Other features
– Standby mode after prolonged non-operation <Auto Power Down function>........................................58
– Standby mode after a specific amount of time <Sleep timer>...................................................................8
– To charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode <iPod Standby Charge> .........................41
– Initializing various settings for this unit ..................................................................................................66
– Prohibiting setting changes of this unit <Memory Guard> .....................................................................58
Features and capabilities
En 4
INTRODUCTION
Features and capabilities
About this manual
Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
• Remote control
• Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) x 2
• YPAO microphone
• AM loop antenna
• Indoor FM antenna
• VIDEO AUX input cover
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• This manual is created prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and
product, the product has priority.
• “
dHDMI1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the
remote control. Refer to the “Part names and functions” (☞
p. 5)
for the information about each position of the parts.
• J
1 indicates that the reference is in the footnote. Refer to the
corresponding numbers on the bottom of the page.
• ☞
indicates the page describing the related information.
• Click on the “ ” at the bottom of the page to display the
corresponding page in “Part names and functions.”
Front panel
Rear panel
Front panel display
Remote control
■ Attaching the VIDEO AUX input cover (supplied)
To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input
cover to the VIDEO AUX jacks when you do not use the jacks.
To remove the cover, push the left section of it.
Attach the cover
PUSH
Remove the cover
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
When inserting batteries in the remote control, remove the
battery compartment cover from the reverse side of the remote
control, and insert two AAA batteries into the battery
compartment so that they match with the polarity markings (+
and -).
Replace the batteries with new ones if the following symptoms
become evident:
• The remote control can only be operated within a narrow range.
•
bTRANSMIT does not light up, or only lights dimly.
NOTE
If there are remote control codes for external components
registered to the remote control, removing the batteries for more
than 2 minutes, or leaving exhausted batteries in the remote
control, may clear the remote control codes. If this should occur,
replace the batteries with new ones, and set the remote control
codes.
a
c
b
Battery compartment
cover
Battery compartment
En 5
INTRODUCTION
Front panel
a A (Power)
Switches this unit between on and standby mode.
b HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator
Lights up in any of the following cases while the unit is in standby
mode.
• When Standby Through function is enabled and audio/video from
an external component connected with HDMI is output to a TV
during the standby mode (☞
p. 55). J1
• When an iPod is charging in the Yamaha iPod universal dock
during the standby mode (☞
p. 41).
c YPAO MIC jack
Connect the supplied YPAO microphone and adjust the speaker
balance automatically (☞
p. 23).
d INFO
Changes the information displayed on the front panel display (☞
p. 7).
e MEMORY
Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (☞
p. 36). J2
f PRESET j / i
Selects an FM/AM preset station (☞
p. 37). J2
g FM
Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM (☞
p. 34). J2
h AM
Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM (☞
p. 34). J2
i TUNING jj / ii
Changes FM/AM tuner frequencies (☞
p. 34). J2
j Front panel display
Displays information on this unit (☞
p. 7).
k DIRECT
Switches this unit to direct mode (☞
p. 31).
l PHONES jack
For plugging headphones in. Sound effects applied during playback
can also be heard through the headphones.
m INPUT l / h
Selects an input source from which to playback. Press either the left or
right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order.
n SCENE
Switches the input source and the sound field program with a single
button (☞
p. 29). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to
switch on.
o TONE CONTROL
Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers/headphones
(☞
p. 28).
p PROGRAM l / h
Switches between the sound field effect (sound field program) you are
using and the surround sound decoder (☞
p. 29). Press either the left
or right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order.
q STRAIGHT
Changes a sound field program to straight decoding mode (☞
p. 30).
r VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting video cameras, game consoles, and portable music
players to this unit temporarily.
Attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when not using this
jack.
s VOLUME
Adjusts the volume level.
Part names and functions
When the HDMI Control functions are “On” (☞p. 55), then
this stays on during standby mode.
VIDEO
AUX
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
TV
BD
DVD
CD
RADIO
INPUT
PROGRAM
SCENE
VIDEO
AUDI O
PORTABLE
LR
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TUNING
YPAO MIC DIRECT
o qm p
a
nl s
c
r
j
d gf h ke i
b
J
1 : During the standby mode, you can select the HDMI input (HDMI1-4) to output to a TV. When the input is changed correctly, HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator blinks twice.
J
2 : Usable when you have selected tuner input.
En 6
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
Rear panel
a DOCK jack
For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-12) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (☞
p. 39,
☞
p. 42).
b HDMI OUT jack
For connecting an HDMI - compatible TV to output audio/video
signals (☞
p. 15).
c HDMI1-4 jacks
For connecting external components equipped with HDMI-
compatible outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞
p. 17).
d AV1-6 jacks
For connecting to external components equipped with audio/video
outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞
p. 18, p. 19).
e AV OUT jacks
For outputting audio/video signals received when analog inputs (AV3-
6 or AUDIO1-2) are selected (☞
p. 21).
f ANTENNA jacks
For connecting AM and FM antennas (☞
p. 22).
g AUDIO1-2 jacks
For connecting to external components equipped with analog audio
outputs to input sound into this unit (☞
p. 20).
h MONITOR OUT jacks
i AUDIO OUT jacks
For outputting audio signals received when analog jacks, such as the
AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are selected (☞
p. 21).
j SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting the front, center, surround and surround back speakers
(☞
p. 12).
k SURROUND BACK jacks (PRE OUT)
Outputs the surround back L/R channel signals. You can enjoy the
maximum of 7.1-channels by connecting an external amplifier
(☞
p. 11).
l SUBWOOFER jack
For connecting a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (☞
p. 13).
m VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
Select the switch position according to your local voltage (Refer to
Quick Reference Guide).
n Power cable
For connecting this unit to an AC wall outlet.
VIDEO jack For connecting a TV capable of receiving video
input, and outputting video signals to it (☞p. 16).
COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks
For connecting TV that are compatible with
component video signals, using three cables to
output video signal (☞p. 15).
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV
5
AV
6
AUDIO 1
AUD
IO 2
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(
CD
)
CENTER
SURROUND
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2HDMI 1 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
FRONT
HDMI
OUT
AV
OUT
SURROUND BACK
SINGLE
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
PRE OUT
OUT
VIDEO
DOCK
ARC
SPEAKERS
ANTENNA
FM
75ǡ
GND
AM
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
AV
OUT
SURROUND BACK
SINGLE
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
PRE OUT
OUT
ARC
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV 6
AUD
IO 1
AUD
IO 2
C
ENTER
SURROUND
(
BD
/
DV
D
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
HDMI
3
HDMI
4
F
RONT
S
PEAKER
S
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
ND
AM
c
eg i jd h
ba
f nmk l
Distinguishing the input and output jacks
The area around the audio/video output jacks is
marked in white to prevent connection errors. Use
these jacks to output audio/video signals to a TV or
other external component.
Output jacks
En 7
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
Front panel display
a HDMI indicator
Lights up during normal HDMI communication when any of the
HDMI 1-4 inputs are selected.
b CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when a sound field effect that uses CINEMA DSP
technology is selected.
c Tuner indicator
Lights up when receiving an FM/AM broadcast.
d SLEEP indicator
Lights up when the sleep timer is on (☞
p. 8).
e MUTE indicator
Flashes when audio is muted.
f VOLUME indicator
Displays the current volume level.
g Cursor indicators
Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available
for operations.
h Multi information display
Displays a range of information on menu items and settings.
i Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SBRSB
Front speaker L
Surround speaker L
Subwoofer
Front speaker R
Surround speaker R
Center speaker
Surround back
speaker L
Surround back
speaker R
Surround back
speaker J1
■ Changing the front panel display
The front panel can display sound field programs and surround
decoder names as well as the active input source.
Press fINFO repeatedly to cycle through input source →
sound field program → surround decoder in order. J2
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Straight
HDMI1
VOL.
Input source name
Sound field program (DSP program)
STEREO
SLEEP
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
MUTE
SBL SBRSB
abcdfe
gh ig
J
1 : “SB” is displayed when using a 6.1-channel configuration only.
J
2 : While selecting a tuner input, the FM/AM frequency is displayed instead of the input source.
En 8
INTRODUCTION
Part names and functions
Remote control
a Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
b TRANSMIT
Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control.
c SOURCE A (SOURCE Power)
Switches an external component on and off.
d Input selector
Select an input source on this unit from which to playback.
e Tuner keys
Operates the FM/AM tuner. These keys are used when using the tuner
input.
f INFO
Cycles the information displayed on the front panel display (the name
of the currently selected input source, the sound field program, the
surround decoder, the FM/AM tuner frequency, etc.)(☞
p. 7).
g Sound selection keys
Switch between the sound field effect (sound field program) you are
using and the surround decoder (☞
p. 29).
h SCENE
Switches the input source and the sound field program with a single
button (☞
p. 29). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to
switch on.
i SETUP
Displays a detailed Setup menu for this unit (☞
p. 48).
j Cursor B / C / D / E, ENTER, RETURN
k External component operation keys
Operate recording, playback, and menu displays etc. for external
components. J1
l Numeric keys
Enter numbers.
m TV control keys
Operate a monitor such as a TV.
n CODE SET
Sets remote control codes for external component operations (☞
p. 62,
p. 66
).
o RECEIVER A (RECEIVER Power)
Switches this unit between on and standby mode.
p SLEEP
Switch this unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period
of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press this key repeatedly to set the
time for the sleep timer function.
The SLEEP indicator (☞
p. 7) lights up when the sleep timer is on.
q OPTION
Displays the Option menu for each input source (☞
p. 44).
r VOLUME +/-
Adjusts the volume level (☞
p. 28).
s MUTE
Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (☞
p. 28).
RECEIVER
SCENE
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT DIRECT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TRANSMIT
SLEEP
1234
1234
1256
V-AU X
TUNER
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
TUNING
MOVIE MUSIC
STEREO
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
7 856
90
10
1234
REC
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
CODE SET
INPUT
MUTE
DOCK[ A ] [ B ]
a
c
b
p
o
d
e
g
h
i
q
r
s
l
m
n
j
f
k
HDMI1-4 HDMI1-4 jacks
AV1-6 AV1-6 jacks
AUDIO1-2 AUDIO1-2 jacks
V-AUX Front panel VIDEO AUX jacks
[A]/[B] Changes the external component to operate with
the kExternal component operation keys
without changing inputs. J1
DOCK A Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK
jack.
TUNER FM/AM tuner
FM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM.
AM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM.
MEMORY Presets radio stations.
PRESET F / G Selects a preset station.
TUNING H / I Changes tuning frequencies.
Cursor B / C / D / E Select menu items and change settings when
setting menus, etc, are displayed.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen when setting
menus are displayed, or ends the menu display.
Sleep 120min. Sleep 90min.
Sleep 60min.Sleep 30min.Sleep Off
JJ
1 : You can use kExternal component operation keys for each input source to operate registered components. Remote control codes must be registered for each input
in advance if you want to operate external components (☞
p. 62).
En 9
CONNECTIONS
This unit uses acoustic field effects and sound decoders to bring you the impact of a real movie theater or concert hall. These effects will be brought to you with ideal speaker positioning and
connections in your listening environment.
Speaker channels and functions
■
Front left and right speakers
The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo
sound) and effect sounds.
Front speaker layout:
Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening
position in the front of the room. When using a projector screen,
the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the
screen from the bottom.
■
Center speaker
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals,
etc.).
Center speaker layout:
Place it halfway between the left and right front speakers. When
using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of
the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned.
When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen.
■
Surround left and right speakers
The surround speakers are for effect and vocal sounds with the 5.1-
channel speakers providing rear-area sounds. When used with 6.1/
7.1-channel (including surround back channel), sound for right and
left rear-area is output.
Surround speaker layout:
Place the speakers at the rear of the room on the left and right sides
facing the listening position. They should be placed between 60
degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position and with the
speaker tops at a height of 1.5 – 1.8 m from the floor.
■
Surround back left and right speakers
Outputs the rear effect. When used with 6.1ch sound, sound from
the left and right sound surround back speakers is mixed and output
from a single speaker. When used with 5.1ch sound, sound from
surround back speakers is distributed between the left and right
surround speakers.
When using the surround back speakers, connect an external
amplifier to the SURROUND BACK jacks of the PRE OUT
terminals.
Surround back speaker setting:
When used with 7.1ch sound, arrange the left and right speakers
towards the listening position, to the rear of the listening position.
Arrange the left and right speakers at least 30 cm apart. The same
separation as with the front left and right speakers is optimum.
When used with 6.1ch sound, arrange these to the rear of the
listening position.
■
Subwoofer
The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-frequency
effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS. Use a
subwoofer that is equipped with built-in amplifier.
Subwoofer speaker layout:
Place it exterior to the front left and right speakers facing slightly
inward to reduce echoes from the wall.
Connecting speakers
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
En 10
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
Speaker layout
■ 5.1-channel speaker layout
(5 speakers + subwoofer)
■ 6.1-channel speaker layout
(6 speakers + subwoofer) J1
■ 7.1-channel speaker layout
(7 speakers + subwoofer) J1
• Connect at least two speakers (front left and right).
• If you cannot connect all five speakers, give priority to the
surround speakers.
• The surround speakers should be placed between 60 degrees and
80 degrees from the listening position.
• When used with 7.1-channel speaker layout, arrange the left and
right surround back speakers at least 30 cm a part.
60q
60q
80q
80q
Front speaker L
Front speaker R
Subwoofer
Center speaker
Surround speaker L
Surround
speaker R
■ CRT monitors
We recommend that you use magnetically shielded speakers to
avoid video distortion, especially for the front and center
speakers near the screen.
If your screen still gets interference from magnetically shielded
speakers, move the speakers farther away from your TV.
60q
60q
80q
80q
Front speaker L
Front speaker R
Subwoofer
Center speaker
Surround speaker L
Surround
speaker R
Surround back
speaker
60q
60q
80q
80q
Front speaker L
Front speaker R
Subwoofer
Center speaker
Surround speaker L
Surround
speaker R
Surround back
speaker R
Surround back
speaker L
30 cm (12 in)
or more
JJ
1 : When used with 7.1/6.1-channel speaker layout, connect an external amplifier
to the SURROUND BACK L/R jacks of the PRE OUT terminals (☞
p. 11).
En 11
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
Connecting speakers and subwoofer
Connect your speakers to their respective terminals on the rear panel.
■
Connecting the surround back speakers
Connecting an external amplifier to the SURROUND BACK L/R jacks of the PRE OUT terminals
allows you to create the maximum of 7.1-channel surround system with a surround back channel.
For a 6.1-channel system, connect the external amplifier to the SURROUND BACK L jack of the PRE
OUT terminals.
For a 7.1-channel system connect it to the SURROUND BACK L/R jacks.
You can adjust the surround back speaker volume with a volume control of the external amplifier. To
obtain the balanced sound during playback, set the speaker output characteristics in advance using the
YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) or “Speaker Setup” of the Setup menu
(☞
p. 23).
CAUTION
• Remove the AC power cable of this unit from the power outlet before connecting the speakers.
• Generally speaker cables consist of two parallel insulated cables. One of these cables is a different
color, or has a line running along it, to indicate different polarity. Insert the different colored (or lined)
cable into the “+” (positive, red) terminal on this unit and the speakers, and the other cable into the “-”
(negative, black) terminal.
• Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come into contact with the metal
areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“CHECK SP WIRES!” will appear on the front panel display when this unit is switched on.
CENTER
SURROUND
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
FRONT
AUDI O
OUT
SPEAKERS
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK
SubwooferCenter speaker
Front speaker
Surround speaker
RL
RL
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK
Surround back
speaker
RL
En 12
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
■
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Changing speaker impedance
This unit is configured for 8Ω speakers as the factory setting.
When connecting to 6Ω speakers, carry out the following
procedure to switch to 6Ω.
1
Switch this unit to the standby mode.
2
Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on
the front panel.
Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on
the front panel display.
After approximately a few seconds, the top menu items are
displayed. J1
3
Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front panel.
4
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a “6ΩMIN.”
5
Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then
switch it on again.
The power turns on, when the settings you made has been
configured.
■
Connecting speakers
1
Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the
ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires
of the cables together firmly so that they will not
cause short circuits.
2
Loosen the speaker terminals.
3
Insert the bare wire of the speaker cable into the gap
on the side of the terminal.
4
Tighten the terminal.
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
TV
BD
DVD
CD
RADIO
INPUT
PROGRAM
SCENE
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
YPAO MIC
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM l / h
A
SPIMP.-8MIN
FRONT
2
2
3
1
4
4
Connecting the banana plug (Except U.K., Europe,
Asia and Korea models)
Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into the end of
the terminal.
FRONT
Banana plug
JJ
1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed
(Advanced Setup menu)” (☞
p. 65) for details on the Advanced Setup menu.
En 13
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
■
Connecting the subwoofer
1
Connect the subwoofer input jack to the
SUBWOOFER jack on this unit with an audio pin
cable.
2
Set the subwoofer volume as follows.
Volume: Set to approximately half volume (or slightly less than
half).
Crossover frequency (if available): Set to maximum.
VOLUME
MIN MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN MAX
Subwoofer examples
En 14
CONNECTIONS
Cable plugs and jacks
This unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for
components that you are going to connect.
■
Audio/Video jacks
HDMI jacks
Digital video and digital sound are transmitted through a single jack.
Only use an HDMI cable.
■
Analog video jacks
■
Audio jacks
Connecting external components
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.
• We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
The signal is separated into three components:
luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P
B), and
chrominance red (P
R).
Use component video pin cables with three plugs.
VIDEO jack
This jack transmits conventional analog video
signals.
Use video pin cables.
HDMI cable
Component video pin cable
Video pin cable
OPTICAL jacks
These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals.
Use fiber-optic cables for optical digital audio
signals.
COAXIAL jacks
These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals.
Use pin cables for digital audio signals.
AUDIO jacks
These jacks transmit conventional analog audio
signals.
Use stereo pin cables, connecting the red plug to
the red R jack, and the white plug to the white L
jack.
PORTABLE jack
This jack transmits conventional analog audio
signals.
Use a stereo mini-plug cable when connecting.
Digital audio fiber-optic cable
Digital audio pin cable
Stereo pin cable
Stereo mini-plug cable
En 15
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Connecting a TV monitor
This unit is equipped with the following three types of output jack for connection to a TV.
HDMI OUT, COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO. Select the proper connection according to the input
signal format supported by your TV.
This unit will receive HDMI, component, or video signals in the same format as transmitted by the
output devices.
For example, these three output devices must be connected to the TV by matching input/output jacks
and cables, and then you must change the TV’s input mode to the proper setting.
■
Connecting an HDMI video monitor
Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI OUT jack.
■
Connecting a component video monitor
Connect the component video cable to the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jacks.
HDMI
OUT
ARC
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
(BD
/
DVD)
HDMI
2
HDMI
1
HDM
V
IDE
O
DOCK
A
NTENN
A
FM
75
ǡ
G
N
D
AM
HDMI OUT jack
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
(MONITOR OUT)
VIDEO jack
(MONITOR OUT)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
Input Output
TV
HDMI input
Component
video input
Video input
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.
• We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation.
HDMI
OUT
ARC
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTI
C
A
L
O
PTI
C
A
L
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIAL
CO
AXIA
L
(C
D
)
(
BD
/
DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
AV
OU
T
V
IDE
O
D
OC
K
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
ND
AM
M
O
NIT
O
R
O
UT
C
OMPONENT
V
IDE
O
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI input
TV
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTI
C
A
L
O
PTI
C
AL
(
TV
)
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
AV
4
AV
5
AV
6
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIAL
CO
AXIA
L
(
CD
)
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
HDMI
OU
T
AV
O
UT
VIDE
O
DOCK
AR
C
ANTENNA
F
M
75
ǡ
G
N
D
A
M
R
OU
T
V
IDE
O
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Component video input
TV
En 16
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■
Connecting a video monitor
Connect the video pin cable to the VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack.
■ Listening to TV audio
To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect as followings according to the TV:
When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and HDMI
Control function
When your TV supports both HDMI Control (Ex. Panasonic VIERA Link) and Audio Return
Channel functions, audio/video output from the unit to the TV and audio output from the TV to the
unit are possible using a single HDMI cable.
The input source is switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV, and that
makes TV sound control easier to use.
For the connections and settings, refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return
Channel function” (☞
p. 69).
When using a TV that supports the HDMI Control functions
When using a TV that supports HDMI Control functions (Ex. Panasonic VIERA Link), if HDMI
Control functions are enabled on the unit, then input source can be switched automatically to match
operations carried out on the TV.
For the connections and settings, refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically
when listening to TV audio” (☞
p. 68).
VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTI
C
A
L
O
PTI
C
AL
(
TV)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIAL
CO
AXIA
L
(
C
D
)
(
BD
/
DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
HDMI
O
UT
A
V
OU
T
VIDE
O
DOCK
A
R
C
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
GN
D
AM
MO
NIT
O
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
VIDEO
V
V
Video input
TV
When using other TVs
To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect its AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 jacks to the TV’s audio
output jacks.
Depending on the connection on TV, connect the TV’s audio output to the AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2.
Select the input source connected via TV’s audio output jack to enjoy the TV sound.
If the TV supports optical digital audio output, we recommend that you connect the TV audio output
to the receiver’s AV4 jack.
Connecting to AV4 allows you to switch the input source to AV4 with just a single key operation
using the SCENE function (☞
p. 29).
You can control your TV using the receiver’s remote control by entering the TV’s remote control
code (☞p. 62).
TV audio output Connection
Optical digital audio output Connect to the OPTICAL jack of the AV1 or AV4 with a digital audio pin
cable.
Coaxial digital audio output Connect to the COAXIAL jack of the AV2 or AV3 with a fiber-optic cable.
Analog stereo output Connect to one of the AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, or V-AUX with a
stereo pin cable.
OPTICAL OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
A
UDIO
1
A
UD
IO
2
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD)
C
OMPONENT
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
(
BD
/
DVD
)
HDMI
2
HDMI
1
HDMI
O
U
T
A
V
O
UT
V
IDE
O
D
OC
K
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
ND
AM
M
O
NIT
O
R
OU
T
COMPONENT
V
IDE
O
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
O
O
Audio output
(Optical)
TV
Available input jacks
En 17
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices
This unit has the following input jacks. Connect them to the appropriate output jacks on
the playback devices such as BD/DVD players.
■
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with
HDMI
Connect the device with an HDMI cable to one of the HDMI1-4 jacks.
Select the HDMI input (HDMI1-4) that the playback device is connected to for
playback.
OPTION
HDMI
1234
ENTER
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
S
ETU
P
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
U
T
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
j
d
dInput selector
jCursor C / D / E
jENTER
qOPTION
Input jack Video input Audio input
HDMI1 HDMI HDMI
HDMI2 HDMI HDMI
HDMI3 HDMI HDMI
HDMI4 HDMI HDMI
AV1 Component video Optical digital
AV2 Component video Coaxial digital
AV3 Video Coaxial digital
AV4 Video Optical digital
AV5 Video Analog (Stereo)
AV6 Video Analog (Stereo)
AUDIO1 — Analog (Stereo)
AUDIO2 — Analog (Stereo)
VIDEO AUX Video Analog (Stereo)
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICA
L
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AUDI O 1
AUDIO 2
C
OAXIA
L
COAXIA
L
(C
D
)
FRON
T
HDMI
O
UT
AV
OUT
A
UDIO
OU
T
V
IDE
O
DOC
K
AR
C
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
N
D
A
M
M
O
NIT
O
R
O
UT
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
VIDE
O
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI output
BD/DVD player
■ Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals
from a jack other than HDMI
This unit can use the AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 input jacks to receive audio signals from
other input jacks.
For example, if an playback device cannot produce audio signals from an HDMI
jack, use the following method to change the audio input.
1
Use the dInput selector to select the desired HDMI input source.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J1
3
Press jCursor C until “Audio In” is displayed, and then press
jENTER.
4
Press jCursor D / E to select the audio input source.
5
Once you have completed the setup, press qOPTION to close the
Option menu.
J
1 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” (☞p. 44) for details
on the Option menu.
OPTICAL
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 1
C
OMPONEN
T
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
(TV)
A
V
2
A
V
3
A
V
4
A
V
5
A
V
6
AUDI O 1
AUDIO 2
C
OAXIA
L
C
OAXIA
L
(
CD)
HDMI
2
H
DMI
OUT
AV
OU
T
V
IDE
O
D
OC
K
A
R
C
ANTENNA
F
M
75
ǡ
G
N
D
AM
M
O
NIT
O
R
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDE
O
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
HDMI
OPTICAL
HDMI
HDMI
O
O
HDMI/Audio (Optical)
output
BD/DVD player
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Audio;;;;;;AV1
HDMI1
VOL.
If you have selected AV1 input audio (optical digital)
En 18
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with component
cables
Connect the device with a component video cable to one of the AV1-2 input jacks.
Using optical digital audio output sources
Select the AV1 input that the playback device is connected to for playback.
Using coaxial digital audio output sources
Select the AV2 input that the playback device is connected to for playback.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
O
PTICA
L
(
TV
)
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
COAXIAL
C
OAXIA
L
(C
D
)
(
BD
/
DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
HDM
I
O
U
T
AV
OU
T
V
IDE
O
D
OC
K
AR
C
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
ND
AM
M
O
NIT
O
R
O
UT
C
OMPONENT
V
IDE
O
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
O
OPTICAL
O
Component video / Audio (Optical)
output
BD/DVD player
AV 2
COAXIAL
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTICA
L
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
C
OAXIAL
(C
D
)
(
BD
/
DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
HDM
I
O
U
T
AV
OUT
V
IDE
O
D
OC
K
AR
C
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
N
D
AM
MO
NIT
O
R
O
UT
C
OMPONENT
VIDE
O
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COAXIAL
Y
P
R
C
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
C
Component video / Audio (Coaxial)
output
BD/DVD player
■ Component connections to analog audio output devices
You can use the video input from the AV1-2 jacks in combination with the audio input from other
AV inputs or AUDIO1-2.
When connecting these devices, select the AV input jacks or the AUDIO1-2 jacks as the audio input
for AV1 or AV2. Refer to “Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals from a
jack other than HDMI” (☞
p. 17) for detailed setup guidance.
Select the AV input source (AV1-2) that is connected by component video cable to the playback
device for playback.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
AUDIO 1
O
PTI
C
A
L
O
PTI
C
AL
(
TV
)
A
V
1
A
V
2
A
V
3
A
V
4
A
V
5
A
V
6
AUDIO 2
CO
AXIAL
CO
AXIA
L
(C
D
)
(
BD
/
DVD)
HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
O
UT
AV
O
U
T
VIDE
O
D
OC
K
AR
C
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
ND
AM
M
O
NIT
O
R
OU
T
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
V
IDE
O
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
AUDIO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
R
L
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Component video / Audio
output
Game console
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Audio;;;AUDIO1
AV1
VOL.
If you have selected AUDIO1 input audio (Analog stereo)
En 19
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■
Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with video cables
Connect the playback device with a video pin cable to one of the AV3-6 input jacks.
Using optical digital audio output sources
Select the AV4 input that the playback device is connected to for playback.
Using coaxial digital audio output sources
Select the AV3 input that the playback device is connected to for playback.
Using analog stereo audio output sources
Select the AV5 or AV6 input that the playback device is connected to for playback.
OPTICAL
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
V
IDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTICA
L
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
C
OAXIA
L
COAXIAL
(C
D
)
(BD
/
DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
H
DMI
O
UT
AV
OUT
VIDE
O
DOCK
AR
C
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
N
D
AM
MO
NIT
O
R
O
UT
COMPONENT
VIDE
O
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
VIDEO
OPTICAL
V
V
O
O
Video / Audio (Optical)
output
BD/DVD player
COAXIAL
(CD)
VIDEO
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
V
IDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTICA
L
OPTICA
L
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
C
OAXIA
L
(BD
/
DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
H
DMI
O
UT
AV
OUT
DOCK
A
R
C
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
N
D
AM
MO
NIT
O
R
O
UT
COMPONENT
VIDE
O
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
VIDEO
COAXIAL
V
V
C
C
Video / Audio (Coaxial)
output
BD/DVD player
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
V
IDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTICA
L
OPTICA
L
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
C
OAXIA
L
COAXIAL
(C
D
)
(BD
/
DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
H
DMI
O
UT
AV
OUT
VIDE
O
DOCK
AR
C
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
N
D
AM
MO
NIT
O
R
O
UT
COMPONENT
VIDE
O
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
L
R
L
V
V
Video / Audio
output
BD/DVD player
En 20
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
■
Connecting CD players and other audio devices
Using analog stereo output sources
Select the audio input (AUDIO1-2) that the playback device is connected to for playback.
Using optical digital output sources
Select the AV input (AV1 or AV4) that the playback device is connected to for playback.
Using coaxial digital output sources
Select the AV input (AV2 or AV3) that the playback device is connected to for playback.
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
V
IDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTICA
L
OPTICA
L
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
C
OAXIA
L
COAXIAL
(C
D
)
(BD
/
DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
H
DMI
O
UT
AV
OUT
VIDE
O
DOCK
AR
C
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
N
D
AM
MO
NIT
O
R
O
UT
COMPONENT
VIDE
O
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
AUDIO
R
L
R
L
Audio output
CD player
OPTICAL OPTICAL
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
V
IDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
C
OAXIA
L
COAXIAL
(C
D
)
(BD
/
DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
H
DMI
O
UT
AV
OUT
VIDE
O
DOCK
A
R
C
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
N
D
AM
MO
NIT
O
R
O
UT
COMPONENT
VIDE
O
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
O
OPTICAL
CD player
Audio (Optical) output
We recommend connecting audio devices with an coaxial digital output to the AV3 coaxial digital
jack on this unit. This connection allows you to switch to the AV input 3 just by pressing the “CD”
SCENE key (☞
p. 29).
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD)
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
V
IDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTICA
L
OPTICA
L
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
(BD
/
DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
H
DMI
O
UT
AV
OUT
VIDE
O
DOCK
AR
C
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
N
D
AM
MO
NIT
O
R
O
UT
COMPONENT
VIDE
O
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
C
C
COAXIAL
Audio (Coaxial) output
CD player
En 21
CONNECTIONS
Connecting external components
Connecting video cameras and portable audio players
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect video cameras, video game units,
or portable audio devices to the receiver.
Select the V-AUX input to use these connected devices.
Transmitting input A/V to external components
This receiver can transmit selected incoming analog audio/video signals to external components
through the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks. You can record these input audio and video signals to
VCRs or similar devices, or send them to other TVs or external components.
Using the AV OUT jacks
Connect this jacks to the external component’s video input jack and analog audio input jacks.
Using the AUDIO OUT jacks
Connect this jack to the external component’s analog audio input jacks.
• Be sure to turn down the volume when connecting this unit and the other devices.
• When external components are connected to both the PORTABLE jack and the AUDIO jacks, the sound
output from the PORTABLE jack is transmitted.
VIDEO
AU X
STRAIGHT
RADIO
VIDEO
AUDIO
PORTABLE
LR
V
R
L
L
R
V
AU D I O
VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
Audio output
Portable audio player Video cameras
Audio output
Video output
HDMI audio/video signals, component video signals, and digital audio signals cannot be transmitted
from these jacks.
AV
OUT
AUDI O
OUT
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTI
C
AL
O
PTI
C
A
L
(
TV
)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
CO
AXIA
L
CO
AXIAL
(
CD
)
(
BD
/
DVD
)
HDMI
2
HDMI
1
HDMI
3
HDMI
4
FR
O
N
T
HDMI
OUT
V
IDE
O
D
OC
K
A
R
C
ANTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
ND
AM
MO
NIT
O
R
OUT
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
L
V
AUDIO
R
L
R
L
V
R
L
Audio recorder
Audio input
VCR
Video / Audio
input
En 22
CONNECTIONS
An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are supplied with this receiver. Connect these antennas
properly to their respective jacks.
Assembling the AM loop antenna
Connecting the FM/AM antennas
ANTENNA
FM
75ǡ
GND
AM
N
ENT
O
(BD
/
DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
HDMI
3
HDMI
OUT
VIDE
O
D
OCK
MONITOR OUT
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDEO
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
Indoor FM antenna
AM loop antenna
Position the AM antenna away from the receiver.
The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
You can connect either wire to the AM jack or the
GND jack.
Connecting the AM loop antenna
ReleaseInsertPress and hold
■ Improving FM reception
We recommend using an outdoor antenna. For more information, consult the nearest authorized
dealer.
■ Improving AM reception
Connect this unit to an outdoor antenna with a 5-10 m vinyl-coated wire. Make sure the AM loop
antenna is still connected.
Connecting the GND jack can reduce noise. Connect the jack to a store-bought ground bar or copper
plate with a vinyl-covered wire and bury this new attachment in moist ground.
The GND jack is not to be connected to the ground socket of an electrical outlet.
En 23
CONNECTIONS
This unit is equipped with a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) that adjusts the status, size, and volume balance of the speakers in order to provide an optimal sound field. Using
YPAO allows you to automatically configure settings for which specialist knowledge is usually needed, such as adjusting speaker output and acoustic parameters to suit your listening room (the room
in which this unit is placed). J1
1
Check the following before using YPAO.
This unit
• The headphones are removed.
Subwoofer
• The power is turned on.
• Volume is set to approximately half, and the cross-over frequency (if
present) is set to maximum.
2
Place the supplied YPAO microphone at ear height in
your listening position.
Face the head of the YPAO microphone upwards.
3
Switch this unit on.
4
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack
on the front panel.
“MIC ON. YPAO START” appears on the front panel display, and
then changes to display the following. J2
Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
When you use YPAO, a test tone will be output from the
speakers for approximately 3 minutes and acoustic measuring
will be performed. When using YPAO, be careful of the
following.
• The test tone is output at high volume. Please refrain from using
this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others nearby.
• Please take care that the test tone does not frighten any small
children.
VOLUME
MIN MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN MAX
Subwoofer examples
When positioning the microphone, we recommend that you use
equipment that allows you to adjust the height (such as a tripod)
as a microphone stand. When using a tripod, use the tripod
screws to fix the microphone in place.
YPAO microphone
INFO
YPAO MIC
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
SBL SBR
Press[SETUP]
YPAO
Continues to the
next page
J
1 : When you have changed the number of speakers or the locations in which they
are installed, first use YPAO to adjust the speaker balance.
J
2 : To cancel measurement, disconnect the YPAO microphone.
En 24
CONNECTIONS
Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
5
If necessary, press qOPTION repeatedly
and select the measuring acoustic
characteristics in the “EQ Type” setting. J1
During YPAO, the results of measuring the acoustic
characteristics are used to set the equalizer (parametric
equalizer) to give a unified sound field. After setting,
you can select the characteristics of the sound field in
“EQ Type,” as necessary.
6
Press iSETUP to start measurement.
The following display appears when measurement
finishes without any problems.
7
Press jENTER to apply the results of
measurement.
8
Remove the YPAO microphone.
YPAO finishes automatically when the YPAO
microphone is removed.
OPTION
SETUP
ENTER
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
U
T
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
j
i
iSETUP
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
qOPTION
Natural
(Default)
Adjusts all speaker sound to give natural
acoustics.
Flat Sets uniform characteristics for each
speaker. Choose this when all of the
speakers used are of the same quality. If
the treble range sounds harsh after
adjustment, select “Natural” and measure
again.
Front Sets the characteristics of each speaker to
match the front speakers. Choose this
when the front speakers are of
significantly higher quality than the other
speakers.
This completes preparations. To achieve more
accurate results, be careful of the following when
measuring.
• Measuring will take approximately 3 minutes. Keep
the room as quiet as possible during measurement.
• Wait in the corner of the listening room during
measurement or leave it entirely, to avoid becoming an
obstruction between the speakers and the YPAO
microphone.
To cancel the measurement, press jCursor B.
To restart the measurement, press jCursor C to
change the display, press jCursor D / E to select
“Retry” and press jENTER.
NOTE
When a problem occurs, an error message or report
appears either during or after measurement. Use the
following page as a reference to solve the problem,
and carry out YPAO again.
Display during measurement
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Progress02%
YPAO
SBL SBR
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
YPAOComplete
YPAO
You can use the following method to cancel
measurement results if you want to redo the
measuring. Press jCursor C to switch to the
following display, the use jCursor D / E to select
“Cancel” and press jENTER. After this operation,
use the same procedure to carry out YPAO again.
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. When you
have finished measuring, store the microphone out of
direct sunlight, and away from locations that may
experience high temperatures, such as on top of AV
equipment.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Disconnect MIC
YPAO
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Set>Cancel
YPAO
VOL.
J
1 : You can also select “EQ Type” using the cursor keys. Press
jCursor B to select “EQ Type,” and you can change the setting
using
jCursor D / E.
En 25
CONNECTIONS
Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
■
When an error message appears
during measurement
Check the content of the message from the “Error
message” (☞
p. 26) to resolve the problem, and carry out
the measurement process again.
Check the error code that appears in the display, and
carry out YPAO again by performing the following steps.
When “E-1,” “E-2,” “E-4” or “E-6” is
displayed:
1
Press jCursor C once, and then press
jCursor E to select “Exit.”
2
Press jENTER to finish YPAO, and switch
the unit to standby mode.
3
Check that the speakers are properly
connected.
4
Turn on the unit, and then carry out YPAO
again.
When “E-5,” “E-7,” “E-8” or “E-9” is
displayed:
1
Check that the environment is suitable for
accurate measurement.
2
Press jCursor C once to select “Retry.”
3
Press jENTER to carry out YPAO again.
When “E-10” is displayed:
1
Press jCursor C once to select “Exit.”
2
Press jENTER to finish YPAO.
3
Switch the unit to standby mode.
4
Turn on the unit again, and then carry out
YPAO.
■
When a warning message appears
after measurement
Check the content of the message from the “Warning
message” (☞
p. 27) to resolve the problem. You can
confirm the speaker that has the problem when that
speaker’s indicator lights up.
Confirm the warning message:
Press jENTER once.
When multiple warning messages exist:
Press jENTER to confirm the warning message and
use jCursor D / E to display other warning messages.
When applying the results of measurement:
If an warning message is displayed, press jENTER to
switch display, use jCursor D / E to select “Set,” and
press jENTER.
When cancelling YPAO:
If an warning message is displayed, press jENTER to
switch display, use jCursor D / E to select “Cancel,”
and press jENTER.
ENTER
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
S
ETU
P
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
U
T
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
jCursor C / D / E
jENTER
E-9:CANCEL
YPAO
VOL.
Error message (example)
NOTE
Although you can apply the results of measurement
when a warning message appears, doing so will not
provide optimal sound. We recommend you resolve
the problem and then carry out YPAO again.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
WARNING(1)
YPAO
VOL.
Number of messages
SL SR
W-3:LEVEL
YPAO
VOL.
Warning message (example)
Speaker that has a
problem
En 26
CONNECTIONS
Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
■
Message list
■ When a warning message appears before
measurement
■ Error message
NOTE
If the following messages appear, resolve the problems that have
occurred and carry out the measurement process again.
Connect MIC! The YPAO microphone is
not connected.
Connect the YPAO
microphone to the YPAO
MIC jack on the front
panel.
Unplug HP! The headphones are
connected.
Remove the headphones.
Memory Guard! The settings of this unit
are protected.
Set “Memory Guard” in
the Setup menu to “Off”
(☞p. 58).
E-1:FRONT SP The unit was not able to
find the front channel.
Check that the left and
right front speakers are
connected correctly.
E-2:SUR. SP The unit was only able to
find one of side of the
surround channels.
Check that the left and
right surround speakers
are connected correctly.
E-4:SBR->SBL Only one surround back
speaker is connected and
only the right side
surround back channel
sound is detected.
When only one surround
back speaker is
connected, connect to the
left side terminal on the
external amplifier.
E-5:NOISY The noise is too loud,
preventing accurate
measurements from
being taken.
Measure again in quiet
surroundings. Turn off any
devices in the room that
may be emitting noise, or
place them further away
from the YPAO
microphone.
When this message is
displayed, selecting
“Proceed” will allow you
to continue measuring.
However, we recommend
resolving the problem and
measuring again, as
continuing measurement
without doing so will not
give accurate results.
E-6:CHECK SUR. Even though surround
left and right speakers are
not connected, only the
surround back speakers
are connected.
When using surround back
speakers, connection of the
surround left/right
speakers is necessary.
E-7:NO MIC The YPAO microphone
has been removed.
While measuring, take
care not to touch the
YPAO microphone.
E-8:NO SIGNAL The YPAO microphone
could not distinguish a
test tone.
Check that the YPAO
microphone has been
installed correctly.
Check that each speaker
has been connected and
installed correctly.
The YPAO microphone
or the YPAO MIC jack
may be broken. Inquire at
the retailer where you
purchased this unit, or the
nearest Yamaha service
center.
E-9:CANCEL You have carried out an
operation that has
cancelled the measuring
process.
Carry out the measuring
process again. Do not
operate this unit by, for
example, adjusting the
volume.
E-10:INTERNAL An internal error has
occurred.
Carry out the measuring
process again. Contact a
Yamaha service center if
“E-10” appears again.
En 27
CONNECTIONS
Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)
■ Warning message
W-1:PHASE The speakers displayed
are connected with the
opposite polarity.
Depending on the type of
speakers you are using
and the environment in
which you have them
installed, this message
may occur even if the
speakers are connected
correctly.
Depending on the type of
speakers, “W-1” may
display even if the
speakers are connected
correctly.
Check that the speaker
polarity + (positive), and
- (negative) are correct. If
these are connected
correctly, you can use the
speakers normally even
this message appears.
W-2:DISTANCE The speakers displayed
are separated from the
listening position by
more than 24 m, and
cannot be adjusted
correctly.
Install the speakers with
24 m of the listening
point.
W-3:LEVEL The difference each
channel is too loud or too
low, and cannot be
adjusted correctly.
Check that all speakers
are installed in the same
surroundings.
Check that the speaker
polarity + (positive), and
- (negative) are correct.
We recommend the same
speakers or speakers with
as similar specifications
as possible.
Adjust the volume of the
subwoofer.
If “W-2” or “W-3” appears, you can apply measurement results,
but they will not give optimal results. We recommend that you
resolve the problem and carry out the measurement process
again.
En 28
PLAYBACK
1
Turn on external components (TV, DVD
player, etc.) connected to this unit.
2
Turn on this unit and select the input source
using dInput selector.
The name of the selected input source is displayed for
a few seconds. J1
3
Play the external component that you have
selected as the source input, or select a
radio station on the tuner.
Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the
external component for details on playback.
For details on the following operations, refer to the
corresponding pages:
• “FM/AM tuning” (☞p. 34)
• “Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™”
(☞
p. 39)
• “Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components”
(☞
p. 42)
4
Press rVOLUME +/- to adjust the volume.
To mute the output.
Press sMUTE to mute the audio output.
Press sMUTE again to unmute.
Adjusting high/low-frequency sound
(Tone control)
You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range
(Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds
output from the front left and right speakers to obtain
desired tone.
1
Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.”
The current setting is displayed on the front panel
display.
2
Press PROGRAM l / h to adjust the output
level in those frequency ranges.
The display returns to the previous display soon after
you release the key.
Basic playback procedure
dInput selector
rVOLUME +/-
sMUTE
VOLUME
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
1234
1234
1256
V-AUX
TUNER
MUTE
DOCK
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
S
ETU
P
RETURN
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
U
T
M
U
T
E
[
A
]
[
B
]
s
r
d
The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be
set separately. Set the headphone tone control with the
headphones connected.
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
TV
BD
DVD
CD
RADIO
INPUT
PROGRAM
SCENE
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM l / h
YPAO MIC
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Treble 0.0dB
TONE
VOL.
Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Adjustment
increments
2.0 dB
If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not
match those from other channels well.
J
1 : You can change the input source name displayed on the front
panel display as necessary (☞
p. 57).
En 29
PLAYBACK
This unit has a SCENE function that allows you switch this unit on and change input sources and sound field programs with one key.
Four scenes are available for different uses, such as
playing movies or music. The following input sources
and sound field programs are provided as the initial
factory settings.
Registering input sources/sound
field program
1
Use dInput selector to select the input
source you want to register.
2
Use the gSound selection keys to select
the sound field program you want to
register.
3
Press the hSCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front panel
display.
This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel playback for almost any sound source using various
sound field programs stored on the chip, and a range of sound decoders.
Selecting sound field programs and
sound decoders
This unit offers sound field settings (sound field
programs) in many different categories suitable for
movies, music and other uses. Choose a sound field
program that sounds best with the source you are playing
back, rather than relying on the name or explanation of
the program.
Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function)
dInput selector
gSound selection keys
hSCENE
SCENE
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT DIRECT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
1234
1234
1256
V-AUX
TUNER
MOVIE MUSIC
STEREO
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
DOCK
R
E
C
EIVER
O
PTI
ON
S
ETU
P
RETURN
V
O
L
U
M
E
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MU
TE
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
P
OP-U
P
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
[
A
]
[
B
]
h
g
d
SCENE Input Sound field program
BD/DVD HDMI1 Straight
TV AV4 Straight
CD AV3 Straight
RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer
When changing “SCENE,” also change the external
component that the remote control operates
(☞p. 62).
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
SET Complete
SCENE1
VOL.
Release the key when “SET Complete” is displayed
Enjoying sound field programs
• Sound field programs are stored for each input source.
When you change the input source, the sound field
program previously selected for that input source is
applied again.
• When you playback DTS Express sources or audio
signals with sampling frequency of higher than
96 kHz, the straight decoding mode (☞
p. 30) is
automatically selected.
• When you playback DTS-HD sources with CINEMA
DSP, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.
Continues to the
next page
En 30
PLAYBACK
Enjoying sound field programs
Selects sound field program:
MOVIE category: Press gMOVIE repeatedly
MUSIC category: Press gMUSIC repeatedly
Selects stereo reproduction:
Press gSTEREO repeatedly
Selects compressed music enhancer:
Press gSTEREO repeatedly
Selects surround decoder:
Press gSUR. DECODE repeatedly
Switches Straight decoding mode:
Press gSTRAIGHT
Switches Direct mode (☞p. 31):
Press gDIRECT
■
Enjoying unprocessed playback
(Straight decoding mode)
Use straight decoding mode when you want to playback
sound without sound field processing. You can playback
as follows in straight decoding mode.
2-channel sources such as CD
Stereo sound plays through the front left and right
speakers.
Multi-channel playback sources such as BD/
DVD
Plays back audio from a playback source without
applying sound field effects, using an appropriate
decoder to split the signal into multiple channels.
Press gSTRAIGHT to enable the straight
decoding mode.
■
Enjoying stereo playback
Select “2ch Stereo” from the surround field programs
when you want to playback 2-channel stereo sound
(from the front speakers only), regardless of the
playback source.
Selecting “2ch Stereo” will playback as follows for the
playback of CD and BD/DVD sources.
2-channel sources such as CD
Stereo sound plays back through the front speakers.
Multi-channel sources such as BD/DVD
Playback channels other than the front channels in the
playback source are mixed with the front channels and
played back through the front speakers.
Press gSTEREO repeatedly to select “2ch
Stereo.”
g
Sound selection keys
gMOVIE
gMUSIC
gSTEREO
gSUR. DECODE
gSTRAIGHT
gDIRECT
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
STRAIGHT DIRECT
MOVIE MUSIC
STEREO
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
S
ETU
P
RETURN
V
O
L
U
M
E
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
P
OP-U
P
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
g
• You can use the speaker indicators on the front panel
display to check what speakers are currently
outputting sound (☞
p. 7).
• You can adjust sound field elements (sound field
parameters) for each of the programs.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Sci-Fi
MOVIE
VOL.
Sound field program categories
Program
To disable straight decoding mode, press
gSTRAIGHT again.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Straight
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Sci-Fi
MOVIE
VOL.
Previously selected program
To disable stereo playback, press any of the gSound
selection keys to select a sound field program other
than “2ch Stereo.”
SW
L
R
2ch Stereo
STEREO
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Hall in Vienna
MUSIC
VOL.
En 31
PLAYBACK
Enjoying sound field programs
■
Enjoying sound field programs
without surround sound speakers
This unit allows you to use virtual surround speakers to
enjoy sound field surround effects, even without any
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP mode). You
can even enjoy surround sound presence with just a
minimal configuration of the front speakers only.
This unit will switch to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode
automatically when surround speakers are
unavailable. J1
■
Enjoying sound field programs
with headphones
Even when headphones are connected, you can enjoy the
reproduction sound field presence with ease (SILENT
CINEMA mode). J2
■
Enjoying Hi-Fi Sound Quality
(Direct mode)
Use Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity sound of
the selected source. When direct mode is enabled, this
unit plays back the selected source with the least
circuitry. J3
Press gDIRECT to turn direct mode on. J4
gDIRECT
DIRECT
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
S
ETU
P
RETURN
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
P
OP-U
P
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
g
To disable direct mode, press gDIRECT again.
VOL.
L
R
Direct
J
1 : However, Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is not available in the
following conditions:
• When headphones are connected to this unit.
• When a “7ch Stereo” sound field program is selected.
• When direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.
J
2 : However, SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the
following conditions:
• When a “7ch Stereo” sound field program is selected.
• When direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.
J
3 : The following features are disabled in direct mode.
• sound field program, tone control
• display and operation of the Option menu and Setup menu
J
4 : While direct mode is on, the front panel display screen becomes
dim in order to reduce noise. When turning Direct mode off, the
brightness of the screen returns to the previous setting.
En 32
PLAYBACK
Enjoying sound field programs
Sound field programs
■
Category: MOVIE
Sound field programs optimized for viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, and games.
■
Category: MUSIC
This sound field is suitable when listening to music sources such as CDs.
in the table indicates the sound field program for CINEMA DSP.
Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without disturbing the
original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has
been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It
reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches cinemascope and wider-screen movies
with an excellent dynamic range providing everything from very small sound effects to
large, impressive sounds.
Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science
fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically
created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and
background music.
Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also
restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the
sound.
Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from
serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an
optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically
around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even
after long hours of viewing.
Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in
an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion
and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound
depth.
Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety
programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and
sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands
in an optimal space to offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium.
Action Game This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses
reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing
environment that makes the listener feel as if they are right there by enhancing various
effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions.
Roleplaying Game This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound
field effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth
and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the
movie scenes in the game.
Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using
stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine,
beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual
seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is
traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from
all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a
palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber
music.
Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic,
live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460
seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once.
The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant
sound.
Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz
music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field
that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments,
and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
En 33
PLAYBACK
Enjoying sound field programs
■
Category: STEREO
Suitable for listening to stereo sources.
■
Category: ENHNCR (Compressed music enhancer)
Suitable for listening to compressed audio, such as MP3.
■
Category: SUR.DEC (Surround decode mode)
Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sound
sources in up to 7-channels using a surround decoder.
2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2-channels. When multi-channel
signals are input, they are down mixed to 2-channels and output from the front left and right
speakers.
7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback multi-channel
sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2-channels, and then outputs the sound from all
speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at
parties, etc.
Straight Enhancer Use this program to restore the original depth and dynamics of 2-channel or multi-channel
to compression audio.
7ch Enhancer Use this program to playback compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.
q Pro Logic Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of sound
sources.
q PLIIx Movie /
q PLII Movie
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is
suitable for movies. J1
q PLIIx Music /
q PLII Music
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is
suitable for music. J1
q PLIIx Game /
q PLII Game
Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is
suitable for games. J1
Neo:6 Cinema Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for music.
J
1 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions:
• When the “Sur. B” setting in “Speaker Setup” of the Setup menu is set to “None.”
• When headphones are connected.
En 34
PLAYBACK
The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following
two modes for tuning.
Normal tuning
You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching
or specifying its frequency.
Preset tuning (☞p. 35)
You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by
registering them to specific numbers, and later just select
those numbers to tune in.
Selecting a frequency for reception
(Normal tuning)
1
Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.
2
Press eFM or eAM to select a band to
receive.
FM/AM tuning
dTUNER
eFM
eAM
TUNER
FM AM
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
S
ETU
P
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
d
e
When using the FM/AM tuner, adjust the direction of
the FM/AM antenna connected to this unit to get the
best reception.
(Asia and General models only)
The factory pre-set FM/AM tuner frequency steps are
9 kHz for AM and 50 kHz for FM.
Carry out the following settings and select the
frequency steps suitable for your listening
environment.
1
Switch this unit to the standby mode.
2
Press A while pressing and holding
STRAIGHT on the front panel.
Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is
displayed on the front panel display.
After approximately a few seconds, the top menu
items are displayed. J1
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
TV
BD
DVD
CD
RADIO
INPUT
PROGRAM
SCENE
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
YPAO MIC
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM l / h
A
3
Press PROGRAM h repeatedly to display
“TU.”
4
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a
frequency steps.
5
Switch this unit to the standby mode, and
then switch it on again.
The power turns on, with the settings you made
configured.
FM/AM tuner frequencies will differ depending on
the country or region where the unit is being used.
This explanation uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
TU-AM9/FM50
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
FM87.50MHz
VOL.
Continues to the
next page
J
1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as
needed (Advanced Setup menu)” (☞
p. 65) for details on the
Advanced Setup menu.
En 35
PLAYBACK
FM/AM tuning
3
Use eTUNING H / I to set a frequency to
receive.
e
TUNING H
Increases the frequency. Press and hold this key for
longer than a second to search automatically for a station
on a higher frequency than the current one. J1
e
TUNING I
Decreases the frequency. Press and hold this key for
longer than a second to search automatically for a station
on a lower frequency than the current one. J1
Registering and recalling a
frequency (Preset tuning)
You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations as preset
stations. There are two methods of presetting stations,
“Auto Preset” and “Manual Preset.” Use one of these
methods to register stations.
■
Presetting FM stations
automatically (Auto Preset)
The tuner detects FM stations with strong signals and
registers up to 40 automatically.
1
Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option
menu. J3
3
Use jCursor B / C to select “Auto Preset.”
d
TUNER
eTUNING H / I
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
lNumeric keys
qOPTION
OPTION
TUNER
TUNING
ENTER
7 856
90
10
1234
ENT
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
S
ETU
P
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
RE
C
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
l
j
e
d
■ Entering a frequency number
In normal tuning mode, use the lNumeric keys on
the remote control to enter a frequency. Leave the
decimal point out when entering a number. J2
For example, enter as follows to select a station on
98.50MHz.
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
FM98.50MHz
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
Lights up when receiving
a broadcast from a station
Lights up when receiving
a stereo broadcast
9 8
5
■ When signal reception is poor
When you are receiving an FM broadcast and cannot
obtain a stable stereo broadcast, you can force this
unit to receive in a monaural mode.
1
Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner
input.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option
menu. J3
3
Use jCursor B / C to select “FM Mode.”
4
Press jENTER and use jCursor D / E to
select “Mono.”
5
When setting is completed, press
qOPTION to close the Option menu.
To return this unit to its original settings, use the
same procedure and select “Stereo” in step 4.
FMMode
OPTION
VOL.
FMMode:Mono
9850
VOL.
AM stations cannot be automatically registered. Use
manual station preset (☞
p. 36).
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Auto Preset
OPTION
VOL.
Continues to the
next page
J
1 : When searching for a station, release the key once the search has
started.
J
2 : “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you
enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that
the frequency entered is correct.
J
3 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input
source (Option menu)” (☞
p. 44) for details on the Option menu.
En 36
PLAYBACK
FM/AM tuning
4
Press jENTER, then press ePRESET F /
G or jCursor B / C to choose the present
number from which to start the Auto Preset
function.
Auto Preset will begin approximately 5 seconds after
you select a preset number.
If you do not select a preset number, Auto Preset will
begin approximately 5 seconds after “READY” is
displayed.
The Option menu closes automatically when presetting
is complete. J1
■
Registering stations manually
(Manual Preset)
Select stations manually and register them as presets
individually.
1
Tune in to the station you want to register,
referring to “Selecting a frequency for
reception (Normal tuning)” (☞
p. 34).
2
Use one of the following methods to
register the station you are currently
receiving.
■ Registering to a preset number to which no
station is registered
Press eMEMORY for 3 seconds or longer.
The station will be registered automatically to the lowest
open preset number (or the next number after the one
registered most recently).
■ Designating a preset number for
registration
Press eMEMORY once, to display “Manual Preset” on
the front panel display. After a small wait, the preset
number that the station has been registered to will
appear.
Press ePRESET F / G to select the preset to register
the station to, and then press eMEMORY to register.
e
MEMORY
ePRESET F / G
jCursor B / C
jENTER
jRETURN
RETURN
MEMORY
PRESET
ENTER
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
S
ETU
P
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
AM
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
e
To cancel registration, press jRETURN.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
01:FM87.50MHz
READY
VOL.
Selecting a preset number
Status Frequency
Preset number
SEARCH MEMORY
During Auto Preset
Search
Preset for stations
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Auto Preset
FINISH
VOL.
When Auto Preset is complete
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
01:FM98.50MHz
MEMORY
VOL.
Registered frequencies
To cancel registration, press jRETURN or do not
operate the remote control for about 30 seconds.
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
01:Empty
9850
VOL.
Preset number
The newly registered frequency
Empty, or the frequency registered
most previously
Blinks
J
1 : The preset with the lowest preset number will be selected
automatically immediately after presetting.
En 37
PLAYBACK
FM/AM tuning
Recalling a preset station
You can call preset stations registered by automatic
station preset or manual station preset. J1
To select a registered station, press ePRESET
F / G to select the preset number of the
station. J2
Clearing preset stations
1
Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option
menu. J3
3
Use jCursor B / C to display “Clear
Preset” and press jENTER.
4
Use jCursor B / C to select the preset
number you want to clear, and press
jENTER to clear it.
5
Press qOPTION to finish this operation.
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by
FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive
various Radio Data System data such as “Program
Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text,” “Clock Time”
when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting
stations.
■
Displaying the Radio Data System
information
You can display the 4 types of the Radio Data System
information: “Program Service,” “Program Type,”
“Radio Text,” “Clock Time.”
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
dTUNER
ePRESET F / G
jCursor B / C
jENTER
jRETURN
lNumeric keys
qOPTION
OPTION
RETURN
TUNER
PRESET
ENTER
7 856
90
10
1234
ENT
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
S
ETU
P
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
RE
C
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
l
j
e
d
Press jRETURN to cancel the operation.
Repeat this operation to clear the registration of
multiple numbers.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
01:FM98.50MHz
CLEAR
VOL.
The number of the preset to be cleared
Blinks Registered frequencies
We recommend that you use the automatic preset
tuning to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (☞
p. 35).
Continues to the
next page
J
1 : Preset numbers to which no stations are registered will be
skipped. “No Presets” is displayed when there are no stations are
registered.
J
2 : To select a station by selecting a preset number, use the
lNumeric keys to enter the preset number of the station you
want to listen. When an invalid number is entered, “Wrong Num.”
appears on the front panel display. Check that you have entered
the correct number.
J
3 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input
source (Option menu)” (☞
p. 44) for details on the Option menu.
En 38
PLAYBACK
FM/AM tuning
2
Press fINFO repeatedly until the desired
information is displayed.
Information on the display changes as you press the
key. The kind of information is displayed for a while
and then the information is displayed. J1
Contents of information are as follows.
Front panel display (When “Program Type”
selected)
■
Automatic traffic information
reception (U.K. and Europe models
only)
When the tuner is active, this unit can automatically
search for and receive transmissions from traffic
information broadcast stations. To start this function:
1
Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option
menu. J2
3
Use jCursor B / C to select
“TrafficProgram.”
4
Press jENTER to start the search function.
When a traffic station is found, it will appear on the
display and the Option menu will close.
OPTION
RETURN
TUNER
INFO
ENTER
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
S
ETU
P
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
FM
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
P
OP-U
P
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
j
f
d
dTUNER
fINFO
jCursor B / C
jENTER
jRETURN
qOPTION
Type of information Description
Program Service Displays the name of the Radio Data
System program service currently
being received.
Program Type Displays the type of the Radio Data
System program currently being
received.
Radio Text Displays the information on the
Radio Data System program
currently being received.
Clock Time Displays the current time.
DSP Program Displays the currently selected
sound field program.
Audio Decoder Displays the currently selected
surround decoder.
ProgramService ProgramType RadioText
ClockTime
DSPProgramAudioDecoder
(Frequency display)
“Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and
“Clock Type” do not appear when the radio station
does not provide the Radio Data System service.
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
CLASSICS
10800
VOL.
Frequency
Program Type
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
VolumeTrim
OPTION
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
TrafficProgram
OPTION
VOL.
• The transmission search will begin in approximately
5 seconds. Or, when the status indicator reads
“READY,” you can begin the search immediately by
pressing
jENTER.
• By pressing
jRETURN right before or during a
search, it will return to the Option menu.
• When the status is “READY,” use
jCursor B / C to
start a search in the specified direction.
jCursor B: Searches upward from the current
frequency.
jCursor C: Searches downward from the current
frequency.
If the receiver cannot find a traffic station, “TP Not
Found” will appear on the display, and the Option
menu will shortly close.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
TrafficProgram
READY
VOL.
Status
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
TPFM101.30MHz
FINISH
VOL.
Traffic information broadcast station (Frequency)
J
1 : “PTY Wait,” “RT Wait,” or “CT Wait” may appear when Program
Type, Radio Text, or Clock Time is displayed. That shows this
unit is receiving data (or stopping receiving data). If the data is
receivable, the corresponding information is displayed after a
while.
J
2 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input
source (Option menu)” (☞
p. 44) for details on the Option menu.
En 39
PLAYBACK
Once you have connected a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-12, sold separately) to this unit, you can enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone using the remote
control supplied with this unit. When playing back from an iPod/iPhone, you can also use the compressed music enhancer sound field programs (☞
p. 33) to give
compressed audio formats such as MP3 a sharper, more dynamic sound.
Connecting the Yamaha iPod
universal dock
Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the
DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to the
operating instructions of the iPod universal dock for
information on how to connect your iPod/iPhone.
Switch this unit on and place your iPod/iPhone in the
dock. The unit is now ready for playback.
Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™
After setting your iPod/iPhone in your dock, just press
dDOCK to switch to DOCK input to play your iPod/
iPhone.
The iPod/iPhone can be operated in the following two
ways.
Simple play mode:
Plays audio and video through this unit while viewing
the menu displayed on the iPod/iPhone screen.
Menu browse mode:
Plays the iPod/iPhone while viewing the menu displayed
on the front panel display.
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
• iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, iPod mini, iPhone, iPhone 3G, and iPhone 3GS are supported (As of March 2010).
• When connecting an iPhone, please use a YDS-12.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
• Some functions may not be available for some Yamaha iPod universal dock models. This explanation focuses on the YDS-12.
dDOCK
DOCK
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
S
ETU
P
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
ENTER
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
[
A
]
[
B
]
d
CAUTION
To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode
before connecting an iPod universal dock.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
iPodconnected
DOCK
VOL.
DOCK
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTI
C
AL
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
CO
AXIA
L
CO
AXIAL
(
CD
)
V
IDE
O
Yamaha iPod universal dock
En 40
PLAYBACK
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
Use the following remote control keys to operate
(playback, stop, skip, etc.) your iPod/iPhone. You can
check song information on the iPod/iPhone screen. J1
1
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
2
Press kDISPLAY on the remote control to
change between menu browse mode and
simple remote mode, as required.
When you select menu browse mode, the front panel
display changes as follows.
3
Press jCursor B / C to select the content
(music or video) that you want to play, and
press jCursor E. J2
4
Select iPod/iPhone menu items using
jCursor B / C / D / E, and press jENTER
to play. J3
INFO
ENTER
DISPLAY
DOCK
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
S
ETU
P
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
[
A
]
[
B
]
k
j
f
k
d
dDOCK
fINFO
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
kDISPLAY
ks
ke
kp
kw
kf
k b
ka
dDOCK Switch to the DOCK (iPod) input.
jCursor B / C
Move the cursor up and down to different
fields.
jCursor D / E
Return to the previous menu or enter the
menu you have selected.
jENTER Enter the selected menu.
kDISPLAY
Switches between simple play mode or
menu browse mode.
k w Searches backwards while held down.
k f Searches forwards while held down.
k b
Skip to the beginning of the currently
playing song. Pressing repeatedly skips
one song backwards with each press.
k a Skip to the beginning of the next song.
k s Stops playback.
k e Switches between playback and pause.
k p Switches between playback and pause.
• Information on the iPod/iPhone can only be displayed
in alphanumeric characters. “_” (underscore) is
displayed for characters that this unit cannot display.
• When displaying play information in menu browse
mode, song information (Artist, Album, Song) is
displayed on the front panel. Change the displayed
information by pressing
fINFO repeatedly.
• (Except iPod touch and iPhone) In menu browse
mode, the “Yamaha Mark” will be displayed on the
iPod/iPhone screen. You cannot directly control your
iPod/iPhone while this mark is displayed.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Music
DOCK
VOL.
J
1 : Controls on the iPod/iPhone can also be operated in simple
playback mode.
J
2 : Videos will not be displayed when your iPod or Yamaha iPod
universal dock do not support the browser function for browsing
video files.
J
3 : When watching the video contents of iPod/iPhone, connect the
VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack on this unit to the VIDEO input
jack on the TV with a video pin cable (☞
p. 16).
En 41
PLAYBACK
Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™
■
Shuffle/Repeat playback
You can use special playback functions such as shuffle
playback and repeat playback by first displaying the
Option menu.
1
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
2
Press kDISPLAY to switch to menu browse
mode.
3
Press qOPTION to display the Option
menu. J1
4
Press jCursor B / C to select the desired
playback function, “Shuffle” or “Repeat,”
then press jENTER.
Shuffle
Plays back songs or albums in random order.
Repeat
Plays songs or albums repeatedly.
5
Press jCursor D / E to select the desired
playback function.
6
To close the Option menu, press qOPTION.
7
Play the iPod/iPhone.
Playback of the iPod/iPhone starts using the function
selected in step 5.
dDOCK
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
kDISPLAY
qOPTION
OPTION
ENTER
DISPLAY
DOCK
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
S
ETU
P
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
k
j
d
Off Does not play back songs or albums in
random order.
Songs Plays “Songs” back in random order.
Albums Plays “Albums” back in random order.
Off Does not play back songs or albums
repeatedly.
One Plays a “Song” back repeatedly.
All When all “Songs” have completed
playback, returns to the start and repeats
playback.
To disable Shuffle/Repeat playback, redo the above
steps, and return settings to “Off.”
■ To charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit
is in standby mode
If you connect an iPod/iPhone to the iPod universal
dock the iPod/iPhone will always charge when this
unit is turned on.
This unit can charge an iPod/iPhone even when in
standby mode (iPod Standby Charge function).
Check the HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator on
the front panel of this unit to check whether this unit
is charging an iPod/iPhone during in standby mode.
While charging an iPod/iPhone, the HDMI Through/
iPod Charge indicator lights. When Standby Through
function is off, the indicator goes out after the
charging is complete.
If necessary, you can also disable the iPod Standby
Charge function.
1
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK
input.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option
menu.
3
Use jCursor B / C to display “Standby
Charge” and press jENTER.
4
Use jCursor D / E to switch the setting
to “Off.”
5
When setting is completed, press
qOPTION to close the Option menu.
To enable the Standby Charge function again, carry
out this procedure again and change the “Standby
Charge” setting back to “Auto.”
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
StandbyCharge
OPTION
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Charge;;;;;Off
DOCK
VOL.
J
1 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input
source (Option menu)” (☞
p. 44) for details on the Option menu.
En 42
PLAYBACK
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as the YBA-10, sold separately) to this unit and enjoy wireless playback from Bluetooth-compatible
portable music players. J1
Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver
Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the
DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit.
The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection will be
complete when this unit is turned on.
Pairing Bluetooth™ components
Be sure to carry out pairing when connecting a Bluetooth
component for the first time, or when settings have been
deleted.
Refer to the operating instructions of your Bluetooth
component as necessary when carrying out pairing.
1
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
2
Turn on the Bluetooth component you want
to pair with and set it to pairing mode.
3
Press qOPTION to display the Option menu
and use jCursor B / C to select “Pairing.”
4
Press jENTER to start pairing.
5
Make sure the Bluetooth component
recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver.
When the device is recognized, it will appear in the
Bluetooth component list, for example as “YBA-10
YAMAHA.”
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components
NOTE
When playing back from a Bluetooth component for the first time, you must first pair the devices (register the Bluetooth components). When establishing a wireless connection
you must carry out pairing on both this unit and on the Bluetooth component.
dDOCK
eMEMORY
jCursor B / C
jENTER
jRETURN
qOPTION
OPTION
RETURN
MEMORY
ENTER
DOCK
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
S
ETU
P
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
j
e
d
CAUTION
To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode
before connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
DOCK
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTI
C
AL
AV
1
AV
2
AV
3
CO
AXIA
L
CO
AXIAL
(
CD
)
V
IDE
O
Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver
The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be
paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When
the ninth device is paired, the pairing settings for the
device which has not been used for the longest period
of time will be deleted.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Pairing
OPTION
VOL.
• To cancel pairing, press jRETURN.
• You can also press and hold
eMEMORY on the front
panel to begin pairing.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Searching...
DOCK
VOL.
Continues to the
next page
J
1 : This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
of the Bluetooth profile.
En 43
PLAYBACK
Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components
6
Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
from the Bluetooth component list, and
enter a pass key “0000” into the Bluetooth
component. J1
7
To finish pairing, press jRETURN.
Using Bluetooth™ components
When pairing is complete, carry out the following
procedure to achieve a wireless connection between this
unit and the Bluetooth component. When the wireless
connection is complete, you playback from Bluetooth
components.
1
Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.
2
Press qOPTION to display the Option
menu.
3
Use jCursor B / C to select “Connect” and
press jENTER. J2
4
Operate the Bluetooth component for
playback.
d
DOCK
jCursor B / C
jENTER
jRETURN
qOPTION
OPTION
RETURN
ENTER
DOCK
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
S
ETU
P
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
j
d
Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless
connection is established automatically or by
operating the Bluetooth components. In that case, it is
not necessary to carry out the following procedure.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Completed
DOCK
VOL.
When pairing occurs correctly
“Not found” is displayed when there is an error
connecting. Check that the following conditions have
been satisfied, and try to establish a wireless
connection again.
• Both this unit and the Bluetooth component are paired.
• The Bluetooth component is switched on.
• The Bluetooth component is within 10 meters/32 feet
of the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
To disconnect a wireless connection, repeat the same
steps, and in step 3, select “Disconnect.”
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
BTconnected
DOCK
VOL.
When wireless connection is complete
J
1 : Depending on Bluetooth components, wireless connection is
carried out right after the pairing. In this case, “BT connected” is
displayed instead of “Completed.”
J
2 : “Disconnect” is displayed when a Bluetooth component has been
connected.
En 44
SETUP
This receiver has a unique option menu specific for each type of input source, such as volume trim for compatible input sources, audio/video data display for signals from
playback devices, and other frequently used menu items.
Option menu display and setup
1
Use the dInput selector on the remote
control to select the Option menu you want
to display.
2
Press qOPTION.
The Option menu appears for the desired input source.
3
Select the desired control/setup item using
jCursor B / C and press jENTER.
The displayed Option menu items differ depending on
the input source.
For details, read the following Option menu items
section.
4
Select the desired menu item (or enable a
function) using jCursor B / C / D / E and
jENTER.
Parameters of the selected item are displayed. The
parameters you can set differ depending on the menu
items.
5
To close the Option menu, press qOPTION.
Option menu items
The following menu items are provided for each input
source.
Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)
dInput selector
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
jRETURN
qOPTION
OPTION
RETURN
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
1234
1234
1256
V-AUX
TUNER
ENTER
DOCK
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
S
ETU
P
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
[
A
]
[
B
]
q
j
d
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
VolumeTrim
OPTION
VOL.
Option menu
• You can also use jRETURN to return to the previous
screen or close the Option menu.
• Certain selected menu items may automatically close
the Option menu when their functions are carried out.
For a few seconds after closing the Option menu, the
remote control keys may not function. If this occurs,
reselect the input source.
HDMI1-4 Volume Trim Decoder Mode EXTD
Surround
Audio In Signal Info
AV1-2 Volume Trim Decoder Mode EXTD
Surround
Audio In Signal Info
AV3-4 Volume Trim Decoder Mode EXTD
Surround
Signal Info
AV5-6 Volume Trim
AUDIO1-2 Volume Trim
V-AUX Volume Trim
TUNER Volume Trim FM Mode Auto
Preset
Clear Preset TrafficProgram J1
iPod
(DOCK)
Volume Trim Shuffle Repeat
Standby Charge
Bluetooth
(DOCK)
Volume Trim Connect/
Disconnect
Pairing
JJ
1 : U.K. and Europe models only.
En 45
SETUP
Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)
■
Adjusting volume between input sources
Input source: All
Reduces any change in volume when switching between input
sources by correcting volume differences in each input source. You
can adjust this parameter for each input source.
■
Setting the format of digital audio signals
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1
Sets the format of digital audio to playback to DTS. For example, if
the format is not automatically detected correctly even during
playback of DTS format audio, this menu item can be used to set
the playback format to DTS.
■
Selecting the 5.1-channel signal playback
method
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1
Selects whether to reproduce 5.1-channel input signals in 6.1- or
7.1-channel when surround back speakers are used. J2
Volume Trim
Adjustable range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Default setting 0.0 dB
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB steps
Decoder Mode
Auto (Default) The audio format is automatically selected to match
the format of the input audio.
DTS Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not
reproduced.
EXTD Surround
Auto (Default) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if a
flag for reproducing surround back channel is present,
and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
q PLIIx Movie Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder whether or not
surround back channel signals are contained. You can
select this parameter when two surround back
speakers are connected.
q PLIIx Music Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel
using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder whether
or not surround back channel signals are contained.
You can select this parameter when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
EX/ES Automatically selects the most suitable decoder for
input signals whether or not the flag for reproducing
surround back channel is present, and always
reproduces signals in 6.1-channel.
Off Always reproduces original channels whether or not
the flag for reproducing surround back channel is
present.
JJ
1 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when the “Audio Return Channel”
function is on, and the source is used for the TV audio input (TVAudio).
J
2 : This feature is available when connecting the surround back speakers via an
external amplifier connected to the PRE OUT jacks on this unit.
En 46
SETUP
Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)
■
Combining HDMI/AV1-2 input source
video and audio
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-2
Combines video from HDMI or AV input sources with analog/
digital audio inputs in situations such as:
– an playback device is connected with an HDMI cable but cannot
transmit audio through HDMI
– an playback device with component video output and analog
audio output (such as certain game consoles) are connected to the
system
To change assignments, select an input source (HDMI1-4 or AV1-2)
as the video input first, and then select audio input jacks in this
menu.
Set as follows according on the desired combination of audio input
jacks.
■
Displaying information on audio/video
signals
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1
Displays information on digital audio and video signals on the
front panel display.
Audio information
Video information
Audio In
Audio inputs Settings method
Optical digital audio
input
Select AV1 or AV4. Connect the external component
audio cable to the optical digital jack for the selected
input.
Coaxial digital audio
input
Select AV2 or AV3. Connect the external component
audio cable to the coaxial digital jack for the selected
input.
Analog audio input Select one of AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2.
Connect the external component audio cable to the
audio jack for the selected input.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Audio;;;;;;AV1
HDMI1
VOL.
Assignable audio input jacks
Inputs that change the audio source
• For details of settings, refer to “Receiving video signals from the
HDMI jack and audio signals from a jack other than HDMI”
(☞
p. 17) and “Component connections to analog audio output
devices” (☞
p. 18).
• To return audio inputs to their previous settings, display this item
again, and select the original input jack.
Signal Info
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
DolbyD
FORMAT
VOL.
Menu item
Information
FORMAT Format of audio signals.
CHAN The number of input signal channels (front/surround/
LFE).
For example, if input signal channels are 3 front
channels, 2 surrounds and LFE, “3/2/0.1” is
displayed.
If a channel that cannot be expressed as the above, a
total number of channels such as “5.1ch” may be
displayed.
SAMPL The sampling frequency of analog-to-digital
conversion.
B RATE The bit rate of input signal per second.
V IN Format and resolution of video input signal.
V OUT Format and resolution of video output signal.
V.MSG
(appears only
when an error
has occurred)
Error messages about HDMI signals and components.
Error message
HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed.
Device Over The number of connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
• “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are being received, and
“---” is displayed if this unit cannot recognize the incoming
signal.
• The bit rate may vary during playback.
JJ
1 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when the “Audio Return Channel”
function is on, and the source is used for the TV audio input (TVAudio).
En 47
SETUP
Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)
■
Changing FM mode (Stereo/Monaural)
Input source: TUNER
Sets this unit to automatically match FM broadcast frequencies in
stereo, or to convert the frequency to monaural (☞
p. 35).
■
Automatically presetting FM radio
stations
Input source: TUNER
Automatically detects radio stations in the FM frequency and
registers them as preset stations (☞
p. 35).
■
Clearing preset FM stations
Input source: TUNER
Clears the preset stations (☞p. 37).
■
Searching for traffic information
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Input source: TUNER
Automatically searches for traffic information with the Radio Data
System (☞
p. 38).
■
Charging an iPod™/iPhone™ in standby
mode
Input source: DOCK (iPod)
Charges an iPod/iPhone stationed in the iPod universal dock while
the receiver is in standby mode (☞
p. 41).
■
Shuffle playback with iPod/iPhone
Input source: DOCK (iPod)
Changes the shuffle playback style on iPod (☞p. 41).
■
Repeat playback with iPod/iPhone
Input source: DOCK (iPod)
Changes the repeat playback style on iPod (☞p. 41).
■
Connect / Disconnect Bluetooth
component
Input source: DOCK (Bluetooth)
Switches communication with a Bluetooth component on and off
(☞
p. 43).
■
Pairing Bluetooth component
Input source: DOCK (Bluetooth)
Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component (☞p. 42).
FM Mode
Auto Preset
Clear Preset
TrafficProgram
Standby Charge
Shuffle
Repeat
Connect
Disconnect
Pairing
En 48
SETUP
You can configure various function settings of this unit using the Setup menu.
Setup menu display and settings
1
Press iSETUP on the remote control.
Setup menu categories
2
Use the jCursor B / C to select the desired
menu and press jENTER.
Ex: Sound Setup menu
3
Use jCursor B / C to navigate the
submenus to find the desired setting and
press jENTER.
4
When multiple menu item is displayed, use
jCursor B / C to select the desired item.
5
Use jCursor D / E to change the setting.
You can return to the previous screen by pressing
jRETURN. You can change other items by repeating
step 4 and 5.
6
Press iSETUP to exit the Setup menu.
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
iSETUP
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
jRETURN
SETUP
RETURN
ENTER
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
i
Speaker Setup Set parameters for speakers, such as
speaker status, and volume adjustment for
each speaker.
Sound Setup Set functions related to audio output, such
as adjustment of maximum volume and
of dynamic range.
HDMI Setup Set functions related to HDMI, such as
HDMI Control functions.
Func. Setup Sets functions such as changing input
names and auto power down that make
the unit easier to use.
DSP Parameter Edit sound field programs.
Memory Guard Protects settings against accidental
alteration.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
;SpeakerSetup
SETUP
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
;Lipsync
SOUND
VOL.
For a few seconds after closing the Setup menu, the
remote control keys may not function. If this occurs,
reselect the input source.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
IniVol;;;;;Off
SOUND
VOL.
En 49
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Setup menu items
Setup menu
Manages settings for speakers
Speaker Setup submenu
■
Manual speaker setup
Adjusts the output characteristics of the speakers based on
manually set parameters.
Subwoofer
Confirms the subwoofer.
Config
Level
Distance
Equalizer
Test Tone
Speaker Setup
Sound Setup
HDMI Setup
Func. Setup
DSP Parameter
Memory Guard
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Sur. LR
Sur.B
Crossover
SWFR Phase
Extra Bass
HDMI Auto
Auto
Manual
Lipsync
Adaptive DRC
D.Range
Max Volume
Init Volume
Control
TVAudio
ReturnChan
Standby
Audio
Input Rename
AutoPowerDown
Dimmer
(speakers)
(unit and speakers)
(speakers and frequency bands)
J1
J1
J1
Config Manually manages speaker configuration, such as
speaker size (sound production capacity), and bass
audio processing.
Level Manually adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Distance Manually adjusts the output of each speaker based on
distance to the listening point.
Equalizer Selects an equalizer to adjust speaker output
characteristics.
Test Tone Generates test tones.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
;SpeakerSetup
SETUP
VOL.
Config
In the Config submenu, you can select the speaker size
characteristic (Large or Small). Select the size (sound
reproduction capacity) that matches your speakers.
When speaker size is set to “Small,” low-frequency components
of the speakers that you configured are produced from the
subwoofer (or from the front speakers if there is no subwoofer).
YES (Default) Select this when you have a subwoofer connected.
During playback, the subwoofer will produce audio
from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass
audio from other channels. J2
NONE Select this when you do not have a subwoofer
connected. The front speakers will produce audio
from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass
frequency audio from other channels.
Woofer diameter
• 16 cm or larger → Large
• 16 cm or smaller → Small
J
1 : This menu item appears depending on the “Control” setting.
JJ
2 : Enabling the “Extra Bass” setting allows both the subwoofer and the front
speakers to produce bass audio.
En 50
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Front
Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front
speakers. J1
Center
Selects the size of the center speakers.
Sur. LR
Selects the size of the surround speakers.
Sur. B
Selects the size of the surround back speakers.
Crossover
Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component output from
speakers set to “Small.”
Audio with a frequency below that limit will be produced from the
subwoofer or the front speakers. J3
SWFR Phase
Sets the phase of the subwoofer if the bass audio is lacking or
unclear.
Extra Bass
Allows the front channel low-frequency components to be
produced exclusively by the subwoofer, or by both the subwoofer
and the front speakers.
Small (Default) Select this for small speakers. The subwoofer will
produce front channel low-frequency
components. J2
Large Select this for large speakers. The front speakers will
produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
None Select this when there is no center speaker. The front
speakers will produce center channel audio.
Small (Default) Select this when a small center speaker is connected.
Large Select this when a large center speaker is connected.
None Select this when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel
audio signals.
Small (Default) Select this when the surround speakers are small.
Large Select this when the surround speakers are large.
• When set to “None,” no sound is produced from the surround
back speaker even if that speaker is connected.
• When set to “None,” the sound field programs will change to
Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
None (Default) Select this when no surround back speakers are
connected.
SMLx1 Select when one small surround back speaker is
connected.
SMLx2 Select when two small surround back speakers are
connected.
LRGx1 Select when one large surround back speaker is
connected.
LRGx2 Select when two large surround back speakers are
connected.
• When there are no surround speakers are inactive, the setting will
automatically change to “None.”
• You can set surround back audio signals, including from the
playback source, to be mixed down and produced from a single
speaker (6.1-channel layout) or produced from left and right
surround back speakers (5.1-channel layout).
40Hz 110Hz
60Hz 120Hz
80Hz (Default) 160Hz
90Hz 200Hz
100Hz
NRM (Default) Does not change the subwoofer phase.
REV Reverses the subwoofer phase.
ON The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the
front channel low-frequency components.
OFF (Default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the
front speakers or the subwoofer produce the front
channel low-frequency components.
When the “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” the “Extra Bass”
setting is disabled.
J
1 : When “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” you can only choose “Large.” If the front
speaker setting is “Small” and you change “Subwoofer” to “None,” it will
automatically change to “Large.”
J
2 : You can set the low-frequency components of audio signals transmitted from
the front speakers to the subwoofer by using “Crossover” setting.
J
3 : If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set
the crossover frequency to maximum and the volume to half (or slightly less).
En 51
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■
Controlling the volume of each speaker
Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker. Use jCursor B / C
to select the desired speaker and adjust the volume with jCursor
D / E.
■
Manually setting speaker distance
Adjusts the timing at which the speakers produce audio so that
sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same
time.
Selecting adjustment units
Use jCursor B / C to display “Unit,” and then use jCursor
D / E to choose the units of length (meters or feet).
Setting distances for each speaker
Use jCursor B / C to display the speaker you want to configure,
and then use jCursor D / E to set the distance from the speaker
to your listening position.
■
Adjusting sound quality with the equalizer
Adjusts sound quality of tone using a parametric or graphic
equalizer.
EQ Select
Select an equalizer type.
Level
FL Front speaker L
FR Front speaker R
C Center speaker
SL Surround speaker L
SR Surround speaker R
SBL Surround back L
SBR Surround back R
SB J1 Surround back
SWFR Subwoofer
Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Default setting 0 dB (FL/FR/SWFR)
-1.0 dB (C/SL/SR/SBL/SBR/SB)
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
Distance
Unit Selects the distance unit (meters or feet).
Front L Front speaker L
Front R Front speaker R
Center Center speaker
Sur. L Surround speaker L
Sur. R Surround speaker R
Sur. B L Surround back speaker L
Sur. B R Surround back speaker R
Sur. B J1 Surround back speaker
SWFR Subwoofer
Adjustable range 0.30 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft)
Default setting 3.00 m (10.0 ft) (Front L/Front R/SWFR)
2.60 m (8.5 ft) (Center)
2.40 m (8.0 ft) (Sur. L/Sur. R/Sur.B L/Sur.B R/Sur.B)
Adjustment
increments
0.10 m (0.5 ft)
Equalizer
PEQ Uses the parametric equalizer to adjust sound quality.
Selecting this setting applies the tone settings
obtained using YPAO (☞p. 23). J2
GEQ (Default) Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust sound quality. By
pressing jENTER, you can adjust the
characteristics of the graphic equalizer.
Off Disables the equalizer.
JJ
1 : “SB” and “Sur.B” is displayed when using a 6.1 channel configuration only.
J
2 : Using YPAO to carry out acoustic measurement selects “PEQ” automatically.
“PEQ” does not appear if the measurement process has not been carried out at
least once.
En 52
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■
Generating test tones
Turns the test tone generator on or off.
■ Adjusting the graphic equalizer
1
When “EQ Select” is displayed, use jCursor D / E
to select “GEQ” and press jENTER.
2
Check that “Channel” selects and use jCursor D
/ E to select the speaker for which you want to
adjust the equalizer.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Channel;FRNT L
GEQ
VOL.
The speaker you are adjusting
3
Press jCursor C repeatedly to select the
frequency you want to adjust, then use jCursor D
/ E to adjust the volume.
Raising volume: Press jCursor E.
Lowering volume: Press
jCursor D.
4
When you have finished making adjustments,
press iSETUP to close the Setup menu.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
63Hz
GEQ
VOL.
Frequency band Setting the volume level for the
selected frequency
Frequency
range
63 Hz/160 Hz/400 Hz/1 kHz/2.5 kHz/6.3 kHz/
16 kHz
Adjustable
range
-6.0 dB to 0 dB to +6.0 dB
Default setting 0 dB
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
You can use jCursor B / C to select another frequency or
return to step 2. Repeat steps 2-3 to adjust the tone to your
liking.
Test Tone
Off (Default) Does not generate test tones.
On Generates test tones. While “On” is selected, test
tones are produced constantly.
You can use the test tone in a variety of circumstances. For
example, you can adjust the volume balance settings for each
speaker, or whenever you adjust the settings on the internal
graphic equalizer, you can listen to the actual effect while
operating this unit. Turn the test tone off when you have finished
making adjustments.
En 53
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Setting the audio output function of this
unit
Sound Setup submenu
■
Synchronizing audio/video output
Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync
function).
HDMI Auto
When connecting to a TV via HDMI, automatically adjusts output
timing if the TV supports an automatic lipsync function.
Auto
Fine-adjust the audio output timing by entering the correction time
provided when “HDMI Auto” is set to “On.”
Manual
Manually adjusts the correction time. Select this when the monitor
does not support the automatic lipsync function or “HDMI Auto” is
set to “Off.”
■
Auto-adjusting the sound level to make
even low volumes more audible
Adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level
(from minimum to maximum). When you play audio at night or at
low volumes, it is a good idea to set parameter to “Auto.” J1
When the “Auto” is selected, it adjusts the dynamic range as
follows.
Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Adaptive DRC Auto-adjusting the sound level to make even low
volumes more audible.
D.Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for
Dolby Digital and DTS playback.
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume for this receiver.
Init Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned
on.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
;SoundSetup
SETUP
VOL.
Lipsync
Off (Default) Select this when the connected monitor does not
support the automatic lipsync function or you do not
want to use the automatic lipsync function. Set the
correction time in “Manual.”
On Select this when the monitor supports the automatic
lipsync function. Fine-adjust the correction time in
“Auto.”
Adjustable range 0 ms to 240 ms
Adjustment
increments
1 ms
Adjustable range 0 ms to 240 ms
Adjustment
increments
1 ms
Default setting 0 ms
Adaptive DRC
Auto Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
Off (Default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
Auto
Off
Auto
Off
Input Level Input Level
Volume: low Volume: high
Output Level
Output Level
J
1 : The Adaptive DRC setting is also effective when you use headphones.
En 54
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■
Auto-adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS
dynamic range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bitstream
(Dolby Digital and DTS) signal playback.
■
Setting the maximum volume
Sets a maximum volume level so that the audio is not played too
loudly. The default setting of +16.5 dB produces the highest
volume.
■
Setting the startup volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. When
this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set at the level when the
receiver last entered standby mode. J1
Setting HDMI functions
HDMI Setup submenu
D.Range
Min/Auto (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume
or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bitstream
signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals.
(Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD
signals based on input signal information.
STD Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for
regular home use.
Max (Default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Max Volume
Adjustable range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB / +16.5 dB (Maximum volume)
Default setting +16.5 dB
Adjustment
increments
5.0 dB
Init Volume
Adjustable range Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Default setting Off
Adjustment
increments
0.5 dB
Control Turns the HDMI Control on or off.
TVAudio J2 Chooses automatically selected audio input in
conjunction with TV operation when the HDMI
Control is turned on.
ReturnChan J2 Transmits audio/video output to the TV and audio
input from the TV through a single HDMI cable.
Standby J2 Selects whether HDMI audio/video signals will be
continue to be produced when this unit is on
standby.
Audio Selects the audio output device connected to this
unit via HDMI jacks.
SWSW
C
L
SL SR
R
;HDMISetup
SETUP
VOL.
J
1 : When you set the “Max Volume” at a lower level than “Init Volume,” the “Max
Volume” setting has priority.
J
2 : This menu item appears depending on the “Control” setting.
En 55
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■
Receiver operation via TV (HDMI Control)
Set the HDMI Control function to “On” to operate devices
connected via HDMI. If the TV or other external components
support HDMI Control (ex. Panasonic VIERA Link), you can use
the remote controls of those devices to operate some of this unit’s
functions, and to synchronize this unit with the operation of those
devices.
Please refer to “Switching the input source on this unit
automatically when listening to TV audio” (☞
p. 68) for
instructions.
■
Selecting an input source to assign audio
input for the TV
Select the input source that matches operations carried out on the
TV while the HDMI Control function is on.
When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and
the function is enabled, the audio input for the TV is assigned to
the input source selected here. J2
■
Listening to TV audio via single HDMI
cable (Audio Return Channel)
You can enable or disable the Audio Return Channel function.
When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and
the function is enabled, the TV’s audio output is transmit to this
unit via an HDMI cable.
The TV audio input to this unit is regarded as the input source
selected in “TVAudio.” J2
By means of this function, you do not need to connect the TV’s
audio output (digital audio output or analog audio output) to the
unit.
When the TV audio is input to the unit using Audio Return
Channel, “TV” is displayed on the front panel display.
■
Transmitting HDMI audio/video to the TV
during standby mode (Standby Through)
This function allows audio/video signals to continue to be
transmitted to a TV connected to HDMI jacks 1-4 even when this
unit is in standby mode.
Control
Off (Default) Sets HDMI Control to “Off.”
On Sets HDMI Control to “On.” J1
If this unit is connected to HDMI devices that do not support the
HDMI Control function, these functions will not operate.
TVAudio
AV1 to AV6 Assigns any of the AV1-6 input source for the audio
input from the TV.
AUDIO1/AUDIO2 Assigns AUDIO1 or AUDIO2 input source for the
audio input from the TV.
Default setting AV 4
• “TVAudio” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function
(Control) is set to “On.”
• Please refer to “Using the HDMI Control function” (☞
p. 67) for
setting instructions.
• For details on inputting the audio signal from the TV, refer to
“Listening to TV audio” (☞
p. 16).
ReturnChan
Off (Default) Sets the Audio Return Channel to “Off.”
On Sets the Audio Return Channel to “On.”
• “ReturnChan” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function
(Control) is set to “On.”
• Please refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio
Return Channel function” (☞
p. 69) for setting instructions.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
AV4
TV
VOL.
Standby
Off (Default) Sets Standby Through to “Off.”
On Transmits audio/video signals from the selected
HDMI input source to the TV.
• When HDMI Control is “On,” Standby Through function is
automatically enabled and “Standby” is not displayed.
• When the Standby Through function is “On,” audio/video signals
will continue to be transmitted to the TV from the selected HDMI
input source when this unit is in standby mode. You can change
the HDMI input source to transmit signals during the standby
through mode by using
dHDMI1-4 on the remote control. When
the input source is changed, the HDMI Through/iPod Charge
indicator on the front panel blinks twice.
• When the Standby Through function is on, the HDMI Through/
iPod Charge indicator on the front panel lights during the standby
mode. When this indicator is lit, this unit consumes 1 to 3 W of
power.
J
1 : When the HDMI Control is “On,” the Standby Through function is
automatically enabled. When this unit enters standby mode, the audio and
video signals from the last-selected HDMI input source will continue to be
transmitted to the TV.
J
2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input
source cannot be used.
En 56
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■
Changing the output destination of HDMI
input audio signals
Choose whether to playback audio from an external component
such as a BD/DVD player connected via HDMI through this unit or
through a TV.
Audio
Amp (Default) Outputs audio through this unit only. When this
setting is selected, the external component outputs an
audio format compatible with this unit.
TV Outputs audio through a TV only. When this setting is
selected, the external component outputs an audio
format compatible with the TV. J1
Amp+TV Outputs audio from the TV and this unit. When this
setting is selected, the external component outputs an
audio format compatible with this unit and TV.
“Audio” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function
(Control) is set to “Off.”
J
1 : When “TV” is selected, the speakers of this unit do not output sound.
En 57
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
Making the receiver easier to use
Func. Setup submenu
■
Changing input source names
Changes the input source names to be displayed on the
front panel display.
You can change an input source name by choosing from
a list of templates, or make one of your own.
SETUP
RETURN
ENTER
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
P
OP-U
P
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
i
iSETUP
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
jRETURN
Input Rename Changes the input source names.
AutoPowerDown Goes enter standby mode if you leave it
without operating.
Dimmer Sets the brightness of the front panel
display.
Input Rename
■ Selecting a template
1
Select “Input Rename” from the Setup
menu and press jENTER.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
;Func.Setup
SETUP
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
HDMI1
HDMI1
VOL.
Renaming the input source
2
Select the input source that you want to
rename using jCursor B / C.
3
Use jCursor D / E to select a new name
from the following templates.
4
Confirm the new display name by
pressing jRETURN. Press iSETUP to
exit the Setup menu.
To cancel a name change, select the original name
and then press
jRETURN to exit renaming.
■ Entering an original name
1
Select “Input Rename” from the Setup
menu and press jENTER.
Blu-ray Satellite
DVD VCR
SetTopBox Tape
Game MD
TV PC
DVR iPod
CD HD DVD
CD-R (blank)
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
HDMI1
HDMI1
VOL.
Renaming the input source
2
Select the input source that you want to
rename using jCursor B / C.
3
Press jENTER.
4
Use jCursor B / C to select the
characters you want to change, and use
jCursor D / E to enter those characters.
The following characters are available for input
source.
• A to Z, a to z
• 0 to 9
• Symbols (#, *, -, +, etc.)
• Space
5
Repeat step 4 until you have entered the
new input source name.
6
Confirm the new display name by
pressing jENTER. Press iSETUP to
exit the Setup menu.
To cancel a name change, press jRETURN.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
HDMI1
HDMI1
VOL.
Cursor
En 58
SETUP
Setting various functions (Setup menu)
■
Goes enter standby mode automatically
when you leave it without operating
If you do not operate this unit or use the remote control for an
extended period of time, it will automatically go into standby mode
(Auto Power Down function). This function’s default setting is
“Off.” When you want to enable this function, set the amount of
time to pass before this unit will enter standby.
■
Setting the brightness of the front panel
display
Sets the brightness of the front panel display. Lowering the setting
dims the display.
Setting the sound field program
You can set the parameters for the sound field programs (☞p. 59).
Prohibiting setting changes
Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made
to the settings on Setup menu.
AutoPowerDown
Off (Default) Auto Power Down function is disabled.
4hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated
this unit for four hours.
8hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated
this unit for eight hours.
12hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated
this unit for twelve hours.
This unit starts a countdown of 30 seconds before entering the
standby mode. Pressing any key of the remote control during the
countdown cancels entering the standby mode and reset the
timer.
Dimmer
Adjustable range -4 to 0
Default setting 0
Off (Default) Settings are not protected.
On Prohibits changes to the settings on Setup menu until
it is returned to “Off.”
While set to “On,” the unit displays “Memory
Guard!” when an attempt is made to change the
settings.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
;DSPParameter
SETUP
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
;Memory Guard
SETUP
VOL.
En 59
SETUP
Although the sound field programs would satisfy you as they are with the default parameters, you can arrange the effect by setting the sound field elements (parameters).
To adjust the sound effects suitable for acoustical conditions of audio/video sources or rooms, perform the following operations.
1
Press iSETUP to display the Setup menu.
2
Use jCursor B / C to select “DSP
Parameter” and press jENTER.
3
Use jCursor D / E to choose the sound
field program you want to edit.
4
Press jCursor B / C to select the
parameter that you want to change, and
press jCursor D / E to change the
parameter.
5
Once you have completed editing, press
iSETUP to close the Setup menu.
Setting sound field program parameters
iSETUP
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
SETUP
ENTER
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
RE
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
i
When there are multiple parameters in the sound field
program you are configuring, repeat step 4 as
necessary to change other parameters.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
;DSPParameter
SETUP
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Sci-Fi
DSPPRM
VOL.
Sound field program to be edited
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
DSPLevel;;0dB
DSPPRM
VOL.
Sound field parameter
Choices
■ To initialize the sound field parameters
To set the parameters of the sound field program back
to default, press jCursor C repeatedly during
editing to select “Initialize” and press jCursor E.
When following message is displayed, press
jCursor E again to initialize.
To cancel operations, press jCursor D when “Press
Again” appears and return to the original display.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Press Again
DSPPRM
VOL.
En 60
SETUP
Setting sound field program parameters
CINEMA DSP parameters
Selects a surround decoder to be used with a sound field program
in the MOVIE category. J1
Change the effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added).
You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking the
sound effect.
Parameters usable in certain sound field
programs
2ch Stereo only
Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit
depending on the condition of tone control etc., when an analog
sound source is played back. You can enjoy a higher quality sound.
7ch Stereo only
Adjusts the center channel volume. J2
Adjusts the volume of the surround L channel. J2
Adjusts the volume of the surround R channel. J2
Adjusts the volume of the surround back channel. J2
Straight Enhancer/7ch Enhancer only
Adjusts the effect level of the compressed music enhancer mode.
<Dolby PLIIx Movie>
<Neo:6 Cinema>
Dolby PLIIx Movie
(Dolby PLII Movie)
Selects the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (or
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) decoder.
Neo:6 Cinema Selects the Neo:6 (Cinema) decoder.
DSP Level
Adjustable range -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
Default setting 0 dB
Adjust “DSP Level” as follows:
• The effect sound is too soft.
• There are no differences between effects of the sound field
programs.
→ Increase the effect level.
• The sound is dull.
• The sound field effect is added too much.
→ Reduce the effect level.
Direct
Auto (Default) Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone
control circuit when both tone controls of “Bass” and
“Treble” are set to 0dB.
Off Does not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control
circuit.
CT Level
Adjustable range 0 to 100%
Default setting 100%
SL Level
Adjustable range 0 to 100%
Default setting 100%
SR Level
Adjustable range 0 to 100%
Default setting 100%
SB Level
Adjustable range 0 to 100%
Default setting 35% (7.1-channel configuration)
50% (6.1-channel configuration)
EFCT LVL
High (Default) Standard effect.
Low Sets when the high-frequency signals of the source are
emphasized excessively.
J
1 : Surround decoders cannot be changed when used with the following MOVIE
sound field programs.
• Mono Movie
• Sports
• Action Game
• Roleplaying Game
J
2 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive.
En 61
SETUP
Setting sound field program parameters
Parameters usable in surround decoder
Dolby PLIIx Music and Dolby PLII Music only
Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends front left/
right channels sounds to the surround speakers as well as the front
speakers for a wraparound effect.
Spreads the center channel sound to the front left and right
speakers to suit your needs or preferences. Set this parameter to 0
for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7
for outputting it from the front left/right speaker only.
Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and
the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level
created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred
sound balance.
The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more
negative, and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value
more positive.
When Neo:6 Music is selected
Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as
necessary.
Panorama
Off (Default) Disables the effect.
On Enables the effect.
CT Width
Adjustable range 0 to 7
Default setting 3
Dimension
Adjustable range -3 to STD to +3
Default setting STD (Standard)
C.Image
Adjustable range 0.0 to 1.0
Default setting 0.3
En 62
SETUP
You can operate an external component such as TV and DVD player with the remote control of this unit by setting the code for external component (remote control code).
The remote control code can be set for each input source. Individual setting allows you to switch external components seamlessly depending on the selected input source.
Selecting input source connected to DVD
player
Selecting input source connected to CD
player
Keys connecting external
components
cSOURCE A
Switches an external component on and off.
j
Cursor, jENTER, jRETURN
Operates the menus of external components.
k
DISPLAY
Switches an external component display.
k
External component operation keys
Functions as a recording or playback key of an external
component, or a menu display key.
lNumeric keys
Functions as numeric keys of an external component.
mTV control keys J1
Default remote control code
settings
The following remote control codes are assigned to input
sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, please refer to “Remote
Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM.
Controlling other components with the remote control
bTRANSMIT
cSOURCE A
dInput selector
iSETUP
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
jRETURN
kExternal component
operation keys
kDISPLAY
lNumeric keys
mTV control keys
mINPUT
mMUTE
mTV VOL +/-
mTV CH +/-
mA
qOPTION
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
TRANSMIT
1234
1234
1256
V-AUX
TUNER
ENTER
7 856
90
10
1234
REC
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
INPUT
MUTE
DOCK[ A ] [ B ]
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
SLEEP
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
CO
DE
S
ET
q
m
l
k
j
i
c
d
b
If you are unable to operate this unit after operating an
external component, press iSETUP or qOPTION
and then try operating the remote control again.
Playback/Stop
DVD player
CD player
Playback/Stop
DVD player
CD player
The remote control keys for controlling external
components are available only when the external
components have corresponding control keys.
mINPUT Switches video inputs of TV.
mMUTE Mutes TV volume temporarily.
mTV VOL +/- Controls the volume of TV.
mTV CH +/- Switches TV channels.
mA Turns on and off TV.
Input Category Manufacturer
Remote
control code
HDMI1 Blu-ray player/
recorder
Yamaha 2064
HDMI2 —— —
HDMI3 —— —
HDMI4 —— —
AV1 —— —
AV2 —— —
AV3 CD player Yamaha 5095
AV4 —— —
AV5 —— —
AV6 —— —
AUDIO1 —— —
AUDIO2 —— —
V-AUX —— —
A/B J2 —— —
DOCK DOCK Yamaha 5089
TUNER Tuner Yamaha 5085
J
1 : You can register remote control codes for external components to
dInput selector and remote control codes for TVs in mA
(
mTV control keys).
To register a TV remote control code to
dInput selector:
You can use the
jCursor, lNumeric keys, and mTV
control keys to control a TV you have registered.
To register a remote control code for a device other than a TV to
dInput selector:
You can use the
jCursor and lNumeric keys etc to control
external components, and the
mTV control keys to control
TVs registered in
mA.
J
2 : Use A/B for external component operations only. Set these keys to
remote control codes if you want to perform external component
operations without linking to input source selection of this unit.
For example, it may be convenient to assign remote control codes
for devices such as TVs.
En 63
SETUP
Controlling other components with the remote control
Registering remote control codes
for external component operations
The following section describes how to register remote
control code using an example of the registration of the
remote control codes of a Yamaha BD player connected
to HDMI2 jack.
1
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-
ROM to search the available remote control
codes from the category or manufacturer of
external components.
“2064” can be used for a Yamaha BD player.
2
Press nCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
3
Press dHDMI2 on the remote control to
switch the input source to HDMI2. J1
Perform the following steps to register the selected
input source here to the remote control code.
4
Enter a remote control code “2064” using
lNumeric keys. J2
Once the remote control code is registered successfully
the remote control will blink twice.
5
To switch between BD player linked to
scene selections, press hSCENE and at the
same time press dHDMI2 and hold it for
approximately 3 seconds.
Then you can operate the external components by
switching the input source to HDMI2, or selecting
HDMI2 in the registered scene.
Same steps for operating other external components,
press
hSCENE and at the same time press the input
source key selected in step 3 and hold it for
approximately 3 seconds.
dHDMI2
hSCENE
lNumeric keys
mTV control keys
mA
nCODE SET
SCENE
2
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
7 856
90
10
1234
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
CODE SET
INPUT
MUTE
RECEIVER
O
PTI
ON
S
ETU
P
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
MI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
MU
TE
ENTER
RE
C
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
n
m
l
h
d
• Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1
minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat
from step 2.
• Remote control code of an external component cannot
be set from the name or model number of a unit. Use
“Remote Control Code Search
” in the CD-ROM to
search the available remote control codes from the
category or manufacturer of external components.
• If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first
code in the list, if it does not work then try the other
codes.
TRANSMIT
RE
C
EIVER
H
DM
I
S
LEEP
SOU
R
CE
CODE SET
blinks twice
• If the registration fails, repeat the step 2.
• In case of an external component with multiple remote
control codes, the other remote control codes may be
supported. Repeat from step 2 with the other remote
control codes.
2 0
6
4
TRANSMIT
RE
C
EIVER
H
DM
I
S
LEEP
SOU
R
CE
CODE SET
Registration successful: blinks twice
Registration failed: blinks 6 times
J
1 : When you want to register a remote control code to the mTV
control keys, press
mA (mTV control keys) in step 3.
J
2 : When you want to register a remote control code to the mTV
control keys, enter the TV remote control code in step 4.
En 64
SETUP
Controlling other components with the remote control
Resetting all remote control codes
Resetting all remote control codes for external
components to the initial factory settings.
1
Press nCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
2
Press iSETUP on the remote control.
3
Enter “9981” using lNumeric keys.
i
SETUP
lNumeric keys
nCODE SET
SETUP
7 856
90
10
1234
ENT
CODE SET
RECEIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
ENTER
RE
C
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
n
l
i
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1
minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat
from step 2.
TRANSMIT
RE
C
EIVER
H
DM
I
S
LEEP
SOU
R
CE
CODE SET
blinks twice
Once the remote control code is reset successfully the
remote control will blink twice.
If setup fails, repeat from step 1.
9 9
8
1
TRANSMIT
RE
C
EIVER
H
DM
I
S
LEEP
SOU
R
CE
CODE SET
Reset successful: blinks twice
Reset failed: blinks 6 times
En 65
SETUP
The Advanced Setup menu can be used for unit initialization and other useful extended functions. The Advanced Setup menu can be operated as follows.
Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup
menu
1
Switch this unit to the standby mode.
2
Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on
the front panel.
Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on
the front panel display.
After approximately a few seconds, the top menu items are
displayed.
3
Use PROGRAM l / h to select the item to be set
from the following items.
In the Advanced Setup menu, you can set the following settings.
4
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select the value you
want to change.
5
Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then
switch it on again.
The settings become effective and the unit is powered on. If
initialization is selected, it will be performed when the unit is
powered on again.
Setting the impedance of speakers
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Changes the unit settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected. J3
Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
TV
BD
DVD
CD
RADIO
INPUT
PROGRAM
SCENE
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
YPAO MIC
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM l / h
A
SP IMP. J1 Sets the impedance of speakers.
REMOTE ID Changes the remote control ID of a receiver.
TU J2 Selects one of the following FM/AM frequency steps.
INIT Initializes various settings for this unit.
6 MIN Select the impedance when 6Ω speakers are
connected.
8 MIN (Default) Select the impedance when speakers above 8Ω are
connected.
SPIMP.-8MIN
J
1 : U.S.A. and Canada models only.
J
2 : Asia and General models only.
J
3 : For detailed procedures of speaker impedance settings, refer to “(U.S.A. and
Canada models only) Changing speaker impedance” (☞
p. 12).
En 66
SETUP
Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)
Avoiding crossing remote control
signals when using multiple
Yamaha receivers
The remote control of the unit can only receive signals
from a receiver which has an identical ID (remote
control ID). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers,
you can set each remote control with a unique remote
control ID for its corresponding receiver.
On the contrary, if you are setting the same remote
control ID for all receivers, you can use one remote
control to operate 2 receivers.
Changing FM/AM frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
You can select one of the following FM/AM frequency
steps: J1
Initializing various settings for this
unit
Initializes various settings stored in this unit and sets it
back to default.
Select the items to be initialized from the following.
i
SETUP
lNumeric keys
nCODE SET
SETUP
7 856
90
10
1234
ENT
CODE SET
RECEIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
ON
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
C
D
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
ENTER
RE
C
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLAY
SOURCE
I
NP
UT
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
n
l
i
ID1 (Default) Receives the remote control signals set in
ID1.
ID2 Receives the remote control signals set in
ID2.
ID1 is set for both remote control and receiver by
default. To avoid crossing remote control, change the
remote control ID for both remote control and
receiver.
REMOTEID-ID1
■ To change the remote control ID
1
Press nCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
2
Press iSETUP on the remote control.
3
Enter the desired remote control ID code.
To switch to ID1:
Enter “5019” using
lNumeric keys.
To switch to ID2:
Enter “5020” using
lNumeric keys.
Once the remote control code is registered
successfully the remote control will blink twice.
Perform each of the following steps within
1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if
more than 1 minute passes since the last operation.
To reset, repeat from step 1.
TRANSMIT
RE
C
EIVER
H
DM
I
S
LEEP
SOU
R
CE
CODE SET
Registration successful: blinks twice
Registration failed: blinks 6 times
• If setup fails, repeat from step 1.
• Returns to ID1 after the remote control code is
initialized (☞
p. 64).
AM10/FM100 You can adjust the AM frequency by
steps of 10kHz and FM by steps of
100kHz.
AM9/FM50
(Default)
You can adjust the AM frequency by
steps of 9kHz and FM by steps of 50kHz.
DSP PARAM Initializes all parameters for the sound
field programs.
ALL Resets this unit to default factory settings.
CANCEL (Default) Does not initialize.
TU-AM9/FM50
INIT-CANCEL
J
1 : For details on setting FM/AM frequency steps, refer to “FM/AM
tuning” (☞
p. 34).
En 67
SETUP
This unit supports the HDMI Control function, which allows you to
operate external components via HDMI. If you connect devices
that support HDMI Control (ex. Panasonic VIERA Link-
compatible TVs, DVD/Blu-ray Disc recorders, etc.) J1, you can
use the following operations with the remote control of any of
those devices:
– Power synchronization (on/standby)
– Volume control, including Mute
– Changing the volume of the audio output signal device (either the
TV or this unit)
1
Connect the TV, DVD recorder supporting HDMI
Control to this unit’s HDMI output jack.
2
Turn on the TV and this unit.
Refer to the TV’s instruction manual on how to operate external
components.
3
Set the TV and this unit’s HDMI Control function to
“On.”
4
Turn the TV off.
Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the
TV. If they are not synchronized, turn them off manually.
5
Turn the TV on.
Confirm that this unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If
it is still off, turn it on manually.
6
Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that
is connected to this unit (ex. HDMI1).
7
If DVD recorder that supports the HDMI Control
function are connected to this unit, turn them on.
8
Confirm that this unit is properly synchronized with
the TV through the following operations by using the
TV remote control.
• Power On/Off
• Volume Control
• Switching between audio output devices
Using the HDMI Control function
NOTE
The following is an example of how to connect this unit, a TV,
and a DVD recorder. Follow the instructions in your TV and
DVD recorder manuals, as well as the ones written below.
– Set the TV’s HDMI Control function to “On”
– Follow the AV amplifier connection instructions, and connect
this unit to the TV
HDMI
Control signal
(such as volume control)
Remote control of TV
This unit
TV
HDMI connection
Receiver unit Confirm that “Control” in the Setup menu (HDMI
Setup) is set to “On” (☞p. 55). J2
TV/DVD Recorder Check the instruction manuals for those devices.
Receiver unit Confirm that the input source for the DVD recorder
has been selected. If a different input source has been
selected, please change it manually.
TV/DVD Recorder Confirm that the video signal from the recorder is
being properly received by the TV.
Operations 1-7 will not be required more than twice.
If this unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations,
check that the HDMI Control function is set to “On” for both
devices.
If they will not properly synchronize, unplugging and re-
plugging the devices and turning them on and off may solve the
problem.
J
1 : We recommend that you use TVs and DVD/BD recorders from the same
manufacturer whenever possible.
J
2 : The default setting for the HDMI Control function is “Off.”
En 68
SETUP
Using the HDMI Control function
■
Switching the input source on this
unit automatically when listening
to TV audio
When the HDMI Control (☞p. 67) is operating properly,
the input source of this unit is automatically changed to
match operations carried out on the TV. The default
input jack is AV4. If the AV4 optical digital jack is
connected to the TV’s audio output jack, then you can
enjoy TV sound through this unit right away.
To use other jacks to input audio signals from TV, carry
out the following procedure.
1
Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI
cable.
2
Connect TV’s audio output to this unit.
The input jacks listed below are available to input TV’s
audio signals. Use the same jack type as used for the
TV.
3
Press iSETUP. J1
4
Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup”
and press jENTER.
5
Make sure that “Control” is selected, and
then use jCursor D / E to select “On.”
6
Press jCursor C to select “TVAudio” and
select the input jack connected in step 2
using jCursor D / E.
7
Press iSETUP when you have finished
changing the settings.
If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this
unit will automatically switch to the input source
chosen in step 6.
iSETUP
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
SETUP
ENTER
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
O
N
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
CD
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
U
T
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
i
OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
O
PTI
C
A
L
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
CO
AXIA
L
CO
AXIA
L
(CD
)
(BD
/
DVD)
H
DMI 2HDMI
1
HDMI
OUT
AV
OUT
V
IDE
O
DOC
K
A
R
C
ANTENNA
F
M
75
ǡ
G
N
D
AM
MO
NIT
O
R
OU
T
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
VIDE
O
V
IDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
O
O
Audio output
(Optical)
TV
TV output jack Input jack
Optical digital audio output AV1 or AV4 (default)
Coaxial digital audio output AV2 or AV3
Analog stereo output AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2
OPTICAL OPTICAL
(TV)
A
V
1
AV 2
A
V
3
A
V
4
AV 5
AV 6
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD)
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
Y
(
BD/DVD
)
H
HDMI 1
HDMI
OU
T
A
V
OU
T
V
IDE
O
D
OC
K
A
RC
A
NTENNA
FM
75
ǡ
G
ND
AM
M
O
NIT
O
R
OU
CO
MP
O
NENT
V
IDE
O
V
P
R
P
B
Y
Available input jacks
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
Control;;;;Off
HDMI
VOL.
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
Control;;;;;On
HDMI
VOL.
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
TVAudio;;;;AV4
HDMI
VOL.
J
1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 48)
for details on the Setup menu.
En 69
SETUP
Using the HDMI Control function
■
Single HDMI cable input to TV
audio with Audio Return Channel
function
When using a TV that supports HDMI functions and
Audio Return Channel function, audio/video output
from this unit to the TV or audio output from the TV to
this unit can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable
(Audio Return Channel function). Audio signals
transmitted from the TV to this unit can be assigned to
any input source.
1
Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI
cable.
2
Press iSETUP. J1
3
Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup”
and press jENTER.
4
Make sure that “Control” is selected, and
then use jCursor D / E to select “On.”
5
Press jCursor C to select “TVAudio” and
select the input source that you want to
assign to the HDMI audio signals from the
TV using jCursor D / E. J2
6
Press jCursor C to select “ReturnChan”
and press jCursor E to select “On.”
The Audio Return Channel function will turn on.
7
Press iSETUP when you have finished
changing the settings.
If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this
unit will automatically switch to the input source
chosen in step 6.
iSETUP
jCursor B / C / D / E
jENTER
SETUP
ENTER
R
E
C
EIVER
SC
EN
E
O
PTI
O
N
RETURN
V
O
LUM
E
E
NHANCER
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
D
IRE
CT
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
T
RAN
S
MIT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
V-A
U
X
TU
NE
R
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
R
Y
AM
PRESE
T
T
UNIN
G
MO
VI
E
M
US
I
C
S
TERE
O
BD
D
VD
TV
CD
R
ADI
O
MU
TE
7
8
5
6
9
0
10
1
2
3
4
R
E
C
EN
T
TV
T
V V
OL
T
V
C
H
T
O
P
MENU
PO
P-
UP
MENU
D
I
S
PLA
Y
SOURCE
CO
DE
S
ET
I
NP
U
T
M
U
T
E
DOCK
[
A
]
[
B
]
j
i
HDMI
OUT
C
ENTER
(BD
/
DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
HDMI
3
HDMI 4
FR
O
N
T
VIDE
O
SPEA
K
A
NTENN
A
FM
75
ǡ
G
N
D
AM
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
VIDE
O
VIDE
O
P
R
P
B
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
TV
TV audio
output
Video / Audio
output
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
Control;;;;Off
HDMI
VOL.
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
Control;;;;;On
HDMI
VOL.
L
SL SR
R
SW
C
ReturnChan;;On
HDMI
VOL.
J
1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 48)
for details on the Setup menu.
J
2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected
for the input source cannot be used.
En 70
APPENDIX
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
General
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The power will not
turn on.
The protection circuitry operated
3 times consecutively.
As a safety precaution, when the protection
circuitry operates 3 times consecutively, the
capability to turn on the power is disabled.
Please contact your nearest Yamaha dealer
or service center to request repair.
—
The unit enters
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not completely
inserted.
Connect the power cable properly to an AC
wall outlet.
—
(When this unit is turned back on
and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is
displayed.) The protection
circuitry has been activated
because this unit was turned on
while a speaker cable was shorted.
Make sure that all speaker cables between
this unit and speakers are connected
properly.
12
This unit cannot be
turned off or does
not work properly.
The internal microcomputer is
hung-up due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or
excessive static electricity) or by a
drop in power supply voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC
wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then
plug it in again.
—
The batteries in the remote control
may have lost their charge.
Replace all batteries. 4
The unit enters
standby mode.
The protection circuitry has been
activated because of a short circuit,
etc.
Check that the speaker with an impedance
of at least 6Ω.
—
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Check that the speaker impedance settings
are correct.
12
After display of a
countdown on the
front panel, the unit
goes into standby
mode.
If you do not use take any action,
the Auto Power Down function
operates.
Turn on the unit, and play the source again. —
In the Setup menu “AutoPowerDown”
(“Func. Setup” → “AutoPowerDown”),
increase the time until switching to standby
mode, or turn off the Auto Power Down
function.
58
Sound/images
suddenly go off.
The protection circuitry has been
activated because of a short circuit,
etc.
Check that the speaker wires are not
touching each other, then turn the unit back
on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off the
unit.
Turn on the unit, and play the source again. —
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
En 71
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
No sound. Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
17
If a DVI-HDMI cable is used to
connect the unit with an external
component, then it is necessary to
use an audio input jack for a
different input to output audio.
Display the HDMI Input Option menu for
the connected cable, select “Audio In,” and
select the jack to use for audio input.
46
Speaker connections are not
secure.
Secure the connections. 12
The HDMI components connected
to the unit do not support the
HDCP copy protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the
HDCP copy protection standards.
46
The audio input into the device is
set to playback through the TV.
In the Setup menu, set the HDMI Audio Out
(“Sound Setup” → “Audio”) to other than
“TV.”
56
No appropriate input source has
been selected.
Select an appropriate input source with
Input selector.
28
The volume is turned down or
muted.
Turn up the volume. —
Signals that this unit cannot
reproduce are being input from a
source component, such as a CD-
ROM.
Use an input source that has signals that can
be reproduced on this unit.
—
No picture. An output video jack type used to
display content on the TV is
different from the one of the input
video (ex. Video input → HDMI
output).
Use video jacks of the same type (ex. Video
input → Video output) to connect to the TV.
15
An appropriate video input is not
selected on the TV.
Select an appropriate video input on the TV. —
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
No sound is output
from a specific
speaker.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
Check the Speaker indicators on
the front panel display. If the
corresponding indicator lights up,
connect another speaker and check
if sound is output.
If sound is not output, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
7
The playback component or
speakers are not connected
properly.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
12, 17
Output from that speaker is
disabled.
Check the Speaker indicators on the front
panel display. If the corresponding indicator
is turned off, try the following.
1) Change to a different input source.
2) With the selected sound field program,
sound is not output from that speaker. Select
another sound field program.
3) “None” may have been selected for that
speaker on this unit. Display “Speaker
Setup” in the Setup menu, and set respective
parameters to enable output from that
speaker (“Speaker Setup” → “Config”).
7, 49
The volume of that speaker is set
to the minimum in “Speaker
Setup” in the Setup menu.
Display “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu
and adjust the volume (“Speaker Setup” →
“Level”).
51
(If hardly any sound comes from
one channel)
Speaker output balance is not set
correctly.
Balance the volume of each speaker from
“Level” in the Setup menu (“Speaker Setup”
→ “Level”).
51
Sound may not be output from
certain channels, depending on the
input source or sound field
program.
Try another sound field program. 29
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When a monaural source sound
field program is applied, for some
surround decoders, sound from all
channels is output from the center
speaker.
Try another sound field program. 29
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
En 72
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
This unit is in straight decoding
mode and a monaural source is
being played back.
Press STRAIGHT to exit straight decoding
mode.
30
Sound may not be output from
certain channels depending on
input sources or sound field
programs.
Try another sound field program. 29
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
An external amplifier is not
connected to the external
SURROUND BACK jacks.
Connect an external amplifier to the
SURROUND BACK jacks and then connect
surround back speakers.
11
An external amplifier or surround
back speakers are not connected
correctly to the external
SURROUND BACK jacks.
Check if the connection is correct.
An external amplifier for surround
back speakers is not set correctly.
• The power is off.
• An input source that is
connected from the
SURROUND BACK jacks is not
selected.
• The volume is too low.
Set the external amplifier correctly. —
“EXTD Surround” in the Option
menu is set to “Off,” or an input
signal does not contain a surround
back flag with “EXTD Surround”
set to “Auto.”
Set “EXTD Surround” other than “Off” or
“Auto.”
45
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
A subwoofer is not connected, or it
is inactive.
Check that a subwoofer is connected
correctly, and from the Setup menu
“Subwoofer” (“Speaker Setup” → “Config”
→ “Subwoofer”), set the subwoofer to
“On.”
49
The subwoofer is turned off. Turn the subwoofer power on.
If the subwoofer includes an Auto Power
Off function, then lower the Auto Power Off
sensitivity settings.
—
The source does not contain LFE
(☞p. 77) or low frequency signals.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The right
combination of audio
/ video jacks to
connect cannot be
found.
Combine input connected to the
external component video output
with another input audio jack.
Display the Input Audio menu for the
connected video output, select “Audio In,”
and select the jack to use for audio input.
46
The audio input
sources cannot be
played in the desired
digital audio signal
format.
The connected component is not
set to output the desired digital
audio signals.
Set the playback component properly
referring to its instruction manual.
—
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency
equipment.
This unit is too close to other
digital or radio frequency
equipment.
Move this unit further away from such
equipment.
—
Noise/hum noise is
heard.
Incorrect cable connection.
Connect the audio cables properly.
If the problem persists, the cables may be
defective.
—
A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output
If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly
input to this unit, only noise is output.
Connect the playback component to this
unit by digital connection and playback the
DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved,
the problem may results from the playback
component. Consult the manufacturer of the
playback component.
2) When noise is output during playback or
skip operation
Before playing back the DTS-CD, display
the Option menu after selecting the input
source and set ‘‘Decoder Mode’’ to ‘‘DTS.’’
—
The volume cannot
be increased, or the
sound is distorted.
The component connected to the
output jacks of this unit is not
turned on.
When the component connected to the
output jacks of this unit is not turned on, the
sound may be distorted, or the volume may
decreased due to the nature of AV receivers.
Turn on all components connected to this
unit.
—
“Max Volume” is set to a low
value.
Set it to a higher value. 54
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
En 73
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
HDMI™ Tuner (FM/AM)
FM
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The front panel
display HDMI
indicator is flashing.
An error with the HDMI
connection has occurred.
Try re-inserting the HDMI cable. —
Confirm that HDMI video that is not
supported by the unit is not being input
(HDMI Input → Option menu → “Signal
Info”).
46
No picture or sound. The number of components is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI components. —
The connected HDMI component
does not support high-bandwidth
digital copyright protection
(HDCP).
Connect an HDMI component that supports
HDCP.
—
(When using HDMI
Control function)
TV sound is not
output from this unit
when operating the
remote control of the
TV.
The TV audio output is not
connected to this unit, or the
setting to match operations carried
out on TV is not set.
Connect the TV audio output to this unit,
and then select the connected input source
in “TVAudio” (Setup menu → HDMI Setup
→ TVAudio).
55
(When using Audio Return
Channel function)
The Audio Return Channel
function is not working.
Make sure that your TV supports Audio
Return Channel.
Set the Audio Return Channel function to
on (Setup menu → HDMI Setup →
ReturnChan).
55
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM stereo reception
is noisy.
You are too far from the station
transmitter, or the input from the
antenna is weak.
Check the antenna connections. 22
Switch to monaural mode. 35
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more
sensitive multi-element antenna.
—
There is distortion,
and clear reception
cannot be obtained
even with a good FM
antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or
place it in a different location.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
You are in an area far from a
station, or input from the antenna
is weak.
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more
sensitive multi element antenna.
—
Use TUNING H / I to manually select the
station.
34
“No Presets” is
displayed.
No preset stations are registered. Register stations you want to listen to as
preset stations before operation.
35
“Wrong Station” is
displayed.
An invalid FM/AM frequency has
been input.
Input a frequency that can be received. —
En 74
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
AM
iPod™/iPhone™
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak, or the antenna
connections are loose.
Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 22
Use the manual tuning method. 34
Automatic station
preset does not
work.
Automatic station preset is not
available for AM stations.
Use manual station preset. 34
Continuous
crackling and
hissing noises are
heard.
The supplied AM loop antenna is
not connected.
Connect the AM loop antenna correctly
even if you use an outdoor antenna.
22
The noises may be caused by
lightning, fluorescent lamps,
motors, thermostats, or other
electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise,
but it can be reduced by installing and
properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.
22
Buzzing and whining
noises are heard.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. —
Display Cause Remedy
See
page
Loading... The unit is in the process of
recognizing the connection with
your iPod/iPhone.
—
The unit is in the middle of
acquiring song lists from your
iPod/iPhone.
—
Connect error There is a problem with the signal
path from your iPod/iPhone to the
unit.
Turn off the unit and reconnect the Yamaha
iPod universal dock to the DOCK jack of
the unit.
39
Remove your iPod/iPhone from the Yamaha
iPod universal dock and then place it back in
the dock.
39
Unknown iPod The iPod/iPhone being used is not
supported by the unit.
Connect an iPod/iPhone supported by the
unit.
—
iPod connected Your iPod/iPhone is properly
placed in the Yamaha iPod
universal dock.
—
Disconnected Your iPod/iPhone is removed from
the Yamaha iPod universal dock.
—
Unable to play The unit cannot playback the
songs currently stored on your
iPod/iPhone.
Check that songs are currently stored on
your iPod/iPhone.
—
En 75
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
Bluetooth™ Remote control
Display Cause Remedy
See
page
Searching... The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver and the Bluetooth
component are in the process of
pairing.
—
The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver and the Bluetooth
component are in the process of
establishing a connection.
—
Completed The pairing is completed. —
Canceled The pairing is canceled. —
BT connected The connection between the
Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver and the Bluetooth
component is established.
—
Disconnected The Bluetooth component is
disconnected from the Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
—
Not found The Bluetooth component is not
found.
During pairing:
– pairing must be performed on the
Bluetooth component and this unit
simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth
component is in pairing mode.
During connecting:
– check if the Bluetooth component is
turned on.
– check if the Bluetooth component is
within 10 m (32 feet) of the Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a
maximum range of 6 m / 20 ft, and no more
than 30 degrees off-axis from the front
panel.
—
Direct sunlight or lighting (from
an inverter type of fluorescent
lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking
the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this
unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 4
The remote control ID of the
remote control and this unit do not
match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit and
the remote control.
66
External components
cannot be controlled
using the remote
control.
The remote control code is not
correctly set.
Set the remote control code correctly using
“Remote control code search” on the CD-
ROM.
—
Try setting another code for the same
manufacturer using “Remote control code
search” on the CD-ROM.
—
If this unit does not work when you press
Cursor B / C / D / E, do the following.
When the key does not work during DVD
disc menu operation: press the Input
selector again.
When the key does not work during Option
menu/Setup menu operation: press the key
corresponding to the current menu operation
again.
—
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some
models that do not respond to the
remote control.
—
En 76
APPENDIX
Audio information
Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that
involves both a problem, and the capability of maintaining audio and video
signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.
Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user
adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video
syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization
automatically and accurately without user interaction.
Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One
amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the
other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this
arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This
restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each
amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely
independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and
center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range
audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects,
referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-
channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the
surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic
range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5
full-range channels, and the precise sound orientation generated using
digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement
and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a
5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers
of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete
5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel,
and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel
for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and
“Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel
playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes
available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce
realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo),
a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special
sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a
narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all
video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts.
The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal
processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel
to enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for
high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an
optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound
that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby
TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio
simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of
Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel
sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS
decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical
48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers
sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-
channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and
motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of
movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining
popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a
home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural
spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system
produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left,
right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as
a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels).
DTS Express
This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray
discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the
case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling
you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while
playing the main program.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc.
Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology
delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering
a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz
audio simultaneously.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed
for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an
optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound
that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master
Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio
simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the
optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD
Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel
audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
Glossary
En 77
APPENDIX
Glossary
DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital
storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as
single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while
noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common
occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high
sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the
PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or
higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can
transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack.
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency
range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only
enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by
the other 5-channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems.
Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback
by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels
with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are
two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode”
for movie sources.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is
digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is
used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses
a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of
time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded
as pulses and then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is
sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of
accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the
number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is
determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of
quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number
of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced.
Sound field program information
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for
use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many
speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as
room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so
widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard.
Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses
Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby
Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie
theater in the listening room of your own home.
Compressed music enhancer
The Compressed music enhancer feature of this unit enhances your
listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in compression
artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss
of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-
frequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for
headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field
program, so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you
to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers, by
using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual
CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a
center speaker.
Video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into
the Y signal for luminance and the P
B and PR signals for chrominance.
Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of
these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color
difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color
signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output
component signals.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the
three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and
synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component
transmits these three elements combined.
Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the
24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit
depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to
billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast
ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and
white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry
supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an
interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and
audio/video monitors (such as digital televisions), HDMI supports
standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital
audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and
supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate
future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the
security requirements of content providers and system operators. For
further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://
www.hdmi.org/.”
“x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more
extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that
were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color
gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can
thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still
pictures and computer graphics.
En 78
APPENDIX
■ HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can playback the audio
sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the digital audio input (optical or coaxial) connections.
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD
Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
iPod™, iPhone™
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “iPhone” is a trademark
of Apple Inc.
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a
license agreement.
“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Information on HDMI™
Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD,
etc.
DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc.
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.
Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS Express
Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
NOTES
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output,
depending on the type of the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.
To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the
component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the
component).
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents
downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio
commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content.
– 480i/60 Hz
– 576i/50 Hz
– 480p/60 Hz
– 576p/50 Hz
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
About trademarks
En 79
APPENDIX
■ Input jacks
• Analog audio
Audio x 5 (AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, V-AUX)
• Digital audio
Optical x 2 (AV1, AV4)
Coaxial x 2 (AV2, AV3)
•Video
Composite x 5 (AV3, AV4, AV5, AV6, V-AUX)
Component x 2 (AV1, AV2)
•Other
HDMI x 4
DOCK x 1 (AUDIO, VIDEO [Composite])
■ Output jacks
• Analog Audio
Speaker out x 5ch (FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R)
PRE OUT x 2 (SURROUND BACK L/R)
Subwoofer out x 1
AV O U T x 1
AUDIO OUT x 1
•Video
MONITOR OUT
- Component x 1
- Composite x 1
AV O U T
- Composite x 1
•Other
HDMI OUT x 1
■ HDMI
• HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lips Sync,
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
- VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
•Audio Format
- Dolby Digital
- DTS
- DSD 6ch
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby TrueHD
- DTS-HD
- PCM 2ch-8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
■ Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby True HD, Dolby Digital Plus
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS Express
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
■ AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
FRONT L/R ....................................................................... 105 W/ch
CENTER.................................................................................105 W
SURROUND L/R .............................................................. 105 W/ch
[Other models]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
FRONT L/R ....................................................................... 105 W/ch
CENTER.................................................................................105 W
SURROUND L/R .............................................................. 105 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω ...................................110/130/160/180 W
[Other models]
Front Speakers 6/4/2 Ω .............................................110/130/150 W
• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)
[China, Korea, General and Asia models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ............................................................140 W
• Maximum Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...........................................................120 W
• IEC Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models]
Front Speakers 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω .....................105 W+105 W
• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω .......................................................................................... 0.2 dB
Specifications
En 80
APPENDIX
Specifications
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
AV5, etc .....................................................................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Voltage
AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................... 2.3 V or more
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT ............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo & Front: Small)................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ..................................100 mV/470 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV5 to FRONT ..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/-3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
AV5, etc. to FRONT (DIRECT)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ....... 0.06% or less
[Other models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 6 Ω)............................. 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
AV5, etc. (DIRECT) Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers)
...............................................................................100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front Speakers ............................................................150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) ........................... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Volume Control ...................................... MUTE / -80 dB to +16.5 dB
• Tone Control (Front Speakers)
BASS Boost/Cut .............................................±10 dB/2 dB at 50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency.................................................... 350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut......................................±10 dB/2 dB at 20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency.............................................. 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back)............. 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer)............................................................ 24 dB/oct.
■ VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ........................ NTSC
[Other models] ........................................................................... PAL
• Signal Level
Composite ..................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component ...................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (P
B/PR)
• Maximum Input Level ..............................................1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................... 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]
Component ................................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB
■ FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]............................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]............87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ................................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono .....................................................................3.0 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo.................................................................. 74 dB/69 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo........................................................................0.3/0.3%
• Antenna Input (unbalanced)......................................................... 75 Ω
■ AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...................................530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models]..................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ........................................................531 to 1611 kHz
■ GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General models] ................. AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ........................................................ AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ........................................................ AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ................................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models]..................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia models]......................................AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .....................................270 W/320 VA
[Other models] ........................................................................280 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control off / Standby Through off ....................0.2 W or less
HDMI Control on / Standby Through off.....................1.2 W or less
HDMI Control on/ Standby Through on..........................3 W or less
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
435 x 151 x 364 mm (17-1/8 x 6 x 14-3/8 in)
• Weight
8.4 kg (18.5 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
En 81
APPENDIX
Numerics
5.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 10
6.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 10
7.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 10
A
Adaptive DRC, Sound Setup ....................................................... 53
Advanced Setup menu ................................................................. 65
AM antenna connection ............................................................... 22
AM tuning .................................................................................... 34
Audio In, Option menu ................................................................ 46
AUDIO jack ................................................................................. 14
Audio Return Channel function ................................................... 69
Audio, HDMI Setup..................................................................... 56
Auto Preset................................................................................... 35
Auto Preset, Option menu............................................................ 47
Automatic traffic information reception ...................................... 38
AutoPowerDown, Func. Setup .................................................... 58
B
BD player connection .................................................................. 17
Bluetooth™ component playback................................................ 42
C
Cable plug .................................................................................... 14
Center speaker................................................................................ 9
Changing speaker impedance ...................................................... 12
CINEMA DSP indicator ................................................................ 7
Clear Preset, Option menu ........................................................... 47
COAXIAL jack ............................................................................ 14
COMPONENT VIDEO jack........................................................ 14
Config, Speaker Setup ................................................................. 49
Connect, Option menu ................................................................. 47
Connecting speakers .................................................................... 11
Connections.................................................................................... 9
Control, HDMI Setup................................................................... 55
Cursor indicators ............................................................................ 7
D
D.Range, Sound Setup ................................................................ 54
Decoder Mode, Option menu...................................................... 45
Dimmer, Func. Setup .................................................................. 58
Direct mode ................................................................................. 31
Disconnect, Option menu............................................................ 47
Distance, Speaker Setup.............................................................. 51
DSP Parameter ............................................................................ 59
DVD player connection............................................................... 17
E
Equalizer, Speaker Setup ............................................................ 51
EXTD Surround, Option menu ................................................... 45
External component connection.................................................. 14
F
FM antenna connection ............................................................... 22
FM Mode, Option menu.............................................................. 47
FM tuning.................................................................................... 34
Front panel .................................................................................... 5
Front panel display ........................................................................ 7
Front speaker................................................................................. 9
Func. Setup.................................................................................. 57
H
HDMI Control function............................................................... 67
HDMI indicator............................................................................. 7
HDMI jack .................................................................................. 14
HDMI Setup ................................................................................ 54
High-frequency sound adjustment .............................................. 28
I
Init Volume, Sound Setup ........................................................... 54
INIT, Advanced Setup menu....................................................... 66
Input Rename, Func. Setup ......................................................... 57
iPhone™ playback ...................................................................... 39
iPod™ playback .......................................................................... 39
J
Jack.............................................................................................. 14
L
Level, Speaker Setup................................................................... 51
Lipsync, Sound Setup.................................................................. 53
Low-frequency sound adjustment ............................................... 28
M
Manual Preset .............................................................................. 36
Max Volume, Sound Setup ......................................................... 54
Memory Guard ............................................................................ 58
Multi information display.............................................................. 7
MUTE indicator ............................................................................ 7
N
Normal tuning.............................................................................. 34
O
OPTICAL jack ............................................................................ 14
Option menu ................................................................................ 44
P
Pairing, Option menu .................................................................. 47
PHONES jack................................................................................ 5
Portable audio player connection ................................................ 21
PORTABLE jack......................................................................... 14
Preset tuning ................................................................................ 35
R
Radio Data System tuning........................................................... 37
Rear panel...................................................................................... 6
Remote control .............................................................................. 8
Remote control battery installation ............................................... 4
Remote control, Controlling other components .......................... 62
REMOTE ID, Advanced Setup menu ......................................... 66
Repeat playback, iPod/iPhone ..................................................... 41
Index
En 82
APPENDIX
Index
Repeat, Option menu ................................................................... 47
ReturnChan, HDMI Setup ........................................................... 55
S
SCENE function........................................................................... 29
Setup menu................................................................................... 48
Shuffle playback, iPod/iPhone..................................................... 41
Shuffle, Option menu................................................................... 47
Signal Info, Option menu............................................................. 46
Sound field program .................................................................... 29
Sound field program parameter setting........................................ 59
Sound Setup ................................................................................. 53
SP IMP., Advanced Setup menu.................................................. 65
Speaker connection ........................................................................ 9
Speaker indicators.......................................................................... 7
Speaker layout.............................................................................. 10
Speaker setting ............................................................................. 23
Speaker Setup............................................................................... 49
Standby Charge, Option menu..................................................... 47
Standby, HDMI Setup.................................................................. 55
Straight decoding mode ............................................................... 30
Subwoofer ...................................................................................... 9
Supplied accessories ...................................................................... 4
Surround back speaker................................................................... 9
Surround back speaker connection .............................................. 11
Surround speaker ........................................................................... 9
T
Test Tone, Speaker Setup ............................................................ 52
Tone control ................................................................................. 28
TrafficProgram, Option menu...................................................... 47
TU, Advanced Setup menu .......................................................... 66
Tuner indicator............................................................................... 7
TV monitor connection ................................................................ 15
TVAudio, HDMI Setup ............................................................... 55
V
VIDEO AUX input cover .............................................................. 4
Video cameras connection ........................................................... 21
VIDEO jack ................................................................................. 14
VOLTAGE SELECTOR............................................................... 6
VOLUME...................................................................................... 5
VOLUME indicator ...................................................................... 7
Volume Trim, Option menu........................................................ 45
Y
YPAO.......................................................................................... 23
© 2010 Yamaha Corporation
YC504B0/OMEN
- 1 -
TV
A.R. Systems 0320
Acme 0342
Acura 0323, 0343
ADC 0337
Admiral 0054, 0178, 0336,
0337, 0339, 0346,
0347
Advent 0158
Adventura 0057
Adyson 0277, 0282, 0342
Agashi 0277, 0282
Agazi 0337
Aiko 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0342, 0343
Aim 0320
Aiwa 0078, 0379
Akai 0050, 0055, 0109,
0159, 0181, 0277,
0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0343, 0349,
0350
Akiba 0320, 0340
Akura 0320, 0323, 0337,
0340
Alaron 0277
Alba 0161, 0277, 0320,
0323, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0344, 0349,
0351, 0372, 0382
Albatron 0140
Alcyon 0171
Alleron 0059
Allorgan 0282
Allstar 0320, 0350
America Action 0179
AMOi 0276
Amplivision 0161, 0282, 0321,
0342
Amstrad 0320, 0323, 0337,
0340, 0343
Amtron 0058
Anam 0179, 0343
Anam National 0052, 0058
Anglo 0323, 0343
Anitech 0171, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0343
Ansonic 0161, 0168, 0320,
0323, 0341, 0343
AOC 0008, 0026, 0050,
0053
Apex 0039, 0111, 0217
Arcam 0277, 0282
Arcam Delta 0342
Aristona 0320, 0349, 0350
Arthur Martin 0321
ASA 0339, 0347
Asberg 0171, 0320, 0350
Astra 0343
Asuka 0277, 0282, 0337,
0340, 0342
Atlantic 0277, 0320, 0342,
0349, 0350
Atori 0323, 0343
Auchan 0321
Audiosonic 0161, 0282, 0320,
0340, 0342, 0343,
0349, 0350
AudioTon 0161, 0282, 0342
Audiovox 0058, 0179, 0194
Ausind 0171
Autovox 0171, 0282, 0337,
0339, 0342
Aventura 0051
Awa 0277, 0282
Axion 0156
Baird 0282
Bang & Olufsen 0180, 0339
Basic Line 0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0343, 0350
Bastide 0282, 0342
Baur 0320, 0349
Bazin 0282
Beko 0161, 0269, 0294,
0302, 0311, 0320,
0328, 0351
Belcor 0008
Bell & Howell 0019, 0054
Benq 0097, 0242, 0361
Beon 0320, 0349, 0350
Best 0161
Bestar 0161, 0320, 0350
Binatone 0282, 0342
Blue Sky 0320, 0340
Blue Star 0348
Boots 0282, 0342
BPL 0320, 0348
Bradford 0058, 0179
Brandt 0322, 0345
Brillian 0182
Brinkmann 0320
Brionvega 0320, 0339, 0349,
0350
Britannia 0277, 0282, 0342
Brockwood 0008
Broksonic 0109, 0179
Bruns 0339
BTC 0340
Bush 0269, 0282, 0283,
0304, 0320, 0323,
0328, 0332, 0340,
0343, 0344, 0346,
0348, 0349, 0350,
0372, 0382, 0463,
0470, 0472
Candle 0008, 0026, 0050,
0057
Capsonic 0337
Carena 0320
Carnivale 0050
Carrefour 0344
Carver 0010
Cascade 0320, 0323, 0343
Casio 0367
Cathay 0320, 0349, 0350
CCE 0183, 0282
Celebrity 0055, 0107
Celera 0039
Centurion 0320, 0349, 0350
Century 0339
CGE 0161, 0171
Changhong 0039
Chimei 0273
Cimline 0323, 0343
Citizen 0007, 0008, 0026,
0050, 0058
City 0323, 0343
Clarion 0179
Clarivox 0349
Clatronic 0161, 0171, 0282,
0320, 0323, 0337,
0340, 0342, 0343,
0350, 0351
CMS 0277
CMS Hightec 0282
Coby 0197
Colortyme 0008, 0026
Commercial Solutions
0021
Concerto 0008, 0026
Concorde 0323, 0343
Condor 0161, 0277, 0320,
0323, 0342, 0350,
0351
Contec 0179, 0277, 0323,
0342, 0343, 0344
Contec/Cony 0012, 0058
Continental Edison
0345
Cosmel 0323, 0343
Craig 0058, 0179
Crosley 0010, 0037, 0171,
0339
Crown 0058, 0161, 0171,
0179, 0320, 0323,
0343, 0349, 0350,
0351
CS Electronics 0277, 0340, 0342
CTC Clatronic 0341
CTX 0205
Curtis Mathes 0007, 0008, 0010,
0019, 0021, 0026,
0049, 0050, 0178
CXC 0058, 0179
Cybertron 0340
Cytron 0152
Daewoo 0007, 0008, 0026,
0037, 0053, 0167,
0266, 0275, 0277,
0282, 0315, 0320,
0323, 0331, 0335,
0342, 0343, 0350,
0381, 0465
Dainichi 0277, 0340
Dansai 0277, 0282, 0320,
0337, 0349, 0350
Dantax 0161, 0349
Dawa 0320
Daytron 0007, 0008, 0026,
0323, 0343
De Graaf 0346
Decca 0282, 0320, 0342,
0349, 0350
Dell 0145, 0245
Denver 0358, 0362
Desmet 0320, 0349, 0350
Diamant 0320
Diamond 0277
DiamondVision 0135, 0143
Dimensia 0049
Disney 0219
Dixi 0282, 0320, 0323,
0343, 0349, 0350
Dream Vision 0461, 0498
DTS 0323, 0343
Dual 0282, 0320, 0342
Dual-Tec 0342, 0343
Dumont 0008, 0030, 0062,
0282, 0339, 0341,
0342
Durabrand 0031, 0051, 0179,
0215
Dux 0349
Dwin 0178
Dynatron 0320, 0349, 0350
Dynex 0228, 0231
Elbe 0161, 0168, 0282,
0320
Elcit 0339
Electa 0348
ELECTRO TECH
0343
Electroband 0055, 0107
Electrograph 0176
Electrohome 0008, 0026, 0052,
0055
Element 0230
Elin 0277, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0349, 0350
Elite 0320, 0340, 0350
Elman 0341
Elta 0277, 0323, 0343
Emerson 0000, 0007, 0008,
0012, 0013, 0019,
0026, 0031, 0037,
0051, 0058, 0059,
0161, 0179, 0320,
0339
Emprex 0154
Envision 0008, 0026, 0050
Epson 0155, 0206, 0359
Erres 0320, 0349, 0350
ESA 0051
ESC 0282
Etron 0343
Eurofeel 0282
Euro-Feel 0337
Euroline 0349
Euroman 0161, 0277, 0282
Euromann 0320, 0337, 0342,
0350
Europhon 0277, 0282, 0320,
0341, 0342, 0350
Expert 0321
Exquisit 0320
Fenner 0323, 0343
Ferguson 0322, 0345, 0349
Fidelity 0277, 0320, 0342,
0346
Filsai 0282
Finlandia 0346
Finlux 0171, 0282, 0320,
0339, 0341, 0342,
0349, 0350
FIRST LINE 0342, 0343, 0350
Firstline 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323
Fisher 0019, 0161, 0282,
0339, 0342, 0344,
0351
Flint 0320, 0350
Formenti 0171, 0277, 0336,
0339, 0342, 0349
Formenti/Phoenix
0277
Fortress 0336, 0339
Fraba 0161, 0320
Friac 0161
Frontech 0282, 0323, 0337,
0343, 0346, 0347
Fujitsu 0059, 0069, 0074,
0075, 0282
Fujitsu General 0282
Fujitsu Siemens 0504, 0505, 0507,
0510, 0511
Funai 0051, 0058, 0059,
0112, 0113, 0115,
0118, 0119, 0179,
0337
Futuretech 0058, 0179
Galaxi 0320, 0351
Galaxis 0161, 0320
Gateway 0176, 0177, 0241
GBC 0323, 0343, 0344
GE 0008, 0021, 0023,
0026, 0027, 0031,
0034, 0049, 0052,
0056, 0209
Geant Casino 0321
GEC 0282, 0320, 0342,
0347, 0349, 0350
Geloso 0323, 0343, 0346
General Technic 0323, 0343
List of remote control codes
Liste des codes de commande
Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder
Elenco dei codici di telecomando
Lista de códigos de mando a distancia
Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes
- 2 -
Genexxa 0320, 0340, 0347,
0350
GFM 0128, 0227
Giant 0282
Gibralter 0008, 0030, 0050,
0062
GoldHand 0277
Goldline 0320
GoldStar 0007, 0008, 0012,
0026, 0031, 0050,
0053, 0161, 0277,
0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343, 0346,
0349, 0350
Goodmans 0246, 0272, 0282,
0320, 0323, 0337,
0343, 0344, 0349,
0350, 0462, 0473,
0477
Gorenje 0161, 0351
GPM 0340
GPX 0129
Gradiente 0240
Graetz 0347
Granada 0171, 0282, 0320,
0321, 0342, 0344,
0346, 0349, 0350
Grandin 0340, 0343, 0348,
0349
Gronic 0282
Grundig 0160, 0161, 0171,
0310, 0320
Grunpy 0058, 0059, 0179
Haier 0157, 0233
Halifax 0277, 0282, 0337,
0342
Hallmark 0008, 0026, 0031
Hampton 0277, 0282, 0342
Hanseatic 0161, 0168, 0282,
0320, 0323, 0342,
0343, 0344, 0349,
0350
Hantarex 0320, 0323, 0343
Hantor 0320
Harman/Kardon 0010
Harvard 0058, 0179
Harwood 0320, 0323
Havermy 0178
HCM 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0342, 0343,
0348
Hema 0282, 0323
Hewlett Packard 0192
Higashi 0277
HiLine 0320
Hinari 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0344, 0349,
0350
Hisawa 0321, 0340, 0348
Hisense 0247
Hitachi 0008, 0012, 0026,
0066, 0084, 0092,
0093, 0120, 0172,
0173, 0255, 0270,
0271, 0282, 0320,
0335, 0338, 0342,
0344, 0346, 0347,
0365, 0382, 0448,
0456, 0467
Hornyphon 0320, 0350
Hoshai 0340
Huanyu 0277, 0342
Hygashi 0277, 0282, 0342
Hyper 0277, 0282, 0323,
0342, 0343
Hypson 0282, 0320, 0321,
0337, 0342, 0348,
0349, 0350
Hyundai 0141
Iberia 0320
ICE 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0350
ICeS 0277
Ilo 0148, 0153
IMA 0058
Imperial 0161, 0171, 0320,
0347, 0350, 0351
Indiana 0320, 0349, 0350
Infinity 0010
InFocus 0250, 0327, 0363,
0479, 0508
Ingelen 0347
Ingersol 0323, 0343
Initial 0153
Inno Hit 0171, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
Innovation 0337, 0343
Insignia 0131, 0228, 0236,
0238
Inteq 0030
Interactive 0161
Interbuy 0323, 0343
Interfunk 0161, 0320, 0339,
0347, 0349, 0350
International 0277
Intervision 0161, 0282, 0320,
0337, 0341, 0342
Irradio 0171, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0343, 0349,
0350
Isukai 0320, 0340
ITC 0282, 0342
ITS 0277, 0320, 0340,
0348, 0350
ITT 0343, 0347
ITV 0320, 0343, 0349
Janeil 0057
JBL 0010
JC Penney 0007, 0008, 0026,
0027, 0049, 0053,
0056
JCB 0055, 0107
Jensen 0008, 0026
JVC 0012, 0014, 0015,
0056, 0064, 0065,
0067, 0169, 0174,
0297, 0314, 0344,
0350, 0375
Kaisui 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0348
Kamosonic 0342
Kamp 0277, 0342
Kapsch 0347
Karcher 0161, 0320, 0342,
0343, 0349
Kawasho 0008, 0026, 0055,
0277
KEC 0179
Kendo 0161, 0320, 0341,
0346
Kenwood 0008, 0026, 0050
KIC 0282
Kingsley 0277, 0342
KLH 0039
Kloss Novabeam
0057, 0058
Kneissel 0161, 0168, 0320
Kolster 0320, 0350
Konka 0340
Korpel 0320, 0349, 0350
Korting 0161, 0339
Kosmos 0320
Koyoda 0343
KTV 0007, 0050, 0058,
0179, 0183, 0282,
0342
Kyoto 0277, 0282
Lasat 0161
Lenco 0323, 0343
Lenoir 0323, 0342, 0343
Leyco 0320, 0337, 0349,
0350
LG 0031, 0053, 0066,
0116, 0117, 0140,
0161, 0164, 0175,
0195, 0269, 0277,
0282, 0300, 0309,
0317, 0320, 0323,
0328, 0342, 0343,
0346, 0349, 0350,
0366, 0368, 0377,
0466, 0471, 0478
LG/GoldStar 0164
Liesenk 0349
Liesenkotter 0320
Life 0337, 0343
Lifetec 0320, 0323, 0337,
0343
Lloyds 0323
Loewe 0161, 0168, 0265,
0320, 0330, 0352
Loewe Opta 0339, 0349, 0350
Logik 0054
Luma 0320, 0323, 0346,
0349
Lumatron 0282, 0320, 0346,
0349, 0350
Lux May 0350
Luxman 0008, 0026
Luxor 0282, 0342, 0346
LXI 0010, 0019, 0021,
0026, 0027, 0031,
0049, 0111
M Electronic 0342, 0343, 0345,
0347, 0349, 0350
MAG 0096
Magnadyne 0339, 0341, 0349
Magnafon 0171, 0277, 0341,
0342
Magnavox 0008, 0009, 0010,
0013, 0026, 0032,
0033, 0048, 0050,
0128, 0211, 0212,
0224, 0226, 0239
Magnum 0337, 0343
Majestic 0054
Mandor 0337
Manesth 0282, 0320, 0337,
0342, 0349, 0350
Marantz 0008, 0010, 0026,
0050, 0204, 0320,
0349, 0350
Marelli 0339
Mark 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0349, 0350
Masuda 0282
Matsui 0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343, 0344,
0346, 0349, 0350,
0455
Matsushita 0017
Maxent 0147, 0176
Mediator 0320, 0349, 0350
Medion 0320, 0337, 0343
Megapower 0140
Megatron 0026, 0031
MElectronic 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323
Melvox 0321
Memorex 0019, 0026, 0031,
0053, 0054, 0137,
0215, 0323, 0343
Memphis 0323, 0343
Mercury 0320, 0323
Metz 0339
MGA 0008, 0026, 0031,
0050, 0053
Micromaxx 0337, 0343
Microstar 0337, 0343
Midland 0007, 0021, 0023,
0027, 0030, 0056,
0062
Minerva 0171
Minoka 0320, 0350
Mintek 0153
Mitsubishi 0008, 0026, 0031,
0053, 0066, 0084,
0093, 0098, 0150,
0178, 0289, 0320,
0339, 0344, 0350,
0376
Mivar 0161, 0168, 0171,
0277, 0282, 0342
Monivision 0140
Montgomery Ward
0054
Motion 0171
Motorola 0052, 0178
MTC 0008, 0026, 0050,
0053, 0161, 0277
Multi System 0349
Multitech 0058, 0161, 0179,
0183, 0277, 0282,
0320, 0323, 0341,
0342, 0343, 0344,
0346, 0349
Murphy 0277, 0342
NAD 0026, 0031, 0111
Naonis 0346
NEC 0008, 0026, 0050,
0052, 0053, 0072,
0103, 0282, 0344
Neckermann 0161, 0282, 0320,
0339, 0342, 0346,
0349, 0350, 0351
NEI 0320, 0349, 0350
Net-TV 0176
Neufunk 0320, 0323
New Tech 0343, 0350
New World 0340
NewTech 0282, 0320, 0323
Nicamagic 0277, 0342
Nikkai 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0340,
0342, 0349, 0350
Nikko 0026, 0031, 0050
Nobliko 0171, 0277, 0341,
0342
Nokia 0347
Norcent 0201
Nordic 0282
Nordmende 0339, 0345, 0347,
0350
Nordvision 0349
Novatronic 0320
Oceanic 0321, 0347
Okano 0161, 0320, 0351
Olevia 0102, 0199, 0200,
0207, 0222
ONCEAS 0342
Onwa 0058, 0179
Opera 0320
Oppo 0130
Optimus 0017, 0019
Optoma 0144
Optonica 0178
Orbit 0320, 0350
Orion 0043, 0146, 0283,
0320, 0323, 0328,
0343, 0349, 0350
Orline 0320
Osaki 0282, 0320, 0337,
0340, 0342
Oso 0340
Otto Versand 0282, 0320, 0336,
0342, 0344, 0348,
0349, 0350
Pael 0277, 0342
Palladium 0161, 0282, 0320,
0342, 0351
Palsonic 0282
Panama 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0342,
0343
Panasonic 0016, 0017, 0020,
0022, 0023, 0035,
0052, 0056, 0084,
0085, 0133, 0163,
0193, 0284, 0286,
0290, 0292, 0320,
0325, 0347, 0356
Panavision 0320
Pathe Cinema 0161, 0168, 0277,
0321, 0342
Pausa 0323, 0343
Penney 0021, 0023, 0031,
0050, 0111
Perdio 0277, 0320
Perfekt 0320
Philco 0008, 0009, 0010,
0012, 0026, 0050,
0052, 0053, 0161,
0171, 0320, 0339
Philharmonic 0282, 0342
Philips 0008, 0009, 0010,
0011, 0012, 0032,
0048, 0049, 0052,
0122, 0128, 0134,
0186, 0187, 0213,
0221, 0224, 0226,
- 3 -
0239, 0256, 0257,
0259, 0261, 0263,
0267, 0280, 0281,
0287, 0296, 0299,
0301, 0303, 0305,
0313, 0319, 0320,
0324, 0333, 0339,
0342, 0349, 0350,
0353, 0357, 0360,
0380, 0383, 0452,
0459, 0460
Philips Magnavox
0011, 0032, 0033
Phoenix 0161, 0277, 0320,
0339, 0349, 0350
Phonola 0277, 0320, 0339,
0349, 0350
Pilot 0007, 0008, 0050
Pioneer 0008, 0026, 0094,
0095, 0161, 0320,
0345, 0347, 0349,
0350, 0458
Plantron 0320, 0323, 0337,
0350
Playsonic 0282
Polaroid 0039, 0142, 0202,
0234
Poppy 0323, 0343
Portland 0007, 0008, 0026,
0053
Prandoni-Prince
0171, 0346
Precision 0282, 0342
Prima 0157, 0243, 0323,
0343, 0347
Princeton 0140
Prism 0023, 0056
Profex 0323, 0343
Profi-Tronic 0320, 0350
Proline 0320, 0350
Proscan 0021, 0027, 0049
Prosonic 0161, 0277, 0282,
0320, 0342, 0349
Protech 0282, 0337, 0341,
0342, 0343, 0349,
0350
Proton 0008, 0012, 0026,
0031
Protron 0196
PROVIEW 0096, 0246
Provision 0320, 0349
Pulsar 0008, 0030, 0062
Pye 0256, 0320, 0349,
0350, 0378
Pymi 0323, 0343
Quandra Vision 0321
Quasar 0017, 0023, 0052,
0056
Quelle 0282, 0320, 0337,
0342, 0349, 0350
Questa 0344
Radialva 0320
RadioShack 0019, 0021, 0031,
0050, 0179, 0320
RadioShack/Realistic
0007, 0008, 0012,
0026, 0049, 0058
Radiola 0282, 0320, 0349,
0350
Radiomarelli 0320, 0339
Radiotone 0161, 0320, 0323,
0350
Rank 0344
RCA 0008, 0021, 0024,
0025, 0026, 0027,
0042, 0049, 0052,
0053, 0063, 0136,
0225
Realistic 0019, 0031, 0050,
0179
Recor 0320
Redstar 0320
Reflex 0320
Revox 0161, 0320, 0349,
0350
Rex 0337, 0346, 0347
RFT 0161, 0168, 0339
Rhapsody 0277
R-Line 0320, 0349, 0350
Roadstar 0323, 0337, 0340,
0343
Robotron 0339
Rowa 0277, 0282
Royal Lux 0161
RTF 0339
Runco 0030, 0050, 0062
Saba 0298, 0322, 0339,
0345, 0347
Saisho 0282, 0323, 0337,
0342, 0343
Salora 0346, 0347
Sambers 0171, 0341
Sampo 0007, 0008, 0026,
0050, 0176
Samsung 0004, 0005, 0006,
0007, 0008, 0012,
0026, 0031, 0036,
0050, 0053, 0076,
0077, 0079, 0114,
0124, 0125, 0126,
0127, 0139, 0161,
0183, 0185, 0190,
0191, 0258, 0264,
0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0334, 0337,
0342, 0343, 0349,
0350, 0351, 0373,
0453, 0468
Sandra 0277, 0282, 0342
Sansui 0043, 0109, 0320,
0350
Sanyo 0008, 0019, 0068,
0070, 0071, 0099,
0161, 0168, 0223,
0237, 0277, 0282,
0288, 0295, 0323,
0342, 0344, 0369,
0469
SBR 0320, 0349
Sceptre 0235, 0244
Schaub Lorenz 0347
Schneider 0282, 0316, 0318,
0320, 0333, 0340,
0342, 0349, 0350,
0382
Scotch 0026, 0031
Scott 0008, 0012, 0026,
0031, 0058, 0059,
0149, 0179
Sears 0008, 0010, 0019,
0021, 0026, 0027,
0031, 0049, 0051,
0059, 0111
SEG 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0341,
0342, 0344, 0349,
0382
SEI 0320
SEI-Sinudyne 0339, 0341, 0347
Seleco 0344, 0346, 0347
Sencora 0323, 0343
Sentra 0323
Serino 0277
Sharp 0000, 0001, 0002,
0003, 0007, 0008,
0012, 0026, 0060,
0088, 0089, 0091,
0138, 0165, 0170,
0178, 0198, 0229,
0262, 0278, 0279,
0291, 0308, 0312,
0336, 0344, 0354,
0370, 0449, 0450,
0451, 0464, 0474,
0476
Sheng Chia 0178
Shogun 0008
Siarem 0320, 0339, 0341
Sierra 0320, 0350
Siesta 0161
Signature 0054
Silva 0277
Silver 0344
Singer 0321, 0339, 0341
Sinudyne 0320, 0339, 0341,
0349
Skantic 0347
Solavox 0347
Sonitron 0161, 0282
Sonoko 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0342, 0343,
0349, 0350
Sonolor 0321, 0347
Sontec 0161, 0320, 0349,
0350
Sony 0038, 0044, 0045,
0047, 0055, 0104,
0105, 0107, 0110,
0123, 0184, 0220,
0248, 0249, 0251,
0252, 0254, 0326,
0343, 0344, 0371,
0374, 0457, 0475
Sound & Vision 0340, 0341
Soundesign 0008, 0026, 0031,
0058, 0059, 0179
Soundwave 0320, 0349, 0350
Squareview 0051
SSS 0008, 0058, 0179
Standard 0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343,
0350
Starlite 0058, 0179, 0320,
0323, 0349
Stenway 0348
Stern 0346, 0347
Strato 0320, 0323
Stylandia 0282
Sunkai 0343
Sunstar 0320, 0323
Sunwood 0320, 0323, 0343,
0350
Superla 0277, 0282, 0342
Superscan 0013, 0178
SuperTech 0277, 0320, 0323
Supra 0323, 0343
Supre-Macy 0057
Supreme 0055, 0107
Susumu 0340
Sutron 0323, 0343
SVA 0151
Sydney 0277, 0282, 0342
Sylvania 0008, 0009, 0010,
0011, 0013, 0026,
0048, 0050, 0051,
0128, 0227, 0253
Symphonic 0051, 0058, 0062,
0128, 0179, 0215
Syntax 0199
Syntax-Brillian 0199
Sysline 0349
Sytong 0277
Tandy 0178, 0282, 0336,
0340, 0342, 0347
Tashiko 0277, 0282, 0342,
0344, 0346
Tatung 0052, 0177, 0282,
0320, 0342, 0349,
0350
TCM 0337, 0343
Teac 0282, 0320
Tec 0282, 0323, 0342,
0343
Technics 0017, 0023, 0056
TechniSat 0274, 0496, 0497,
0499
Techwood 0008, 0023, 0026,
0056
TEDELEX 0282
Teknika 0007, 0008, 0010,
0012, 0026, 0053,
0054, 0058, 0059,
0179
Teleavia 0345
Telecor 0282, 0320
Telefunken 0320, 0322, 0345,
0350
Telegazi 0320
Telemeister 0320
Telesonic 0320
Telestar 0320
Teletech 0320, 0323, 0343,
0349
Teleton 0282, 0342
Televideon 0277
Televiso 0321
Tensai 0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0343, 0350
Tesmet 0350
Tevion 0337, 0343
Texet 0277, 0282, 0323,
0342
Thomson 0162, 0188, 0189,
0285, 0320, 0322,
0342, 0345, 0350
Thorn 0320, 0349
TMK 0008, 0026, 0031
TNCi 0030
Tokai 0282, 0320, 0350
Tokyo 0277, 0342
Tomashi 0348
Toshiba 0018, 0019, 0040,
0041, 0046, 0073,
0100, 0103, 0108,
0109, 0111, 0121,
0132, 0166, 0208,
0210, 0214, 0217,
0260, 0268, 0282,
0283, 0293, 0304,
0306, 0307, 0329,
0344, 0355, 0454
Totevision 0007
Towada 0282, 0347
Trakton 0282
Trans Continens 0282, 0320
Transtec 0277
Trident 0282
Triumph 0320
Uher 0161, 0171, 0320,
0347, 0350
Ultravox 0277, 0320, 0339,
0341, 0342
Unic Line 0320
United 0349
Universum 0161, 0171, 0282,
0320, 0337, 0349,
0350, 0351
Univox 0320
Vector Research 0050
Vestel 0282, 0320, 0346,
0347, 0349, 0350,
0351
Vexa 0320, 0323, 0343,
0349
Victor 0015, 0344, 0350
VIDEOLOGIC 0277
Videologique 0277, 0282, 0340,
0342
VideoSystem 0320, 0350
Videotechnic 0277, 0282
Vidikron 0010
Vidtech 0008, 0026, 0031,
0053
Viewsonic 0176, 0203, 0232,
0364
Viking 0057
Viore 0148
Visiola 0277, 0342
Vision 0282, 0320, 0350
Vizio 0008, 0177, 0218,
0242, 0500, 0501,
0502, 0503, 0506
Vortec 0320, 0349, 0350
Voxson 0171, 0320, 0339,
0346, 0347, 0350
Waltham 0282, 0320, 0342
Wards 0008, 0009, 0010,
0026, 0031, 0048,
0049, 0050, 0053,
0054, 0059
Watson 0320, 0349, 0350
Watt Radio 0277, 0341, 0342
Waycon 0111
Wega 0320, 0339, 0344
Wegavox 0323
Weltblick 0282, 0320, 0349,
0350
Westinghouse 0107, 0216, 0220
White Westinghouse
0037, 0090, 0277,
0320, 0341, 0342,
0349
Wincom 0101, 0106
Xrypton 0320
- 4 -
Yamaha 0008, 0026, 0050,
0053, 0080, 0081,
0082, 0083, 0086,
0087
Yamishi 0282, 0320
Yok an 03 20
Yoko 0161, 0277, 0282,
0320, 0323, 0337,
0340, 0342, 0343,
0349, 0350
Yorx 0340
Zanussi 0282, 0346
Zenith 0008, 0028, 0029,
0030, 0031, 0054,
0061, 0062
VCR
ABS 1016
Adventura 1069
Adyson 1008
Aiwa 1024, 1026, 1027,
1069
Akai 1021, 1027
Akiba 1008, 1029
Akura 1008, 1027, 1029
Alba 1008, 1009, 1024,
1025, 1029, 1030
Alienware 1016
Ambassador 1030
American High 1068
Amstrad 1008, 1009, 1026
Anitech 1008, 1029
Apex 1088
ASA 1028, 1031
Asha 1070
Asuka 1008, 1026, 1028,
1029, 1031
Audio Dynamics 1064
Audiosonic 1009
Audiovox 1071
Baird 1009, 1025, 1026,
1027
Bang & Olufsen 1017
Basic Line 1008, 1009, 1024,
1025, 1029, 1030
Baur 1028
Beaumark 1070
Bell & Howell 1065
Bestar 1009, 1025, 1030
Black Panther Line
1009, 1025
Blaupunkt 1028
Bondstec 1008, 1030
Broksonic 1100
Bush 1008, 1009, 1024,
1025, 1029, 1049,
1051, 1063, 1217
Calix 1071
Candle 1070, 1071
Canon 1068
Cathay 1009
Catron 1030
CGE 1026, 1027
Cimline 1008, 1024, 1029
CineVision 1104
Citizen 1070, 1071
Clatronic 1008, 1030
Colortyme 1064
Condor 1009, 1025, 1030
Craig 1070, 1071
Crown 1008, 1009, 1025,
1029, 1030
Curtis Mathes 1064, 1068, 1070
Cybernex 1070
CyberPower 1016
Daewoo 1009, 1025, 1030,
1038, 1069, 1223
Dansai 1008, 1009, 1029
Dantax 1024
Daytron 1009, 1025
DBX 1064
De Graaf 1028
Decca 1026, 1027, 1028
Dell 1016
Denko 1008
DiamondVision 1096
DigiFusion 1014
DIRECTV 1019, 1105, 1110,
1111, 1113, 1116,
1122
Dish Network 1018
Dishpro 1018
Dual 1009, 1027, 1028
Dumont 1026, 1028
Durabrand 1114
Dynatech 1069
Echostar 1018
Elbe 1009
Elcatech 1008
Electrohome 1071
Electrophonic 1071
Elsay 1008
Elta 1008, 1009, 1029
Emerson 1008, 1020, 1068,
1069, 1071
ESC 1009, 1025
Etzuko 1008, 1029
Expressvu 1018
Ferguson 1027
Fidelity 1008, 1026
Finlandia 1028
Finlux 1026, 1027, 1028
Firstline 1008, 1024, 1029,
1031
Fisher 1065
Flint 1024
Formenti/Phoenix
1028
Frontech 1030
Fuji 1068
Fujitsu 1026
Funai 1026, 1069
Galaxy 1026
Garrard 1069
Gateway 1016
GBC 1029, 1030
GE 1068, 1070
GEC 1028
Geloso 1029
General 1030
General Technic 1024
GOI 1018
GoldHand 1008, 1029
Goldstar 1026, 1031, 1064,
1071
Goodmans 1008, 1009, 1025,
1026, 1029, 1030,
1031
Gradiente 1069
Graetz 1027
Granada 1028
Grandin 1008, 1009, 1025,
1026, 1029, 1030,
1031
Grundig 1028, 1029
Hanseatic 1009, 1028, 1031
Harley Davidson 1069
Harman/Kardon 1064
Harwood 1008
HCM 1008, 1029
Headquarter 1065
Hewlett Packard 1016
Hinari 1008, 1009, 1024,
1029
Hisawa 1024
Hitachi 1011, 1026, 1027,
1028, 1046, 1062
HNS 1110
Howard Computers
1016
HP 1016
HTS 1018
Hughes 1111, 1113, 1122
Hughes Network Systems
1110, 1116
Humax 1012, 1110, 1113
Hush 1016
Hypson 1008, 1009, 1024,
1029
iBUYPOWER 1016
Impego 1030
Imperial 1026
Inno Hit 1008, 1009, 1025,
1028, 1029, 1030
Innovation 1024
Instant Replay 1068
Interbuy 1008, 1031
Interfunk 1028
Intervision 1009, 1026
Irradio 1008, 1029, 1031
ITT 1027
ITV 1009, 1025, 1031
JC Penney 1064, 1065, 1068,
1070, 1071
JCL 1068
JVC 1007, 1018, 1027,
1039, 1064, 1065,
1066, 1067, 1078,
1089, 1092, 1093,
1094, 1095, 1113,
1208, 1209, 1212,
1213, 1215, 1218
Kaisui 1008, 1029
Karcher 1028
Kendo 1008, 1024, 1025,
1030
Kenwood 1027, 1064, 1065
Kodak 1068, 1071
Korpel 1008, 1029
Kyoto 1008
Lenco 1025
Leyco 1008, 1029
LG 1010, 1026, 1031,
1047, 1054, 1056,
1071, 1103, 1221
Lifetec 1024
Linksys 1016
Lloyd's 1069
Loewe Opta 1028, 1031
Logik 1008, 1029
Lumatron 1009, 1025
Luxor 1008
LXI 1071
M Electronic 1026
Magnavox 1020, 1068, 1114,
1126
Magnin 1071
Manesth 1008, 1029
Marantz 1028, 1064, 1065,
1068
Mark 1009
Marta 1071
Matsui 1024, 1031
Matsushita 1068
Media Center PC
1016
Mediator 1028
Medion 1024
MEI 1068
Memorex 1023, 1026, 1031,
1065, 1068, 1069,
1070, 1071, 1098,
1114
Memphis 1008, 1029
MGN Technology
1070
Micromaxx 1024
Microsoft 1016
Microstar 1024
Migros 1026
Mind 1016
Mitsubishi 1026, 1028, 1079
Motorola 1068
MTC 1070
Multitech 1008, 1026, 1028,
1029, 1030, 1069,
1070
Murphy 1026
NEC 1027, 1064, 1065
Neckermann 1027, 1028
NEI 1028
Nesco 1008, 1029
Nikkai 1008, 1009, 1030
Nikko 1071
Niveus Media 1016
Noblex 1070
Nokia 1009, 1027
Nordmende 1027
Northgate 1016
Oceanic 1026, 1027
Okano 1008, 1009, 1024
Olympus 1068
Optimus 1071
Orion 1023, 1024, 1051,
1115, 1217
Orson 1026
Osaki 1008, 1026, 1029,
1031
Otto Versand 1028
Palladium 1008, 1027, 1029,
1031
Panasonic 1000, 1022, 1044,
1055, 1068, 1072,
1085, 1090, 1091,
1120, 1121, 1214
Pathe Marconi 1027
Perdio 1026
Philco 1008, 1068
Philips 1006, 1013, 1028,
1035, 1040, 1045,
1046, 1050, 1058,
1059, 1061, 1068,
1076, 1101, 1110,
1113, 1116, 1117,
1122, 1126, 1210,
1211
Philips Magnavox
1076
Phonola 1028
Pilot 1071
Pioneer 1028, 1036
Polaroid 1088, 1099
Portland 1009, 1025, 1030
Prinz 1026
Profex 1029
Proline 1026
Proscan 1019
Prosonic 1009, 1024
Pulsar 1114
Pye 1028, 1102
Quarter 1065
Quartz 1065
Quasar 1068
Quelle 1026, 1028
Radialva 1008
RadioShack 1071
RadioShack/Realistic
1065, 1068, 1069,
1070, 1071
Radiola 1028
Radix 1071
Randex 1071
RCA 1019, 1068, 1070,
1075, 1110, 1113,
1122, 1125
Realistic 1065, 1068, 1069,
1070, 1071
ReplayTV 1022, 1123
Rex 1027
RFT 1008, 1028, 1030
Ricavision 1016
Roadstar 1008, 1009, 1025,
1029, 1031
Royal 1008
Runco 1114
Saba 1027
Saisho 1024, 1029
Samsung 1002, 1034, 1041,
1043, 1057, 1060,
1070, 1084, 1110,
1116, 1122, 1124,
1220, 1222
Samurai 1008, 1030
Sanky 1114
Sansui 1023, 1027, 1106,
1115
Sanyo 1032, 1065, 1070
Saville 1009
SBR 1028
Schaub Lorenz 1026, 1027
Schneider 1008, 1009, 1024,
1025, 1026, 1028,
1029, 1030, 1031
Sears 1065, 1068, 1071
SEG 1008, 1009, 1029
SEI-Sinudyne 1028
Seleco 1027
Sentra 1008, 1030
Sentron 1008, 1029
Sharp 1003, 1033, 1077,
1107, 1127, 1219
Shintom 1008, 1029
Shivaki 1031
Shogun 1070
Siemens 1031
Silva 1031
Silver 1009
Singer 1068
- 5 -
Sinudyne 1028
Solavox 1030
Sonic Blue 1022, 1123
Sonneclair 1008
Sonoko 1009, 1025
Sontec 1031
Sony 1001, 1016, 1048,
1053, 1073, 1074,
1080, 1081, 1082,
1083, 1108, 1118,
1216
Stack 1016
Stack 9 1016
Standard 1009, 1025
Stern 1009
STS 1068
Sunkai 1024
Sunstar 1026
Suntronic 1026
Sunwood 1008, 1029
Superscan 1020
Sylvania 1020, 1068, 1069,
1102, 1126
Symphonic 1008, 1069, 1126
Systemax 1016
Tagar Systems 1016
Taisho 1024
Tandberg 1009
Tandy 1065
Tashiko 1026, 1071
Tatung 1026, 1027, 1028
TCM 1015, 1024, 1042
Teac 1009, 1069
Tec 1008, 1009, 1030
Technics 1068
Teknika 1068, 1069, 1071
Teleavia 1027
Telefunken 1027
Teletech 1008, 1009
Tenosal 1008, 1029
Tensai 1008, 1026, 1029,
1031
Tevion 1024
Thomson 1005, 1027
Thorn 1027
Tivo 1108, 1110, 1111,
1113, 1117, 1118,
1119, 1122
TMK 1070
Tokai 1008, 1029, 1031
Tonsai 1029
Toshiba 1004, 1016, 1027,
1028, 1037, 1049,
1052, 1086, 1087,
1097, 1109, 1112,
1194
Totevision 1070, 1071
Touch 1016
Towada 1008, 1029
Towika 1008, 1029
TVA 1030
Uher 1031
UltimateTV 1019
Ultravox 1009
Unitech 1070
United Quick Star
1009, 1025
Universum 1026, 1028, 1031
Vector Research 1064
Video Concepts 1064
Videon 1024
Videosonic 1070
Viewsonic 1016
Voodoo 1016
Wards 1068, 1069, 1070,
1071
Weltblick 1031
XR-1000 1068, 1069
Yamaha 1064, 1065
Yamishi 1008, 1029
Yokan 1008, 1029
Yoko 1008, 1029, 1030,
1031
Zenith 1114
ZT Group 1016
DVD
4Kus 2051
Accurian 2142
Advent 2155, 2251
AEG 2362
Airis 2364
Aiwa 2322
Akai 2145, 2177, 2179,
2248
Akura 2356
Alba 2064, 2165, 2186,
2337, 2346
Alco 2149
Alize 2361
Allegro 2133
Amitech 2362
Amphion MediaWorks
2195
AMW 2195, 2363
Apex 2030, 2124, 2125,
2126, 2127, 2130,
2131
Apple 2241
Arrgo 2138
Asono 2364
Aspire 2152, 2222
Astar 2240
ATACOM 2364
Audiovox 2061, 2149
Avious 2367
Awa 2 36 3
Axion 2249
Bang & Olufsen 2128
Baze 2367
BBK 2364
Bellagio 2363
Best Buy 2359
Blaupunkt 2131
Blue Parade 2157
Boghe 2382
Brainwave 2362
Brandt 2148, 2188
Broksonic 2145, 2146
Bush 2064, 2110, 2170,
2268, 2290, 2346,
2358, 2367, 2383
California Audio Labs
2151
Cambridge Audio
2354
CAT 2352, 2353
CAVS 2192
Centrum 2353
CGV 2354, 2362
Changhong 2140
Cinetec 2363
CineVision 2133, 2237
Clatronic 2358, 2367
Coby 2031, 2046, 2360
Conia 2383
Continental Edison
2363
Crown 2362
C-Tech 2355
Curtis Mathes 2139
CVG 2377
CyberHome 2022, 2098, 2138,
2187, 2336
Cytron 2244
Daenyx 2363
Daewoo 2001, 2133, 2276,
2298, 2330, 2362,
2363, 2377
Daewoo International
2363
Dalton 2357
Dansai 2362, 2381
Daytek 2184, 2195, 2363
Dayton 2363
DEC 2358
Decca 2362
Denon 2059, 2151, 2193,
2332
Denver 2356, 2358, 2360,
2370
Denzel 2380
Desay 2205
Diamond 2354, 2355
DiamondVision 2225, 2232
Disney 2010, 2028
DK Digital 2339
Dmtech 2176
Dual 2380
Durabrand 2136
DVX 2355
Easy Home 2359
Eclipse 2354
E-Dem 2364
Electrohome 2362
Elin 2362
Elta 2341, 2361, 2362
Emerson 2129, 2137, 2150
Enterprise 2129
Enzer 2380
Epson 2247
ESA 2137
Finlux 2354, 2362, 2367
Fintec 2377
Fisher 2134
Funai 2137
Gateway 2051
GE 2029, 2131, 2156
Gericom 2351
GFM 2226
Giec 2382
Global Solutions 2355
Global Sphere 2355
Go Video 2133, 2213
Goodmans 2165, 2280, 2291,
2358, 2371, 2376,
2382
GPX 2227
Gradiente 2151
Graetz 2380
Greenhill 2131
Grundig 2349
Grunkel 2362, 2366
GVG 2377
H&B 2358
H_her 2364
Haaz 2354, 2355
Haier 2254
Harman/Kardon 2047, 2135
HiMAX 2359
Hitachi 2062, 2090, 2115,
2274, 2282, 2316,
2359, 2380
Hiteker 2130
Home Tech Industries
2364
Hyundai 2366
Ilo 2245
Initial 2131, 2245
Innovation 2182
Insignia 2002, 2137, 2253
Integra 2157
Irradio 2053
iSymphony 2246
JBL 2135
JVC 2020, 2096, 2097,
2099, 2100, 2101,
2102, 2103, 2106,
2107, 2160, 2257,
2260, 2262, 2263,
2321, 2324, 2326,
2327, 2343, 2464,
2465, 2468, 2469,
2471
Jwin 2198
Kansai 2360
Kawasaki 2149
Kennex 2362
Kenwood 2041, 2151, 2348
KeyPlug 2362
Kiiro 2362
Kingavon 2358
Kiss 2380
KLH 2131, 2149
Koda 2358
Koss 2013, 2148, 2158
KXD 2359
Landel 2143
Lasonic 2132
Lawson 2355
Lecson 2381
Lenco 2358, 2362, 2367
Lenoxx 2136, 2153
LG 2002, 2033, 2038,
2057, 2129, 2133,
2189, 2191, 2223,
2238, 2270, 2288,
2335, 2373, 2375
Life 2182
Lifetec 2182
Limit 2355
Liquid Video 2158
Liteon 2043, 2051, 2142
Loewe 2320
LogicLab 2355
Magnavox 2025, 2050, 2137,
2150, 2159, 2224,
2230, 2358
Magnex 2367
Majestic 2360
Marantz 2328
Marquant 2362
Matsui 2148, 2378
McIntosh 2199
Mecotek 2362
Medion 2182
Memorex 2028, 2145, 2234
MiCO 2354, 2382
Micromaxx 2182
Microsoft 2156
Microstar 2182
Minoka 2362
Minowa 2367
Mintek 2131, 2245
Mitsubishi 2003
Mizuda 2358, 2359
Monyka 2380
Mustek 2186
Mx Onda 2354
Mystral 2366
Naiko 2362
Nesa 2131
Neufunk 2380
Nevir 2362
Next Base 2143
Nexxtech 2243
NU-TEC 2383
Onkyo 2159, 2368
Oopla 2051
Oppo 2196, 2255
Optim 2381
Optimus 2180
Orava 2358
Orbit 2363
Orion 2073, 2110
Oritron 2148, 2158
P&B 2358
Pacific 2355
Panasonic 2011, 2024, 2034,
2042, 2058, 2062,
2066, 2067, 2093,
2116, 2117, 2118,
2119, 2120, 2121,
2122, 2123, 2151,
2159, 2164, 2166,
2167, 2172, 2173,
2175, 2209, 2214,
2275, 2277, 2278,
2281, 2282, 2283,
2301, 2374, 2470
Parasound 2197
peeKTON 2364
Philips 2008, 2012, 2025,
2044, 2050, 2051,
2053, 2060, 2072,
2108, 2111, 2147,
2159, 2163, 2169,
2174, 2181, 2185,
2230, 2261, 2266,
2267, 2286, 2287,
2289, 2295, 2300,
2302, 2317, 2328,
2338, 2342, 2350,
2467
Phonotrend 2367
Pioneer 2016, 2017, 2018,
2019, 2035, 2092,
2094, 2095, 2109,
2157, 2180, 2190,
2212, 2269, 2272,
2299, 2304, 2305,
2306, 2307, 2308,
- 6 -
2309, 2310, 2311,
2344, 2345, 2347,
2379
Pointer 2362
Polaroid 2125, 2215, 2235
Portland 2362
Powerpoint 2363
Prima 2252
Proceed 2130
Proscan 2156
Prosonic 2360, 2377
Protron 2202
Provision 2358
Pye 2144
Qwestar 2148
Raite 2380
RCA 2021, 2029, 2104,
2105, 2131, 2149,
2156, 2157, 2229
RedStar 2356, 2360, 2362
Regent 2153
Reoc 2355
Rimax 2361
Rio 2133
Roadstar 2331, 2358
Ronin 2363
Rotel 2203
Rowa 2154, 2383
Rownsonic 2353
Saba 2148, 2188
Sabaki 2355
Saivod 2362
Sampo 2141
Samsung 2000, 2045, 2077,
2112, 2113, 2114,
2115, 2151, 2200,
2216, 2219, 2228,
2264, 2265, 2271,
2279, 2294, 2303,
2329, 2365
Sansui 2073, 2145, 2354,
2355, 2362
Sanyo 2134, 2145, 2217,
2292
ScanMagic 2186
Schaub Lorenz 2362
Schneider 2176
Scientific Labs 2355
Scott 2161, 2357
Seeltech 2364
SEG 2162, 2355, 2363,
2380
Sharp 2006, 2040, 2088,
2091, 2182, 2194,
2220, 2221, 2231,
2236, 2293, 2340
Shinsonic 2245
Sigmatek 2359, 2364
Silva 2356
Singer 2354, 2355
Skymaster 2325, 2355
Skyworth 2356
Slim Art 2362
SM Electronic 2355
Sonic Blue 2133
Sontech 2366
Sony 2004, 2005, 2007,
2009, 2014, 2015,
2023, 2026, 2027,
2052, 2068, 2069,
2070, 2071, 2074,
2075, 2084, 2085,
2087, 2168, 2171,
2208, 2210, 2211,
2258, 2273, 2284,
2285, 2312, 2313,
2314, 2315, 2318,
2319, 2466
Soundmaster 2355
Soundmax 2355
Spectra 2363
Spectroniq 2201
Standard 2355
Star Cluster 2355
Starmedia 2358, 2364
Sungale 2204
Sunkai 2362
Superscan 2150
Supervision 2355
Sylvania 2012, 2137, 2150,
2178, 2230, 2239
Symphonic 2108, 2230
Synn 2355
T.D.E. Systems 2366
Tatung 2001, 2362
TCM 2182, 2297
Teac 2149, 2333, 2355,
2383
Tec 2356
Technics 2151
Technika 2362, 2367
Telefunken 2353
Tensai 2362
Tevion 2182, 2355, 2357
Theta Digital 2157
Thomson 2183, 2188, 2334,
2372
Tokai 2356, 2380
Top Suxess 2364
Toshiba 2032, 2036, 2037,
2039, 2048, 2049,
2054, 2055, 2072,
2073, 2076, 2078,
2079, 2086, 2145,
2159, 2218, 2233,
2256, 2259, 2296,
2369
TRANScontinents
2363, 2367
Transonic 2367
Trio 2362
Trutech 2242
TruVision 2359
TSM 2364
Umax 2361
United 2367
Urban Concepts 2159
US Logic 2245
Venturer 2149
Viewmaster 2364
Vocopro 2206
VocoStar 2207
Waitec 2364
Welltech 2382
Westinghouse 2063, 2250
Wharfedale 2354, 2355
Woxter 2361, 2364
Xbox 2156, 2183
Xlogic 2355, 2362
XMS 2362
Xoro 2382
Yamada 2051, 2361, 2363
Yamaha 2056, 2064, 2065,
2080, 2081, 2082,
2083, 2089, 2118,
2151, 2323
Yamakawa 2363, 2380
Yukai 2186
Zenith 2002, 2129, 2133,
2159, 2223
Blu-ray Disc
LG 2033
Panasonic 2011, 2209, 2214
Pioneer 2212
Samsung 2045, 2113
Sharp 2194, 2220, 2221
Sony 2075
Yamaha 2064
DVR
Bush 2110
Hitachi 2090
Panasonic 2066, 2067, 2093,
2116, 2117, 2119,
2120, 2122, 2123
Philips 2108, 2111
Pioneer 2016, 2017, 2018,
2019, 2092, 2094,
2095, 2109
RCA 2105
Samsung 2113, 2219
Sharp 2088, 2091
Sony 2084, 2085, 2087
Toshiba 2086
Yamaha 2089, 2118
DVD Recorder
Aspire 2222
Astar 2240
Broksonic 2146
Go Video 2213
Hitachi 2062
Insignia 2002
Irradio 2053
JVC 2100, 2101, 2106,
2107
LG 2033, 2057, 2223,
2238
Liteon 2043
Panasonic 2011, 2034, 2058,
2062, 2116, 2117,
2119, 2120, 2121,
2123
Philips 2008, 2044, 2050,
2051, 2147
Pioneer 2017, 2035
Pye 2144
Samsung 2000, 2112, 2216
Sansui 2073
Sanyo 2217
Sony 2004, 2005, 2007,
2052, 2068, 2069,
2074, 2208, 2210,
2211
Sylvania 2239
Toshiba 2032, 2036, 2037,
2039, 2049, 2054,
2055, 2076
Yamaha 2056
Cable
ABC 3002, 3003, 3017,
3066, 3067, 3086,
3093, 3119, 3122
ADB 3020
Adelphia 3081
Alcatel 3016
Americast 3124
Amstrad 3022, 3098
Antronix 3065, 3070
Archer 3070
Arcon 3098
AT&T 3095
Axis 3098
Bell South 3124
Cable Vision 3092
Cabletenna 3065
Cabletime 3104
Cableview 3087
Clearmaster 3127
ClearMax 3127
Clyde Cablevision
3105
Colour Voice 3068
Comcast 3084, 3088, 3117
Comcrypt 3107
Comtronics 3069
Contec 3074
Coolmax 3127
COX 3084
Cryptovision 3110
Director 3084
Eastern 3075
Everquest 3123
Fidelity 3098
Filmnet 3107
Filmnet Cablecrypt
3111
Filmnet Comcrypt
3111
Finlux 3097
Focus 3126
Foxtel 3022
France Telecom 3100, 3101
Freebox 3023
GC Electronics 3070
GE 3066, 3093
GEC 3105
Gemini 3072, 3123
General Instrument
3017, 3025, 3066,
3084, 3090, 3096,
3117
Goldstar 3120
Gooding 3099
Grundig 3098, 3099
Hamlin 3073, 3078
Hirschmann 3097
Hitachi 3066
HomeChoice 3106
Humax 3021, 3080, 3083
ITT Nokia 3097
Jasco 3123
Jerrold 3017, 3018, 3025,
3066, 3072, 3084,
3090, 3096, 3119,
3123
JVC 3099
Kabel Deutschland
3024, 3027, 3121
Macab 3101
Magnavox 3079
Maspro 3099
Matsui 3099
MegaCable 3117
Memorex 3076, 3122
Minerva 3099
Mnet 3107
Motorola 3025, 3026, 3084,
3088, 3090, 3095,
3117
Movie Time 3077, 3109
Mr Zapp 3101
Multichoice 3107
Multitech 3127
NEC 3064
NET Brazil 3085
Nokia 3097
Noos 3101
NSC 3077
Oak 3074
Pace 3006, 3089, 3121
Palladium 3099
Panasonic 3112, 3118, 3122
Paragon 3122
Philips 3068, 3071, 3079,
3099, 3100, 3101,
3103
Pioneer 3001, 3006, 3094,
3098, 3114, 3116,
3120
Popular Mechanics
3126
Proscan 3066, 3093
Pulsar 3122
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
3018
Quasar 3122
RadioShack 3123, 3127
RCA 3030, 3031, 3087,
3118
Realistic 3070
Recoton 3126
Regal 3078
Regency 3075
Rembrandt 3066
Runco 3122
Sagem 3101
Samsung 3069, 3089, 3114,
3120
SAT 3098
Scientific Atlanta
3000, 3001, 3002,
3003, 3006, 3028,
3029, 3081, 3086,
3089, 3094, 3095,
3108
Signal 3072, 3123
Signature 3066
Sony 3092, 3125
Sprucer 3118
Standard Component
3115
Starcom 3017, 3072, 3119,
3123
Stargate 3072, 3123
Starquest 3072, 3123
Supercable 3090
Supermax 3127
Tele+1 3107, 3111
Telepiu 3107
Thomson 3082, 3091
TIME WARNER
3084
- 7 -
Tocom 3067
Torx 3017
Toshiba 3122
Tristar 3127
Tudi 3102
Tusa 3072, 3123
TV86 3077
Unika 3065, 3070
United Cable 3018, 3119
Universal 3065, 3070
Universum 3097, 3099
V2 3127
Videoway 3019
View Star 3074, 3077, 3079
Viewmaster 3127
Vision 3127
Visiopass 3097, 3100, 3101
Vortex View 3127
Wittenberg 3098
Zenith 3113, 3122, 3124
Zentek 3126
Satellite
AB Sat 4216, 4217
AccessHD 4104
ADB 4220
AGS 4216
Akai 4053, 4055
Alba 4001, 4004, 4006,
4007, 4062, 4217
Aldes 4005, 4007, 4010
Allsat 4048, 4053, 4055
Allsonic 4005, 4008, 4024
Alltech 4217
Alpha 4053
Alpha Digital 4104
Alphastar 4077
Amitronica 4217
Amstrad 4011, 4035, 4217,
4218
Anglo 4217
Ankaro 4005, 4008, 4024,
4217
Anttron 4001, 4004
Apollo 4001
Armstrong 4011, 4053
Artec 4100
Asat 4053, 4055
ASLF 4217
Astacom 4216
Astra 4009, 4011, 4054,
4217, 4219
Astro 4004, 4008, 4010,
4015, 4024, 4213,
4218, 4219
AudioTon 4004, 4048
Aurora 4222
Austar 4222
Axiel 4216
Axis 4008, 4009, 4024,
4050
Best 4008, 4024
Blaupunkt 4015
Blue Sky 4217
Boca 4011, 4054, 4059,
4217
Boston 4216
Brain Wave 4013
Broadcast 4012
Broco 4217
BSkyB 4035, 4041
BT 4216
Bubu Sat 4217
Bush 4006, 4045
Cambridge 4218
Canal Satellite 4213
Canal+ 4213
CaptiveWorks 4099
Channel Master 4007, 4110
Chaparral 4075
CHEROKEE 4216
Chess 4212, 4217
CityCom 4006, 4215, 4219
Clatronic 4013
CNT 4010
Comag 4080, 4081, 4082,
4083, 4086
Commlink 4005
Comtech 4050
Condor 4008, 4024, 4219
Connexions 4014, 4024
Conrad 4024, 4215, 4218,
4219
Conrad Electronic
4217, 4219
Contec 4050
Coolsat 4096
Cosat 4048
Coship 4109
Crown 4011
Daeryung 4014
Daewoo 4057, 4217
DDC 4007
Delega 4007
Dew 4050
Diamond 4051
Digiality 4219
Digital Stream 4105
DIRECTV 4056, 4064, 4067,
4068, 4070, 4071,
4074, 4107, 4116,
4119, 4121, 4122,
4123, 4127, 4192,
4193, 4194, 4195,
4196, 4197, 4198,
4199, 4200, 4201,
4202, 4203, 4206,
4207, 4221
Discoverer 4212
Discovery 4216
Diseqc 4216
Dish Network 4018, 4065, 4089,
4092, 4094, 4095,
4117
Dishpro 4018, 4117
Distrisat 4053
Ditristrad 4048
DNT 4014, 4053, 4055
Drake 4072
DStv 4222
Dune 4024
Echostar 4014, 4018, 4065,
4089, 4117, 4217
Einhell 4001, 4005, 4011,
4217, 4218
Elap 4216, 4217
Elekta 4010
Elsat 4217
Elta 4001, 4008, 4024,
4048, 4053, 4055
Emanon 4001
Emme Esse 4008, 4024
Engel 4217
Ep Sat 4006
EURIEULT 4031
Eurodec 4052
Europa 4053, 4218, 4219
Europhon 4219
Eurosat 4011
Eurosky 4024, 4011, 4008,
4215, 4218, 4219
Eurostar 4011, 4215, 4219
Eutelsat 4217
Exator 4001, 4004
Expressvu 4117
Fenner 4024, 4212, 4217
Ferguson 4006, 4052, 4214
Fidelity 4218
Finlandia 4006
Finlux 4006
FinnSat 4050, 4052
Flair Mate 4217
Foxtel 4222
Freecom 4001, 4049, 4218
FTEmaximal 4024, 4217
Fuba 4024, 4001, 4008,
4014, 4015, 4055,
4215
Galaxis 4024, 4005, 4008,
4009, 4050, 4048,
4215, 4222
GE 4093, 4066, 4111,
4197
General Instrument
4073, 4019
GMI 4011
GOI 4117
Goldbox 4213
GoldStar 4049
Goodmans 4029, 4002, 4006
Goodmind 4111
Grandin 4031
Grothusen 4001, 4049
Grundig 4006, 4004, 4015,
4035, 4211, 4218,
4222
Hänsel & Gretel 4219
Hantor 4001, 4013
Hanuri 4010
Hauppauge 4044
Heliocom 4219
Helium 4219
Hinari 4007
Hirschmann 4024, 4015, 4210,
4218, 4219, 4216
Hisawa 4013
Hisense 4016
Hitachi 4114, 4006, 4199,
4203
Homecast 4087, 4084, 4085
Houston 4048
HTS 4117
Hughes 4064, 4068, 4194,
4192, 4196, 4202
Hughes Network Systems
4071
Humax 4097, 4025, 4030,
4060
Huth 4005, 4011, 4012,
4013, 4050, 4048,
4219, 4223
Hypson 4031
Ilo 4016
Imex 4031
Innovation 4008
Insignia 4107
Intertronic 4011
Intervision 4048, 4219
ITT Nokia 4006
Jerrold 4019
Johansson 4013
JOK 4216
JSR 4048
JVC 4089, 4065, 4117,
4029
Kamm 4217
Kathrein 4015, 4055, 4053,
4063, 4034, 4042,
4215, 4216, 4217
Kathrein Eurostar
4215
Klap 4216
Konig 4219
Kosmos 4049
KR 4004
Kreiselmeyer 4015
K-SAT 4217
Kyostar 4001
L&S Electronic 4024
Lasat 4024, 4010, 4008,
4054, 4215, 4212,
4219
Lasonic 4108
Lenco 4024, 4001, 4049,
4215, 4219, 4217
Leng 4013
Lennox 4048
Lenson 4218
Lexus 4053
LG 4103, 4107, 4049
Lifesat 4024, 4008, 4212,
4217
Lifetec 4008
Lorenzen 4219
Lorraine 4049
Lupus 4024, 4008
Luxor 4218
Lyonnaise 4052
Macab 4052
Magnavox 4127, 4101
Manata 4031, 4216, 4217
Manhattan 4006, 4010, 4048,
4216
Marantz 4055
Mascom 4010
Maspro 4006, 4217
Matsui 4216
Max 4219
Mediabox 4213
Mediamarkt 4011
Mediasat 4009, 4213, 4218
Medion 4024, 4008, 4217
Medison 4217
Mega 4055, 4053
Memorex 4127
Metronic 4031, 4028, 4001,
4004, 4005, 4010,
4217
Metz 4015
Micro electronic 4218, 4219, 4217
Micro Technology
4217
MicroGem 4106
Micromaxx 4024, 4008
Microstar 4008
Microtec 4217
Minerva 4015
Mitsubishi 4006, 4015, 4202
Mitsumi 4054
Morgan's 4011, 4054, 4055,
4053, 4217
Motorola 4090, 4091, 4088,
4019
Multichoice 4222
Multitec 4212
Muratto 4049
Mysat 4217
Navex 4013
Neuhaus 4009, 4048, 4218,
4219, 4217
Neusat 4217
Next Level 4019
NextWave 4223
Nikko 4011, 4217
Nokia 4006, 4040
Nordmende 4001, 4006, 4007,
4010, 4052
Nova 4222
Novis 4013
Oceanic 4051
Octagon 4001, 4004, 4050
Okano 4011
Optex 4048
Optus 4213, 4222, 4223
Orbitech 4001, 4212, 4213,
4218
OSat 4004
Otto Versand 4015
Pace 4006, 4015, 4035,
4043, 4047, 4216
Pacific 4051
Packsat 4216
Palcom 4007
Palladium 4011, 4218
Palsat 4212, 4218
Panasat 4222
Panasonic 4121, 4126, 4124,
4006, 4035, 4036,
4221, 4198
Panda 4006, 4219
Pansat 4125
Patriot 4216
Paysat 4127
PCT 4110
Philco 4101
Philips 4071, 4068, 4127,
4006, 4055, 4053,
4061, 4033, 4213,
4216, 4196, 4202,
4203, 4201, 4206
Phoenix 4050
Phonotrend 4006, 4005, 4048
Pioneer 4046, 4213
Polsat 4052
Predki 4013
Premiere 4048, 4213
Priesner 4011
Primestar 4076
Profile 4216
Promax 4006
Prosat 4007, 4005
Proscan 4093, 4066, 4122,
4197
Protek 4051
Proton 4016
Provision 4010
- 8 -
Quadral 4024, 4007, 4005,
4008, 4216
Quelle 4015, 4215, 4219
Quiero 4052
RadioShack 4019
Radiola 4055, 4053
Radix 4014, 4037
Rainbow 4004
RCA 4093, 4066, 4112,
4113, 4118, 4119,
4116, 4122, 4197,
4207
Realistic 4078
Redpoint 4009
Redstar 4024, 4008
RFT 4005, 4055, 4053
Roadstar 4217
Roch 4031
Rover 4024, 4217
Saba 4010, 4215, 4219,
4216
Sabre 4006
Sagem 4023, 4052
Sakura 4050
Samsung 4064, 4071, 4069,
4123, 4120, 4003,
4000, 4001, 4032,
4196, 4200
SAT 4007, 4218
Sat Cruiser 4223
Sat Partner 4001, 4004, 4010,
4013, 4049, 4218
Sat Team 4217
Satcom 4012, 4219
Satec 4217
Satelco 4024
Satford 4012
Satmaster 4012
Satplus 4212
Schneider 4008, 4212, 4216
Schwaiger 4051, 4212, 4219
SCS 4215
Seemann 4011, 4009, 4014
SEG 4024, 4001, 4008,
4013
Seleco 4048
Servi Sat 4031, 4217
Siemens 4015
Silva 4049
Skantin 4217
Skardin 4009
Skinsat 4218
SKR 4217
Skymaster 4017, 4022, 4005,
4212, 4217
Skymax 4055, 4053
SkySat 4212, 4218, 4219,
4217
Skyvision 4048
SM Electronic 4212, 4217
Smart 4215, 4217
Sony 4067, 4070, 4213
SR 4011, 4054
Star Choice 4019
Starland 4217
Starring 4013
Start Trak 4001
Strong 4024, 4001, 4004,
4008, 4049, 4222
STS 4115
STVI 4031
Sumida 4011
Sunny Sound 4024
Sunsat 4217
Sunstar 4024, 4011, 4054
Supermax 4223
Tandberg 4052
Tandy 4004
Tantec 4006
TCM 4008
Techniland 4012
TechniSat 4021, 4026, 4027,
4014, 4053, 4038,
4039, 4212, 4213,
4218
Technology 4222
Technosat 4223
Technowelt 4219
Teco 4011, 4054
Telanor 4007
Telasat 4215, 4219
Telecom 4217
Telefunken 4017, 4001, 4216
Teleka 4004, 4011, 4014,
4218, 4219
Telemaster 4010
Telesat 4219
Telestar 4212, 4213, 4218
Televes 4006, 4218
Telewire 4048
Tempo 4223
Tevion 4008, 4217
Thomson 4020, 4006, 4052,
4058, 4208, 4215,
4213, 4219, 4216,
4217
Thorens 4051
Thorn 4006
Tivax 4104
Tivo 4196
Tokai 40 53
Tonna 4006, 4012, 4048,
4218, 4217
Toshiba 4194, 4202, 4203
Triad 4049
Triasat 4218
Triax 4015, 4215, 4218,
4217
Turnsat 4217
Tvonics 4214
Twinner 4031, 4217
UEC 4222
Uher 4212
UltimateTV 4070
Uniden 4079, 4127
Unisat 4011, 4050, 4053
Unitor 4013
Universum 4015, 4215, 4219
US Digital 4016
Variosat 4015
Vega 4024
Ventana 4055, 4053
Viewsat 4098
Visiosat 4013, 4048, 4216,
4217
Voom 4019
Vortec 4001
Welltech 4212
WeTeKom 4212, 4218
Wevasat 4006
Wewa 4006
Winersat 4013
Wisi 4006, 4014, 4015,
4218, 4219
Woorisat 4010
Worldsat 4216
Xrypton 4024
XSat 4217
Zehnder 4024, 4010, 4008,
4209, 4215
Zenith 4102, 4107, 4195
Zodiac 4004
CD
Yamaha 5082, 5095
CD Recorder
Yamaha 5083
MD
Yamaha 5080, 5081, 5086
Tape
Yamaha 5084, 5087
Tuner
Yamaha 5066, 5071, 5085,
5088, 5090, 5092,
5094
XM
Yamaha 5091, 5093
SIRIUS
Yamaha 5064, 5067
DOCK
Yamaha 5068, 5089
NET
Yamaha 5076, 5079
LD
Yamaha 2080
Amplifier
Yamaha 5019, 5020
© 2010 Yamaha Corporation YC506C0/RC
Documenttranscriptie
Owner’s Manual AV Receiver English CONTENTS INTRODUCTION Features and capabilities ................................................... 3 About this manual............................................................. 4 Supplied accessories......................................................... 4 Part names and functions.................................................. 5 Front panel........................................................................ 5 Rear panel......................................................................... 6 Front panel display ........................................................... 7 Remote control ................................................................. 8 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers .......................................................... 9 Speaker channels and functions........................................ 9 Speaker layout ................................................................ 10 Connecting speakers and subwoofer .............................. 11 Connecting external components.................................... 14 Cable plugs and jacks ..................................................... 14 Connecting a TV monitor............................................... 15 Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices ............ 17 Connecting video cameras and portable audio players .. 21 Transmitting input A/V to external components ............ 21 Connecting the FM/AM antennas .................................. 22 Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) .............................................................................. 23 PLAYBACK Basic playback procedure ............................................... 28 Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control) ..... 28 Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function) ............................................................ 29 Registering input sources/sound field program .............. 29 Enjoying sound field programs....................................... 29 Selecting sound field programs and sound decoders...... 29 Sound field programs ..................................................... 32 FM/AM tuning ................................................................. 34 Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning)..... 34 Registering and recalling a frequency (Preset tuning) ... 35 Recalling a preset station................................................ 37 Clearing preset stations .................................................. 37 Radio Data System tuning (U.K. and Europe models only) ..................................... 37 Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ........... 39 Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock ................. 39 Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™ .................................... 39 Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components....... 42 Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ........................................................................... 42 Pairing Bluetooth™ components ................................... 42 Using Bluetooth™ components ..................................... 43 SETUP Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) .................................................................. 44 Option menu display and setup ...................................... 44 Option menu items ......................................................... 44 Setting various functions (Setup menu)......................... 48 Setup menu display and settings .................................... 48 Setup menu items ........................................................... 49 Manages settings for speakers........................................ 49 Setting the audio output function of this unit................. 53 Setting HDMI functions ................................................. 54 Making the receiver easier to use ................................... 57 Setting the sound field program ..................................... 58 Prohibiting setting changes ............................................ 58 Setting sound field program parameters ....................... 59 CINEMA DSP parameters ............................................. 60 Parameters usable in certain sound field programs ........ 60 Parameters usable in surround decoder .......................... 61 Registering remote control codes for external component operations .................................................... 63 Resetting all remote control codes ................................. 64 Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu) ................................ 65 Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu............... 65 Setting the impedance of speakers (U.S.A. and Canada models only).................................. 65 Avoiding crossing remote control signals when using multiple Yamaha receivers ............................................. 66 Changing FM/AM frequency steps (Asia and General models only)..................................... 66 Initializing various settings for this unit ........................ 66 Using the HDMI Control function ................................. 67 APPENDIX Troubleshooting ............................................................... 70 General ........................................................................... 70 HDMI™ ......................................................................... 73 Tuner (FM/AM) ............................................................. 73 iPod™/iPhone™ ............................................................ 74 Bluetooth™ .................................................................... 75 Remote control............................................................... 75 Glossary ............................................................................ 76 Audio information.......................................................... 76 Sound field program information................................... 77 Video information .......................................................... 77 Information on HDMI™................................................. 78 About trademarks ........................................................... 78 Specifications.................................................................... 79 Index ................................................................................. 81 Controlling other components with the remote control ............................................................................... 62 Keys connecting external components ........................... 62 Default remote control code settings.............................. 62 En 2 INTRODUCTION Features and capabilities ■ Built-in high-quality, high-power 5-channel amplifier ■ 1-button input/sound field program switching (SCENE function) .......................29 ■ Speaker connections for 2- to 7.1-channel configurations – – – – – – (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Speaker impedance configuration.....................................................12 Speaker channels and functions .................................................................................................................9 Speaker layout..........................................................................................................................................10 Speaker cable connection.........................................................................................................................11 Subwoofer cable connection ....................................................................................................................13 Using with 6.1/7.1-channel speaker layout..............................................................................................11 ■ Acoustic parameter adjustment to match your speakers and listening environment – Automatic settings for speaker acoustic parameters (YPAO - Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer).......................................................................23 – Specifying the settings for each speaker..................................................................................................49 – Volume control for each speaker..............................................................................................................51 – Speaker distance settings .........................................................................................................................51 – Sound quality control with the equalizer <Graphic Equalizer> ..............................................................51 – Test tone speaker adjustment ...................................................................................................................52 – Bass and treble level adjustment <Tone Control> ...................................................................................28 ■ External component connection (max. 14 inputs) and playback – – – – – – – – – – External component connection...............................................................................................................15 Audio signal output from the TV transmitted through the HDMI jack ...................................................56 HDMI/AV video input combining other audio input...............................................................................46 Correction of lag between audio and video signals <Lipsync>...............................................................53 Protective cover for front panel jacks ........................................................................................................4 Input source name changing <Input Rename> ........................................................................................57 Configuring the settings specific for each input source <Option menu> ................................................44 Playback from external components........................................................................................................28 Playback from an iPod/iPhone (iPod/iPhone and components sold separately) .....................................39 Playback from a Bluetooth component (Bluetooth and components sold separately) ............................42 ■ HDMI settings – Setting the HDMI functions.....................................................................................................................54 – Controlling this unit from HDMI compatible device such as TVs <HDMI Control function> ..............67 – Listening to TV audio with single HDMI cable connection <Audio Return Channel function>............69 ■ FM/AM tuner – – – – – – FM/AM broadcast listening .....................................................................................................................34 Simple preset tuning ................................................................................................................................35 (U.K. and Europe models) Radio Data System tuning ............................................................................37 (U.K. and Europe models) Automatic traffic information reception.......................................................38 Changing FM mode (Stereo/Monaural)...................................................................................................35 (Asia and General models only) Changing FM/AM frequency steps initializing various settings for this unit...............................................................................................................................................34 ■ Multi-channel, multi-format playback – – – – – – – Sound field effect selection......................................................................................................................29 Playback without sound field effects .......................................................................................................30 Stereo playback........................................................................................................................................30 Sound field effect configuration ..............................................................................................................59 Compressed-music playback ...................................................................................................................29 Setting the decode format of digital audio signals <Decoder Mode> .....................................................45 Selecting the 5.1-channel signal playback method <EXTD Surround>..................................................45 ■ Front panel information display – Front panel display information switching ................................................................................................7 – Front panel display brightness adjustment <Dimmer>............................................................................58 – Digital video/audio signal information display <Signal Info> ................................................................46 ■ Volume adjustment functions – – – – Easy listening at low volumes <Adaptive DRC> ....................................................................................53 Maximum volume settings.......................................................................................................................54 Startup volume settings............................................................................................................................54 Adjusting volume between input sources <Volume Trim> .....................................................................45 ■ Remote control operation – External component operation with this unit’s remote control................................................................62 – Multiple Yamaha receiver operation without signal interference <Remote ID Switching>....................66 ■ Other features – – – – – Standby mode after prolonged non-operation <Auto Power Down function>........................................58 Standby mode after a specific amount of time <Sleep timer>...................................................................8 To charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode <iPod Standby Charge> .........................41 Initializing various settings for this unit ..................................................................................................66 Prohibiting setting changes of this unit <Memory Guard> .....................................................................58 En 3 INTRODUCTION Features and capabilities About this manual • Some features are not available in certain regions. • This manual is created prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “dHDMI1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the remote control. Refer to the “Part names and functions” (☞p. 5) for the information about each position of the parts. • J1 indicates that the reference is in the footnote. Refer to the corresponding numbers on the bottom of the page. • ☞ indicates the page describing the related information. • Click on the “ ” at the bottom of the page to display the corresponding page in “Part names and functions.” Front panel Rear panel Front panel display Remote control Supplied accessories ■ Attaching the VIDEO AUX input cover (supplied) ■ Installing batteries in the remote control To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover to the VIDEO AUX jacks when you do not use the jacks. To remove the cover, push the left section of it. When inserting batteries in the remote control, remove the battery compartment cover from the reverse side of the remote control, and insert two AAA batteries into the battery compartment so that they match with the polarity markings (+ and -). a Battery compartment cover c b Attach the cover Battery compartment Replace the batteries with new ones if the following symptoms become evident: • The remote control can only be operated within a narrow range. • bTRANSMIT does not light up, or only lights dimly. PUSH NOTE Check that you received all of the following parts. • • • • • • Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) x 2 YPAO microphone AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna VIDEO AUX input cover Remove the cover If there are remote control codes for external components registered to the remote control, removing the batteries for more than 2 minutes, or leaving exhausted batteries in the remote control, may clear the remote control codes. If this should occur, replace the batteries with new ones, and set the remote control codes. En 4 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions e MEMORY Front panel f a A (Power) Switches this unit between on and standby mode. g b HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator Lights up in any of the following cases while the unit is in standby mode. • When Standby Through function is enabled and audio/video from an external component connected with HDMI is output to a TV during the standby mode (☞p. 55). J1 • When an iPod is charging in the Yamaha iPod universal dock during the standby mode (☞p. 41). When the HDMI Control functions are “On” (☞p. 55), then this stays on during standby mode. h i j k l c YPAO MIC jack d Connect the supplied YPAO microphone and adjust the speaker balance automatically (☞p. 23). INFO Changes the information displayed on the front panel display (☞p. 7). a b c m n SCENE Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (☞p. 36). J2 PRESET j / i Selects an FM/AM preset station (☞p. 37). J2 FM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM (☞p. 34). J2 AM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM (☞p. 34). J2 TUNING jj / ii Changes FM/AM tuner frequencies (☞p. 34). J2 Front panel display Displays information on this unit (☞p. 7). DIRECT Switches this unit to direct mode (☞p. 31). PHONES jack For plugging headphones in. Sound effects applied during playback can also be heard through the headphones. INPUT l / h Selects an input source from which to playback. Press either the left or right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order. d e f g h i o p q r s j Switches the input source and the sound field program with a single button (☞p. 29). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to switch on. TONE CONTROL Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers/headphones (☞p. 28). PROGRAM l / h Switches between the sound field effect (sound field program) you are using and the surround sound decoder (☞p. 29). Press either the left or right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order. STRAIGHT Changes a sound field program to straight decoding mode (☞p. 30). VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting video cameras, game consoles, and portable music players to this unit temporarily. Attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when not using this jack. VOLUME Adjusts the volume level. k YPAO MIC DIRECT INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING VOLUME SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO SILENT CINEMA l VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT PORTABLE m n o p q VIDEO L AUDIO R r s J 1 : During the standby mode, you can select the HDMI input (HDMI1-4) to output to a TV. When the input is changed correctly, HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator blinks twice. J 2 : Usable when you have selected tuner input. En 5 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions Rear panel e AV OUT jacks a DOCK jack f b c d For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-12) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (☞p. 39, ☞p. 42). HDMI OUT jack For connecting an HDMI - compatible TV to output audio/video signals (☞p. 15). HDMI1-4 jacks For connecting external components equipped with HDMIcompatible outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞p. 17). AV1-6 jacks For connecting to external components equipped with audio/video outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞p. 18, p. 19). g h j SPEAKERS terminals For outputting audio/video signals received when analog inputs (AV36 or AUDIO1-2) are selected (☞p. 21). ANTENNA jacks For connecting AM and FM antennas (☞p. 22). AUDIO1-2 jacks For connecting to external components equipped with analog audio outputs to input sound into this unit (☞p. 20). MONITOR OUT jacks VIDEO jack k l m For connecting a TV capable of receiving video input, and outputting video signals to it (☞p. 16). For connecting TV that are compatible with component video signals, using three cables to output video signal (☞p. 15). COMPONENT VIDEO jacks n i AUDIO OUT jacks For connecting the front, center, surround and surround back speakers (☞p. 12). SURROUND BACK jacks (PRE OUT) Outputs the surround back L/R channel signals. You can enjoy the maximum of 7.1-channels by connecting an external amplifier (☞p. 11). SUBWOOFER jack For connecting a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (☞p. 13). VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) Select the switch position according to your local voltage (Refer to Quick Reference Guide). Power cable For connecting this unit to an AC wall outlet. For outputting audio signals received when analog jacks, such as the AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are selected (☞p. 21). a b c Distinguishing the input and output jacks The area around the audio/video output jacks is marked in white to prevent connection errors. Use these jacks to output audio/video signals to a TV or other external component. SPEAKERS ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 FRONT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SURROUND GND AM PR PR Output jacks 75ǡ PB PB VIDEO VIDEO SPEAKERS Y Y ARC MONITOR OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 1 ANTENNA HDMI 3 HDMI 4 FRONT COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE FM HDMI 2 CENTER SURROUND GND AM PR 75ǡ PB VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 SINGLE AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 SURROUND BACK AUDIO OUT AUDIO 2 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT AV 6 d e fg h i j k l m AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT SURROUND BACK SUBWOOFER PRE OUT n En 6 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions Front panel display g Cursor indicators a HDMI indicator h b c d e f Lights up during normal HDMI communication when any of the HDMI 1-4 inputs are selected. CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when a sound field effect that uses CINEMA DSP technology is selected. Tuner indicator Lights up when receiving an FM/AM broadcast. SLEEP indicator Lights up when the sleep timer is on (☞p. 8). MUTE indicator Flashes when audio is muted. VOLUME indicator Displays the current volume level. i ■ Changing the front panel display Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available for operations. Multi information display Displays a range of information on menu items and settings. Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. The front panel can display sound field programs and surround decoder names as well as the active input source. Press fINFO repeatedly to cycle through input source → sound field program → surround decoder in order. J2 Input source name Subwoofer Front speaker L Surround speaker L a Surround back speaker L SW C Center speaker L R SL SR SBL SB SBR HDMI1 Front speaker R VOL. Straight Surround speaker R Surround back speaker R L SL SW C R SR Sound field program (DSP program) Surround back speaker J1 b c d SLEEP STEREO TUNED e f VOL. MUTE SW C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR g h g i J 1 : “SB” is displayed when using a 6.1-channel configuration only. J 2 : While selecting a tuner input, the FM/AM frequency is displayed instead of the input source. En 7 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions a Remote control signal transmitter Remote control Transmits infrared signals. b TRANSMIT Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control. a c SOURCE A (SOURCE Power) b c Switches an external component on and off. CODE SET TRANSMIT n SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP p HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 o 1 d 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK e FM AM PRESET f INFO TUNING TUNER MEMORY g MUSIC DIRECT SCENE h BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO q OPTION i VOLUME ENTER j RETURN POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE s Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM. Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM. Presets radio stations. Selects a preset station. Changes tuning frequencies. f INFO Cycles the information displayed on the front panel display (the name of the currently selected input source, the sound field program, the surround decoder, the FM/AM tuner frequency, etc.)(☞p. 7). g Sound selection keys REC k l r DISPLAY FM AM MEMORY PRESET F / G TUNING H / I Switch between the sound field effect (sound field program) you are using and the surround decoder (☞p. 29). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 INPUT TV VOL l Numeric keys Enter numbers. m TV control keys Operate a monitor such as a TV. n CODE SET Sets remote control codes for external component operations (☞p. 62, p. 66). o RECEIVER A (RECEIVER Power) Switches this unit between on and standby mode. Switch this unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press this key repeatedly to set the time for the sleep timer function. Sleep 120min. Sleep Off Sleep 90min. Sleep 30min. Sleep 60min. The SLEEP indicator (☞p. 7) lights up when the sleep timer is on. q OPTION Displays the Option menu for each input source (☞p. 44). r VOLUME +/Adjusts the volume level (☞p. 28). s MUTE Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (☞p. 28). h SCENE Switches the input source and the sound field program with a single button (☞p. 29). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to switch on. i SETUP TV m ENT Operate recording, playback, and menu displays etc. for external components. J1 p SLEEP Operates the FM/AM tuner. These keys are used when using the tuner input. STEREO STRAIGHT HDMI1-4 jacks AV1-6 jacks AUDIO1-2 jacks Front panel VIDEO AUX jacks Changes the external component to operate with the kExternal component operation keys without changing inputs. J1 A Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK jack. FM/AM tuner e Tuner keys ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE Select an input source on this unit from which to playback. DOCK TUNER Cursor B / C / D / E Select menu items and change settings when setting menus, etc, are displayed. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen when setting menus are displayed, or ends the menu display. k External component operation keys d Input selector HDMI1-4 AV1-6 AUDIO1-2 V-AUX [A]/[B] AV j Cursor B / C / D / E, ENTER, RETURN TV CH Displays a detailed Setup menu for this unit (☞p. 48). MUTE J 1 : You can use kExternal component operation keys for each input source to operate registered components. Remote control codes must be registered for each input in advance if you want to operate external components (☞p. 62). En 8 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers This unit uses acoustic field effects and sound decoders to bring you the impact of a real movie theater or concert hall. These effects will be brought to you with ideal speaker positioning and connections in your listening environment. Speaker channels and functions ■ Surround left and right speakers ■ Front left and right speakers The surround speakers are for effect and vocal sounds with the 5.1channel speakers providing rear-area sounds. When used with 6.1/ 7.1-channel (including surround back channel), sound for right and left rear-area is output. The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo sound) and effect sounds. Surround back speaker setting: When used with 7.1ch sound, arrange the left and right speakers towards the listening position, to the rear of the listening position. Arrange the left and right speakers at least 30 cm apart. The same separation as with the front left and right speakers is optimum. When used with 6.1ch sound, arrange these to the rear of the listening position. ■ Subwoofer Ex. Ex. Front speaker layout: Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position in the front of the room. When using a projector screen, the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the screen from the bottom. ■ Center speaker The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). Ex. Center speaker layout: Place it halfway between the left and right front speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen. Surround speaker layout: Place the speakers at the rear of the room on the left and right sides facing the listening position. They should be placed between 60 degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position and with the speaker tops at a height of 1.5 – 1.8 m from the floor. The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-frequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS. Use a subwoofer that is equipped with built-in amplifier. ■ Surround back left and right speakers Outputs the rear effect. When used with 6.1ch sound, sound from the left and right sound surround back speakers is mixed and output from a single speaker. When used with 5.1ch sound, sound from surround back speakers is distributed between the left and right surround speakers. When using the surround back speakers, connect an external amplifier to the SURROUND BACK jacks of the PRE OUT terminals. Ex. Subwoofer speaker layout: Place it exterior to the front left and right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce echoes from the wall. Ex. En 9 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Speaker layout ■ 5.1-channel speaker layout (5 speakers + subwoofer) ■ 6.1-channel speaker layout (6 speakers + subwoofer) J1 Front speaker R Front speaker L ■ 7.1-channel speaker layout (7 speakers + subwoofer) J1 Front speaker R Subwoofer Front speaker L Front speaker R Subwoofer Surround speaker R Center speaker 60q 60q Subwoofer Front speaker L Surround speaker R 80q Center speaker 60q 80q 60q 80q Surround speaker R 60q 60q Center speaker Surround speaker L Surround speaker L Surround back speaker Surround speaker L Surround back speaker L • Connect at least two speakers (front left and right). • If you cannot connect all five speakers, give priority to the surround speakers. • The surround speakers should be placed between 60 degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position. • When used with 7.1-channel speaker layout, arrange the left and right surround back speakers at least 30 cm a part. 80q 80q 80q 30 cm (12 in) or more Surround back speaker R ■ CRT monitors We recommend that you use magnetically shielded speakers to avoid video distortion, especially for the front and center speakers near the screen. If your screen still gets interference from magnetically shielded speakers, move the speakers farther away from your TV. J 1 : When used with 7.1/6.1-channel speaker layout, connect an external amplifier to the SURROUND BACK L/R jacks of the PRE OUT terminals (☞p. 11). En 10 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers ■ Connecting the surround back speakers Connecting speakers and subwoofer Connect your speakers to their respective terminals on the rear panel. CAUTION • Remove the AC power cable of this unit from the power outlet before connecting the speakers. • Generally speaker cables consist of two parallel insulated cables. One of these cables is a different color, or has a line running along it, to indicate different polarity. Insert the different colored (or lined) cable into the “+” (positive, red) terminal on this unit and the speakers, and the other cable into the “-” (negative, black) terminal. • Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES!” will appear on the front panel display when this unit is switched on. Connecting an external amplifier to the SURROUND BACK L/R jacks of the PRE OUT terminals allows you to create the maximum of 7.1-channel surround system with a surround back channel. For a 6.1-channel system, connect the external amplifier to the SURROUND BACK L jack of the PRE OUT terminals. For a 7.1-channel system connect it to the SURROUND BACK L/R jacks. SINGLE SURROUND BACK SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Front speaker R Surround speaker L R L Surround back speaker R L You can adjust the surround back speaker volume with a volume control of the external amplifier. To obtain the balanced sound during playback, set the speaker output characteristics in advance using the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) or “Speaker Setup” of the Setup menu (☞p. 23). SPEAKERS HDMI 3 HDMI 4 FRONT CENTER SURROUND SINGLE AUDIO OUT Center speaker SURROUND BACK SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Subwoofer En 11 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers ■ (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Changing speaker impedance This unit is configured for 8Ω speakers as the factory setting. When connecting to 6Ω speakers, carry out the following procedure to switch to 6Ω. 1 2 4 5 Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then switch it on again. Connecting the banana plug (Except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea models) Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into the end of the terminal. The power turns on, when the settings you made has been configured. Switch this unit to the standby mode. Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel. 2 FR ON T Banana plug ■ Connecting speakers Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on the front panel display. After approximately a few seconds, the top menu items are displayed. J1 3 FR ON T 1 4 PROGRAM l / h A Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a “6ΩMIN.” YPAO MIC INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO 1 Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires of the cables together firmly so that they will not cause short circuits. 2 3 4 Loosen the speaker terminals. STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA STRAIGHT 3 Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front panel. SPIMP.-8MIN Insert the bare wire of the speaker cable into the gap on the side of the terminal. Tighten the terminal. J 1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)” (☞p. 65) for details on the Advanced Setup menu. En 12 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers ■ Connecting the subwoofer 1 Connect the subwoofer input jack to the SUBWOOFER jack on this unit with an audio pin cable. 2 Set the subwoofer volume as follows. Volume: Set to approximately half volume (or slightly less than half). Crossover frequency (if available): Set to maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN MAX Subwoofer examples En 13 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Audio jacks Cable plugs and jacks This unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are going to connect. ■ Audio/Video jacks OPTICAL jacks COAXIAL jacks These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals. Use fiber-optic cables for optical digital audio signals. These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals. Use pin cables for digital audio signals. HDMI jacks Digital audio fiber-optic cable Digital audio pin cable Digital video and digital sound are transmitted through a single jack. Only use an HDMI cable. HDMI cable • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. • We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation. AUDIO jacks PORTABLE jack These jacks transmit conventional analog audio signals. Use stereo pin cables, connecting the red plug to the red R jack, and the white plug to the white L jack. This jack transmits conventional analog audio signals. Use a stereo mini-plug cable when connecting. Stereo pin cable ■ Analog video jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks VIDEO jack The signal is separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use component video pin cables with three plugs. This jack transmits conventional analog video signals. Use video pin cables. Stereo mini-plug cable Component video pin cable Video pin cable En 14 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Connecting an HDMI video monitor Connecting a TV monitor Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI OUT jack. This unit is equipped with the following three types of output jack for connection to a TV. HDMI OUT, COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO. Select the proper connection according to the input signal format supported by your TV. HDMI ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO jacks HDMI OUT jack (MONITOR OUT) FM HDMI 2 HDMI input COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR PR HDMI 75ǡ PB PB HDMI VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT ARC HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM TV (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 2 HDM COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR PR 75ǡ PB OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AV 6 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. • We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation. VIDEO jack (MONITOR OUT) ■ Connecting a component video monitor This unit will receive HDMI, component, or video signals in the same format as transmitted by the output devices. For example, these three output devices must be connected to the TV by matching input/output jacks and cables, and then you must change the TV’s input mode to the proper setting. Connect the component video cable to the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jacks. Component video input COMPONENT VIDEO ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM GND AM PR Input Output HDMI HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO TV HDMI input 75ǡ PB PR PR PB PR HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y Y R OUT TV Component video input OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 Video input En 15 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Connecting a video monitor When using other TVs Connect the video pin cable to the VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack. To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect its AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 jacks to the TV’s audio output jacks. Depending on the connection on TV, connect the TV’s audio output to the AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2. ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 2 Video input COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR PR TV audio output Connection Optical digital audio output Connect to the OPTICAL jack of the AV1 or AV4 with a digital audio pin cable. Coaxial digital audio output Connect to the COAXIAL jack of the AV2 or AV3 with a fiber-optic cable. Analog stereo output Connect to one of the AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, or V-AUX with a stereo pin cable. VIDEO 75ǡ PB V PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITO V OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 TV AUDIO 2 ■ Listening to TV audio Select the input source connected via TV’s audio output jack to enjoy the TV sound. If the TV supports optical digital audio output, we recommend that you connect the TV audio output to the receiver’s AV4 jack. Connecting to AV4 allows you to switch the input source to AV4 with just a single key operation using the SCENE function (☞p. 29). To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect as followings according to the TV: When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and HDMI Control function When your TV supports both HDMI Control (Ex. Panasonic VIERA Link) and Audio Return Channel functions, audio/video output from the unit to the TV and audio output from the TV to the unit are possible using a single HDMI cable. The input source is switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV, and that makes TV sound control easier to use. For the connections and settings, refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return Channel function” (☞p. 69). Available input jacks Audio output (Optical) ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR PR OPTICAL O 75ǡ PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT TV O OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 When using a TV that supports the HDMI Control functions When using a TV that supports HDMI Control functions (Ex. Panasonic VIERA Link), if HDMI Control functions are enabled on the unit, then input source can be switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV. For the connections and settings, refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 68). You can control your TV using the receiver’s remote control by entering the TV’s remote control code (☞p. 62). En 16 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 d This unit has the following input jacks. Connect them to the appropriate output jacks on the playback devices such as BD/DVD players. AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK Input jack TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING Video input Audio input HDMI1 HDMI HDMI HDMI2 HDMI HDMI HDMI3 HDMI HDMI ■ Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals from a jack other than HDMI This unit can use the AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 input jacks to receive audio signals from other input jacks. For example, if an playback device cannot produce audio signals from an HDMI jack, use the following method to change the audio input. ARC HDMI/Audio (Optical) output ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT HDMI4 HDMI HDMI AV1 Component video Optical digital RADIO OPTION RETURN q VOLUME ENTER DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL PR 75ǡ PB HDMI PB VIDEO VIDEO Y CD SETUP HDMI 2 COMPONENT HDMI VIDEO GND AM PR HDMI TV HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM DIRECT SCENE BD DVD (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK COMPONENT VIDEO TV CH MUTE ENT j AV2 Component video Coaxial digital AV3 Video Coaxial digital AV4 Video Optical digital AV5 Video Analog (Stereo) AV6 Video Analog (Stereo) AUDIO1 — Analog (Stereo) AUDIO2 — Analog (Stereo) VIDEO AUX Video Analog (Stereo) O OPTICAL 1 2 3 4 Connect the device with an HDMI cable to one of the HDMI1-4 jacks. Select the HDMI input (HDMI1-4) that the playback device is connected to for playback. (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AV 6 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 Press jCursor D / E to select the audio input source. HDMI1 VOL. Audio;;;;;;AV1 L SL SW C R SR HDMI VIDEO FM GND AM PR HDMI output OPTICAL Press jCursor C until “Audio In” is displayed, and then press jENTER. FRONT COMPONENT (CD) AV 3 Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J1 HDMI OUT COMPONENT VIDEO COAXIAL AV 2 Use the dInput selector to select the desired HDMI input source. ARC ANTENNA COAXIAL BD/DVD player HDMI DOCK MONITOR OUT O ■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with d Input selector j Cursor C / D / E j ENTER q OPTION Y OPTICAL If you have selected AV1 input audio (optical digital) PR 75ǡ PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y 5 Y MONITOR OUT HDMI HDMI OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 Once you have completed the setup, press qOPTION to close the Option menu. AUDIO OUT J 1 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” (☞p. 44) for details BD/DVD player on the Option menu. En 17 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with component cables Connect the device with a component video cable to one of the AV1-2 input jacks. ■ Component connections to analog audio output devices Component video / Audio output Using optical digital audio output sources Select the AV1 input that the playback device is connected to for playback. COMPONENT VIDEO ARC PR PB AUDIO ARC COMPONENT HDMI 1 ANTENNA PR PR PB PB Y Y HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM Y (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK Component video / Audio (Optical) output GND AM PR 75ǡ PB VIDEO VIDEO (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM PR L Y MONITOR OUT ANTENNA PR HDMI 2 R L GND AM PR PR R PB PB 75ǡ PB Y PB Y OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT OPTICAL Game console O O OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AV 6 AUDIO 1 BD/DVD player Using coaxial digital audio output sources Select the AV2 input that the playback device is connected to for playback. Component video / Audio (Coaxial) output (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA PR FM HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO VOL. Audio;;;AUDIO1 L SL SW C R SR GND AM P PR R PR If you have selected AUDIO1 input audio (Analog stereo) PB 75ǡ P PB B Y You can use the video input from the AV1-2 jacks in combination with the audio input from other AV inputs or AUDIO1-2. When connecting these devices, select the AV input jacks or the AUDIO1-2 jacks as the audio input for AV1 or AV2. Refer to “Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals from a jack other than HDMI” (☞p. 17) for detailed setup guidance. Select the AV input source (AV1-2) that is connected by component video cable to the playback device for playback. AV1 ARC COMPONENT VIDEO AUDIO 2 PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y Y MONITOR OUT COAXIAL C C OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 BD/DVD player En 18 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with video cables Connect the playback device with a video pin cable to one of the AV3-6 input jacks. Using analog stereo audio output sources Select the AV5 or AV6 input that the playback device is connected to for playback. Using optical digital audio output sources Select the AV4 input that the playback device is connected to for playback. ARC Video / Audio output (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM GND AM PR HDMI 1 PB PB HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO AUDIO GND AM PR VIDEO V Y Y PR MONITOR OUT L 75ǡ PB VIDEO L PB VIDEO VIDEO V 75ǡ VIDEO ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO FM V (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK PR VIDEO ARC Video / Audio (Optical) output HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO V Y R R Y OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT OPTICAL OPTICAL AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 O O OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV OUT (CD) AV 5 AV 6 AUDIO 1 BD/DVD player AUDIO 2 BD/DVD player Using coaxial digital audio output sources Select the AV3 input that the playback device is connected to for playback. ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA Video / Audio (Coaxial) output FM HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR PR 75ǡ PB VIDEO PB VIDEO VIDEO V V Y Y MONITOR OUT COAXIAL C C OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 BD/DVD player En 19 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Connecting CD players and other audio devices Using coaxial digital output sources Select the AV input (AV2 or AV3) that the playback device is connected to for playback. Using analog stereo output sources Select the audio input (AUDIO1-2) that the playback device is connected to for playback. ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM FM PR COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR Audio (Coaxial) output PR 75ǡ PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y 75ǡ PB GND AM PR HDMI 2 HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Audio output HDMI 1 ANTENNA ARC DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK Y PB MONITOR OUT VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO Y C COAXIAL Y L C MONITOR OUT L R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) AV 1 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 R OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) (TV) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AV 6 CD player CD player Using optical digital output sources Select the AV input (AV1 or AV4) that the playback device is connected to for playback. We recommend connecting audio devices with an coaxial digital output to the AV3 coaxial digital jack on this unit. This connection allows you to switch to the AV input 3 just by pressing the “CD” SCENE key (☞p. 29). ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR PR 75ǡ PB Audio (Optical) output PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT OPTICAL O O OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL (CD) AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 CD player En 20 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components Connecting video cameras and portable audio players Transmitting input A/V to external components Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect video cameras, video game units, or portable audio devices to the receiver. Select the V-AUX input to use these connected devices. This receiver can transmit selected incoming analog audio/video signals to external components through the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks. You can record these input audio and video signals to VCRs or similar devices, or send them to other TVs or external components. Video / Audio input RADIO VIDEO VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT V PORTABLE VIDEO V L L AUDIO R AUDIO R L AUDIO AUDIO OUT R ARC L (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA Audio output Audio output FM R HDMI 4 FRONT PR 75ǡ PB V Video output HDMI 3 GND AM PR VIDEO HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PB VIDEO VIDEO V Y VCR Y MONITOR OUT L R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 R OPTICAL AV 5 Audio input L AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT AUDIO L R Portable audio player Video cameras • Be sure to turn down the volume when connecting this unit and the other devices. • When external components are connected to both the PORTABLE jack and the AUDIO jacks, the sound output from the PORTABLE jack is transmitted. Audio recorder Using the AV OUT jacks Connect this jacks to the external component’s video input jack and analog audio input jacks. Using the AUDIO OUT jacks Connect this jack to the external component’s analog audio input jacks. HDMI audio/video signals, component video signals, and digital audio signals cannot be transmitted from these jacks. En 21 CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM/AM antennas An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are supplied with this receiver. Connect these antennas properly to their respective jacks. AM loop antenna Position the AM antenna away from the receiver. The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. You can connect either wire to the AM jack or the GND jack. Indoor FM antenna (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA NENT O FM HDMI 2 HDMI 3 COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR 75ǡ ■ Improving FM reception We recommend using an outdoor antenna. For more information, consult the nearest authorized dealer. ■ Improving AM reception Connect this unit to an outdoor antenna with a 5-10 m vinyl-coated wire. Make sure the AM loop antenna is still connected. Connecting the GND jack can reduce noise. Connect the jack to a store-bought ground bar or copper plate with a vinyl-covered wire and bury this new attachment in moist ground. The GND jack is not to be connected to the ground socket of an electrical outlet. PB VIDEO VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT Connecting the AM loop antenna Press and hold Insert Release Assembling the AM loop antenna En 22 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) This unit is equipped with a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) that adjusts the status, size, and volume balance of the speakers in order to provide an optimal sound field. Using YPAO allows you to automatically configure settings for which specialist knowledge is usually needed, such as adjusting speaker output and acoustic parameters to suit your listening room (the room in which this unit is placed). J1 When you use YPAO, a test tone will be output from the speakers for approximately 3 minutes and acoustic measuring will be performed. When using YPAO, be careful of the following. 2 4 Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. Face the head of the YPAO microphone upwards. • The test tone is output at high volume. Please refrain from using this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others nearby. • Please take care that the test tone does not frighten any small children. 1 Place the supplied YPAO microphone at ear height in your listening position. YPAO microphone YPAO MIC INFO Check the following before using YPAO. This unit “MIC ON. YPAO START” appears on the front panel display, and then changes to display the following. J2 • The headphones are removed. Subwoofer • The power is turned on. • Volume is set to approximately half, and the cross-over frequency (if present) is set to maximum. VOLUME When positioning the microphone, we recommend that you use equipment that allows you to adjust the height (such as a tripod) as a microphone stand. When using a tripod, use the tripod screws to fix the microphone in place. MAX Press[SETUP] VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT 3 MIN YPAO MIN Switch this unit on. Continues to the next page MAX Subwoofer examples J 1 : When you have changed the number of speakers or the locations in which they are installed, first use YPAO to adjust the speaker balance. J 2 : To cancel measurement, disconnect the YPAO microphone. En 23 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 5 HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 V-AUX 6 1 [ A ] [ B ] During YPAO, the results of measuring the acoustic characteristics are used to set the equalizer (parametric equalizer) to give a unified sound field. After setting, you can select the characteristics of the sound field in “EQ Type,” as necessary. 2 DOCK TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET If necessary, press qOPTION repeatedly and select the measuring acoustic characteristics in the “EQ Type” setting. J1 TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT Natural (Default) Adjusts all speaker sound to give natural acoustics. Flat Sets uniform characteristics for each speaker. Choose this when all of the speakers used are of the same quality. If the treble range sounds harsh after adjustment, select “Natural” and measure again. SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION RETURN q VOLUME ENTER i j DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Front Sets the characteristics of each speaker to match the front speakers. Choose this when the front speakers are of significantly higher quality than the other speakers. ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER q OPTION This completes preparations. To achieve more accurate results, be careful of the following when measuring. • Measuring will take approximately 3 minutes. Keep the room as quiet as possible during measurement. • Wait in the corner of the listening room during measurement or leave it entirely, to avoid becoming an obstruction between the speakers and the YPAO microphone. 6 Press iSETUP to start measurement. 7 Display during measurement YPAO YPAO VOL. Progress02% The following display appears when measurement finishes without any problems. YPAO SW C SW C R SR VOL. Set>Cancel L SL L SL You can use the following method to cancel measurement results if you want to redo the measuring. Press jCursor C to switch to the following display, the use jCursor D / E to select “Cancel” and press jENTER. After this operation, use the same procedure to carry out YPAO again. VOL. YPAOComplete VOL. Disconnect MIC SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR To cancel the measurement, press jCursor B. To restart the measurement, press jCursor C to change the display, press jCursor D / E to select “Retry” and press jENTER. YPAO Press jENTER to apply the results of measurement. L SL SW C R SR R SR NOTE When a problem occurs, an error message or report appears either during or after measurement. Use the following page as a reference to solve the problem, and carry out YPAO again. 8 Remove the YPAO microphone. YPAO finishes automatically when the YPAO microphone is removed. The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. When you have finished measuring, store the microphone out of direct sunlight, and away from locations that may experience high temperatures, such as on top of AV equipment. J 1 : You can also select “EQ Type” using the cursor keys. Press jCursor B to select “EQ Type,” and you can change the setting using jCursor D / E. En 24 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE ■ When an error message appears RECEIVER SLEEP during measurement HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 Check the content of the message from the “Error message” (☞p. 26) to resolve the problem, and carry out the measurement process again. AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK YPAO TUNER FM INFO E-9:CANCEL AM PRESET TUNING MEMORY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC Error message (example) STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT Check the error code that appears in the display, and carry out YPAO again by performing the following steps. SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION When “E-1,” “E-2,” “E-4” or “E-6” is displayed: VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 VOL. 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE j Cursor C / D / E j ENTER ENT j 1 2 3 4 Press jCursor C once, and then press jCursor E to select “Exit.” Press jENTER to finish YPAO, and switch the unit to standby mode. Check that the speakers are properly connected. Turn on the unit, and then carry out YPAO again. When “E-5,” “E-7,” “E-8” or “E-9” is displayed: 1 2 3 Check that the environment is suitable for accurate measurement. Press jCursor C once to select “Retry.” after measurement Check the content of the message from the “Warning message” (☞p. 27) to resolve the problem. You can confirm the speaker that has the problem when that speaker’s indicator lights up. YPAO Press jENTER to carry out YPAO again. VOL. WARNING(1) SW C L SL R SR Number of messages When “E-10” is displayed: 1 2 3 4 ■ When a warning message appears Press jCursor C once to select “Exit.” NOTE Although you can apply the results of measurement when a warning message appears, doing so will not provide optimal sound. We recommend you resolve the problem and then carry out YPAO again. Press jENTER to finish YPAO. Confirm the warning message: Press jENTER once. Switch the unit to standby mode. YPAO Turn on the unit again, and then carry out YPAO. VOL. W-3:LEVEL Warning message (example) SL SR Speaker that has a problem When multiple warning messages exist: Press jENTER to confirm the warning message and use jCursor D / E to display other warning messages. When applying the results of measurement: If an warning message is displayed, press jENTER to switch display, use jCursor D / E to select “Set,” and press jENTER. When cancelling YPAO: If an warning message is displayed, press jENTER to switch display, use jCursor D / E to select “Cancel,” and press jENTER. En 25 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) ■ Message list ■ Error message E-1:FRONT SP NOTE If the following messages appear, resolve the problems that have occurred and carry out the measurement process again. E-2:SUR. SP ■ When a warning message appears before measurement E-4:SBR->SBL Connect MIC! The YPAO microphone is not connected. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug HP! The headphones are connected. Remove the headphones. Memory Guard! The settings of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” in the Setup menu to “Off” (☞p. 58). E-5:NOISY E-6:CHECK SUR. The unit was not able to find the front channel. Check that the left and right front speakers are connected correctly. The unit was only able to find one of side of the surround channels. Check that the left and right surround speakers are connected correctly. Only one surround back speaker is connected and only the right side surround back channel sound is detected. When only one surround back speaker is connected, connect to the left side terminal on the external amplifier. The noise is too loud, preventing accurate measurements from being taken. Measure again in quiet surroundings. Turn off any devices in the room that may be emitting noise, or place them further away from the YPAO microphone. When this message is displayed, selecting “Proceed” will allow you to continue measuring. However, we recommend resolving the problem and measuring again, as continuing measurement without doing so will not give accurate results. Even though surround left and right speakers are not connected, only the surround back speakers are connected. E-7:NO MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. While measuring, take care not to touch the YPAO microphone. E-8:NO SIGNAL The YPAO microphone could not distinguish a test tone. Check that the YPAO microphone has been installed correctly. Check that each speaker has been connected and installed correctly. The YPAO microphone or the YPAO MIC jack may be broken. Inquire at the retailer where you purchased this unit, or the nearest Yamaha service center. E-9:CANCEL You have carried out an operation that has cancelled the measuring process. Carry out the measuring process again. Do not operate this unit by, for example, adjusting the volume. E-10:INTERNAL An internal error has occurred. Carry out the measuring process again. Contact a Yamaha service center if “E-10” appears again. When using surround back speakers, connection of the surround left/right speakers is necessary. En 26 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) ■ Warning message W-1:PHASE The speakers displayed are connected with the opposite polarity. Depending on the type of speakers you are using and the environment in which you have them installed, this message may occur even if the speakers are connected correctly. Depending on the type of speakers, “W-1” may display even if the speakers are connected correctly. W-2:DISTANCE The speakers displayed are separated from the listening position by more than 24 m, and cannot be adjusted correctly. Install the speakers with 24 m of the listening point. W-3:LEVEL The difference each channel is too loud or too low, and cannot be adjusted correctly. Check that all speakers are installed in the same surroundings. Check that the speaker polarity + (positive), and - (negative) are correct. If these are connected correctly, you can use the speakers normally even this message appears. Check that the speaker polarity + (positive), and - (negative) are correct. We recommend the same speakers or speakers with as similar specifications as possible. Adjust the volume of the subwoofer. If “W-2” or “W-3” appears, you can apply measurement results, but they will not give optimal results. We recommend that you resolve the problem and carry out the measurement process again. En 27 PLAYBACK CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Basic playback procedure RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK d TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC 1 2 Turn on external components (TV, DVD player, etc.) connected to this unit. Turn on this unit and select the input source using dInput selector. The name of the selected input source is displayed for a few seconds. J1 TUNING Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control) You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired tone. 2 Press PROGRAM l / h to adjust the output level in those frequency ranges. Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Adjustment increments 2.0 dB ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT 3 SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION ENTER RETURN Play the external component that you have selected as the source input, or select a radio station on the tuner. VOLUME r Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the external component for details on playback. MUTE s For details on the following operations, refer to the corresponding pages: DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be set separately. Set the headphone tone control with the headphones connected. 1 The display returns to the previous display soon after you release the key. If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well. Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.” TONE CONTROL REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 • “FM/AM tuning” (☞p. 34) • “Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™” (☞p. 39) • “Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components” (☞p. 42) ENT YPAO MIC INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 4 Press rVOLUME +/- to adjust the volume. PHONES TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA PROGRAM l / h To mute the output. d Input selector r VOLUME +/s MUTE INPUT Press sMUTE to mute the audio output. Press sMUTE again to unmute. The current setting is displayed on the front panel display. TONE Treble VOL. 0.0dB L SL SW C R SR J 1 : You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel display as necessary (☞p. 57). En 28 PLAYBACK Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP This unit has a SCENE function that allows you switch this unit on and change input sources and sound field programs with one key. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY Four scenes are available for different uses, such as d playing movies or music. The following input sources and sound field programs are provided as the initial factory settings. SCENE Input Sound field program BD/DVD HDMI1 Straight TV AV4 Straight CD AV3 Straight RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT g SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION 1 2 Use dInput selector to select the input source you want to register. Use the gSound selection keys to select the sound field program you want to register. 3 Press the hSCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front panel display. SCENE1 VOL. SET Complete L SL SW C R SR Release the key when “SET Complete” is displayed When changing “SCENE,” also change the external component that the remote control operates (☞p. 62). VOLUME ENTER RETURN h Registering input sources/sound field program DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE d Input selector g Sound selection keys h SCENE Enjoying sound field programs This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel playback for almost any sound source using various sound field programs stored on the chip, and a range of sound decoders. Selecting sound field programs and sound decoders This unit offers sound field settings (sound field programs) in many different categories suitable for movies, music and other uses. Choose a sound field program that sounds best with the source you are playing back, rather than relying on the name or explanation of the program. • Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input source is applied again. • When you playback DTS Express sources or audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decoding mode (☞p. 30) is automatically selected. • When you playback DTS-HD sources with CINEMA DSP, the DTS decoder is automatically selected. Continues to the next page En 29 PLAYBACK Enjoying sound field programs CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK TUNER INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE TV CD SETUP Press gSTEREO repeatedly Use straight decoding mode when you want to playback sound without sound field processing. You can playback as follows in straight decoding mode. Selects compressed music enhancer: 2-channel sources such as CD Press gSTEREO repeatedly Stereo sound plays through the front left and right speakers. Selects stereo reproduction: Selects surround decoder: Press gSUR. DECODE repeatedly g Switches Straight decoding mode: Press gSTRAIGHT Switches Direct mode (☞p. 31): Select “2ch Stereo” from the surround field programs when you want to playback 2-channel stereo sound (from the front speakers only), regardless of the playback source. Selecting “2ch Stereo” will playback as follows for the playback of CD and BD/DVD sources. 2-channel sources such as CD Multi-channel playback sources such as BD/ DVD RADIO OPTION ■ Enjoying stereo playback (Straight decoding mode) AM PRESET BD DVD MOVIE category: Press gMOVIE repeatedly MUSIC category: Press gMUSIC repeatedly 4 AUDIO FM ■ Enjoying unprocessed playback Selects sound field program: Stereo sound plays back through the front speakers. Multi-channel sources such as BD/DVD Plays back audio from a playback source without applying sound field effects, using an appropriate decoder to split the signal into multiple channels. Playback channels other than the front channels in the playback source are mixed with the front channels and played back through the front speakers. Press gSTRAIGHT to enable the straight decoding mode. Press gSTEREO repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo.” Press gDIRECT VOLUME ENTER Sound field program categories RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE MOVIE VOL. Sci-Fi REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 L SL R SR Program 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE STEREO VOL. SW C • You can use the speaker indicators on the front panel display to check what speakers are currently outputting sound (☞p. 7). • You can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters) for each of the programs. Straight L SL SW C R SR Sci-Fi SW 2ch Stereo R L To disable stereo playback, press any of the gSound selection keys to select a sound field program other than “2ch Stereo.” To disable straight decoding mode, press gSTRAIGHT again. MOVIE VOL. VOL. L SL SW C R SR MUSIC VOL. Hall in Vienna L SL SW C R SR Previously selected program g Sound selection keys g MOVIE g MUSIC g STEREO g SUR. DECODE g STRAIGHT g DIRECT En 30 PLAYBACK Enjoying sound field programs CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE ■ Enjoying sound field programs RECEIVER SLEEP without surround sound speakers HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 This unit allows you to use virtual surround speakers to enjoy sound field surround effects, even without any surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP mode). You can even enjoy surround sound presence with just a minimal configuration of the front speakers only. This unit will switch to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode automatically when surround speakers are unavailable. J1 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ■ Enjoying sound field programs with headphones Even when headphones are connected, you can enjoy the reproduction sound field presence with ease (SILENT CINEMA mode). J2 ■ Enjoying Hi-Fi Sound Quality (Direct mode) Use Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity sound of the selected source. When direct mode is enabled, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. J3 ENT Press gDIRECT to turn direct mode on. J4 TV INPUT TV VOL g TV CH MUTE VOL. Direct g DIRECT L R To disable direct mode, press gDIRECT again. J 1 : However, Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is not available in the following conditions: • When headphones are connected to this unit. • When a “7ch Stereo” sound field program is selected. • When direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected. J 2 : However, SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions: • When a “7ch Stereo” sound field program is selected. • When direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected. J 3 : The following features are disabled in direct mode. • sound field program, tone control • display and operation of the Option menu and Setup menu J 4 : While direct mode is on, the front panel display screen becomes dim in order to reduce noise. When turning Direct mode off, the brightness of the screen returns to the previous setting. En 31 PLAYBACK Enjoying sound field programs Sound field programs Action Game This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment that makes the listener feel as if they are right there by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. Roleplaying Game This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. in the table indicates the sound field program for CINEMA DSP. ■ Category: MOVIE Sound field programs optimized for viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, and games. Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range providing everything from very small sound effects to large, impressive sounds. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimal space to offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium. ■ Category: MUSIC This sound field is suitable when listening to music sources such as CDs. Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. En 32 PLAYBACK Enjoying sound field programs ■ Category: STEREO Suitable for listening to stereo sources. 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2-channels. When multi-channel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2-channels and output from the front left and right speakers. 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback multi-channel sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2-channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. ■ Category: ENHNCR (Compressed music enhancer) Suitable for listening to compressed audio, such as MP3. Straight Enhancer Use this program to restore the original depth and dynamics of 2-channel or multi-channel to compression audio. 7ch Enhancer Use this program to playback compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo. ■ Category: SUR.DEC (Surround decode mode) Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sound sources in up to 7-channels using a surround decoder. q Pro Logic Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of sound sources. q PLIIx Movie / q PLII Movie Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for movies. J1 q PLIIx Music / q PLII Music Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for music. J1 q PLIIx Game / q PLII Game Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for games. J1 Neo:6 Cinema Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for music. J 1 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions: • When the “Sur. B” setting in “Speaker Setup” of the Setup menu is set to “None.” • When headphones are connected. En 33 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 When using the FM/AM tuner, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antenna connected to this unit to get the best reception. AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK d TUNER e FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP (Asia and General models only) The factory pre-set FM/AM tuner frequency steps are 9 kHz for AM and 50 kHz for FM. Carry out the following settings and select the frequency steps suitable for your listening environment. RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE 1 2 REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Switch this unit to the standby mode. Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel. Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on the front panel display. After approximately a few seconds, the top menu items are displayed. J1 ENT STRAIGHT INPUT TV VOL Press PROGRAM h repeatedly to display “TU.” TU-AM9/FM50 4 5 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a frequency steps. TV CH MUTE YPAO MIC INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM 1 2 Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. Press eFM or eAM to select a band to receive. VOL. Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then switch it on again. The power turns on, with the settings you made configured. A TV 3 Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning) FM87.50MHz L SL SW C R SR Continues to the next page The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two modes for tuning. Normal tuning You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching or specifying its frequency. Preset tuning (☞p. 35) You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by registering them to specific numbers, and later just select those numbers to tune in. SCENE BD DVD d TUNER e FM e AM PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA FM/AM tuner frequencies will differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. This explanation uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. PROGRAM l / h J 1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)” (☞p. 65) for details on the Advanced Setup menu. En 34 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 3 HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK AV AUDIO TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT Use eTUNING H / I to set a frequency to receive. eTUNING H Increases the frequency. Press and hold this key for longer than a second to search automatically for a station d on a higher frequency than the current one. J1 e eTUNING I Decreases the frequency. Press and hold this key for longer than a second to search automatically for a station on a lower frequency than the current one. J1 SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN q Lights up when receiving a broadcast from a station Lights up when receiving a stereo broadcast POP-UP MENU FM98.50MHz MUTE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ENT TV INPUT TV CH l Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J3 Use jCursor B / C to select “FM Mode.” OPTION VOL. L SL SW C In normal tuning mode, use the lNumeric keys on the remote control to enter a frequency. Leave the decimal point out when entering a number. J2 For example, enter as follows to select a station on 98.50MHz. VOL. Registering and recalling a frequency (Preset tuning) You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations as preset stations. There are two methods of presetting stations, “Auto Preset” and “Manual Preset.” Use one of these methods to register stations. ■ Presetting FM stations automatically (Auto Preset) The tuner detects FM stations with strong signals and registers up to 40 automatically. AM stations cannot be automatically registered. Use manual station preset (☞p. 36). FMMode R SR ■ Entering a frequency number TV VOL 1 2 3 STEREO TUNED REC 10 When you are receiving an FM broadcast and cannot obtain a stable stereo broadcast, you can force this unit to receive in a monaural mode. STEREO TUNED j DISPLAY TOP MENU ■ When signal reception is poor 4 Press jENTER and use jCursor D / E to select “Mono.” 9850 VOL. FMMode:Mono 1 2 3 Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J3 Use jCursor B / C to select “Auto Preset.” MUTE 9 8 5 5 When setting is completed, press qOPTION to close the Option menu. To return this unit to its original settings, use the same procedure and select “Stereo” in step 4. d TUNER e TUNING H / I j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER l Numeric keys q OPTION OPTION VOL. Auto Preset L SL SW C R SR Continues to the next page J 1 : When searching for a station, release the key once the search has started. J 2 : “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the frequency entered is correct. J 3 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” (☞p. 44) for details on the Option menu. En 35 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 4 HDMI 1 2 3 4 4 AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING AUDIO TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC e Press jENTER, then press ePRESET F / G or jCursor B / C to choose the present number from which to start the Auto Preset function. Auto Preset will begin approximately 5 seconds after you select a preset number. If you do not select a preset number, Auto Preset will begin approximately 5 seconds after “READY” is displayed. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT Selecting a preset number DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP Status RADIO OPTION RETURN READY VOLUME ENTER Frequency j L SL SW C R SR DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE ■ Designating a preset number for registration (Manual Preset) Select stations manually and register them as presets individually. 1 2 Tune in to the station you want to register, referring to “Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning)” (☞p. 34). Preset number Press eMEMORY for 3 seconds or longer. The station will be registered automatically to the lowest open preset number (or the next number after the one registered most recently). MEMORY To cancel registration, press jRETURN. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL Preset number The newly registered frequency VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:Empty REC 1 Press eMEMORY once, to display “Manual Preset” on the front panel display. After a small wait, the preset number that the station has been registered to will appear. 9850 Use one of the following methods to register the station you are currently receiving. ■ Registering to a preset number to which no station is registered VOL. 01:FM87.50MHz ■ Registering stations manually Blinks L SL SW C R SR Empty, or the frequency registered most previously Press ePRESET F / G to select the preset to register the station to, and then press eMEMORY to register. To cancel registration, press jRETURN or do not operate the remote control for about 30 seconds. VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz L SL SW C R SR During Auto Preset ENT Search Preset for stations SEARCH MEMORY Registered frequencies TV CH MUTE e MEMORY e PRESET F / G j Cursor B / C j ENTER j RETURN When Auto Preset is complete FINISH Auto Preset VOL. L SL SW C R SR The Option menu closes automatically when presetting is complete. J1 J 1 : The preset with the lowest preset number will be selected automatically immediately after presetting. En 36 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Recalling a preset station RECEIVER SLEEP Clearing preset stations Radio Data System tuning (U.K. and Europe models only) HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 You can call preset stations registered by automatic station preset or manual station preset. J1 AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING To select a registered station, press ePRESET d F / G to select the preset number of the station. J2 e ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RETURN POP-UP MENU Use jCursor B / C to display “Clear Preset” and press jENTER. CLEAR j ■ Displaying the Radio Data System You can display the 4 types of the Radio Data System information: “Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text,” “Clock Time.” VOL. L SL SW C R SR MUTE Blinks REC Registered frequencies Press jRETURN to cancel the operation. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 l ENT 4 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such as “Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text,” “Clock Time” when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations. information 01:FM98.50MHz DISPLAY TOP MENU Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J3 q VOLUME ENTER Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. The number of the preset to be cleared RADIO OPTION 1 2 3 Use jCursor B / C to select the preset number you want to clear, and press jENTER to clear it. 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. We recommend that you use the automatic preset tuning to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (☞p. 35). Continues to the next page Repeat this operation to clear the registration of multiple numbers. d TUNER e PRESET F / G j Cursor B / C j ENTER j RETURN l Numeric keys q OPTION 5 J 1 : Preset numbers to which no stations are registered will be skipped. “No Presets” is displayed when there are no stations are registered. Press qOPTION to finish this operation. J 2 : To select a station by selecting a preset number, use the lNumeric keys to enter the preset number of the station you J 3 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” (☞p. 44) for details on the Option menu. want to listen. When an invalid number is entered, “Wrong Num.” appears on the front panel display. Check that you have entered the correct number. En 37 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 2 HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK AV Press fINFO repeatedly until the desired information is displayed. ProgramService FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET ProgramType VOL. STEREO TUNED CLASSICS L SL SW C R SR READY VOL. TrafficProgram RadioText L SL SW C R SR TUNING f MUSIC (Frequency display) ClockTime STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT AudioDecoder DSPProgram SCENE TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION POP-UP MENU j Type of information Program Service DISPLAY TOP MENU Contents of information are as follows. q VOLUME ENTER MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV CH d TUNER f INFO j Cursor B / C j ENTER j RETURN q OPTION Displays the name of the Radio Data System program service currently being received. Displays the type of the Radio Data System program currently being received. Radio Text Displays the information on the Radio Data System program currently being received. Clock Time Displays the current time. DSP Program Displays the currently selected sound field program. ENT TV MUTE Description Program Type INPUT TV VOL Press jENTER to start the search function. Program Type ENHANCER SUR. DECODE RETURN 4 Status 10800 d TUNER BD DVD Frequency Information on the display changes as you press the key. The kind of information is displayed for a while and then the information is displayed. J1 AUDIO MOVIE Front panel display (When “Program Type” selected) Audio Decoder “Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Type” do not appear when the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. ■ Automatic traffic information reception (U.K. and Europe models only) When the tuner is active, this unit can automatically search for and receive transmissions from traffic information broadcast stations. To start this function: 1 2 Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. When a traffic station is found, it will appear on the display and the Option menu will close. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J2 OPTION 3 L SL SW C R SR L SL SW C R SR Traffic information broadcast station (Frequency) If the receiver cannot find a traffic station, “TP Not Found” will appear on the display, and the Option menu will shortly close. VOL. TrafficProgram Type, Radio Text, or Clock Time is displayed. That shows this unit is receiving data (or stopping receiving data). If the data is receivable, the corresponding information is displayed after a while. VOL. STEREO TUNED TPFM101.30MHz Use jCursor B / C to select “TrafficProgram.” OPTION J 1 : “PTY Wait,” “RT Wait,” or “CT Wait” may appear when Program FINISH VOL. VolumeTrim Displays the currently selected surround decoder. • The transmission search will begin in approximately 5 seconds. Or, when the status indicator reads “READY,” you can begin the search immediately by pressing jENTER. • By pressing jRETURN right before or during a search, it will return to the Option menu. • When the status is “READY,” use jCursor B / C to start a search in the specified direction. jCursor B: Searches upward from the current frequency. jCursor C: Searches downward from the current frequency. L SL SW C R SR J 2 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” (☞p. 44) for details on the Option menu. En 38 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP Once you have connected a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-12, sold separately) to this unit, you can enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone using the remote control supplied with this unit. When playing back from an iPod/iPhone, you can also use the compressed music enhancer sound field programs (☞p. 33) to give compressed audio formats such as MP3 a sharper, more dynamic sound. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC d • • • • iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, iPod mini, iPhone, iPhone 3G, and iPhone 3GS are supported (As of March 2010). When connecting an iPhone, please use a YDS-12. Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. Some functions may not be available for some Yamaha iPod universal dock models. This explanation focuses on the YDS-12. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to the operating instructions of the iPod universal dock for information on how to connect your iPod/iPhone. Switch this unit on and place your iPod/iPhone in the dock. The unit is now ready for playback. DOCK VOL. iPodconnected L SL SW C R SR CAUTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode before connecting an iPod universal dock. DOCK COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB 9 0 10 VIDEO ENT Y TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™ After setting your iPod/iPhone in your dock, just press dDOCK to switch to DOCK input to play your iPod/ iPhone. The iPod/iPhone can be operated in the following two ways. Simple play mode: Plays audio and video through this unit while viewing the menu displayed on the iPod/iPhone screen. Menu browse mode: Plays the iPod/iPhone while viewing the menu displayed on the front panel display. MUTE OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 (CD) d DOCK Yamaha iPod universal dock En 39 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Use the following remote control keys to operate (playback, stop, skip, etc.) your iPod/iPhone. You can check song information on the iPod/iPhone screen. J1 RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING d dDOCK Switch to the DOCK (iPod) input. jCursor B / C Move the cursor up and down to different fields. jCursor D / E Return to the previous menu or enter the menu you have selected. TUNER FM INFO AM f MEMORY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC jENTER Enter the selected menu. kDISPLAY Switches between simple play mode or menu browse mode. kw Searches backwards while held down. kf Searches forwards while held down. kb Skip to the beginning of the currently playing song. Pressing repeatedly skips one song backwards with each press. ka Skip to the beginning of the next song. ks Stops playback. ke Switches between playback and pause. kp Switches between playback and pause. DIRECT SCENE TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN Press kDISPLAY on the remote control to change between menu browse mode and simple remote mode, as required. 4 Select iPod/iPhone menu items using jCursor B / C / D / E, and press jENTER to play. J3 When you select menu browse mode, the front panel display changes as follows. DOCK Music VOL. L SL SW C R SR STEREO STRAIGHT BD DVD 2 DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU j k MUTE REC k 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT • Information on the iPod/iPhone can only be displayed in alphanumeric characters. “_” (underscore) is displayed for characters that this unit cannot display. • When displaying play information in menu browse mode, song information (Artist, Album, Song) is displayed on the front panel. Change the displayed information by pressing fINFO repeatedly. • (Except iPod touch and iPhone) In menu browse mode, the “Yamaha Mark” will be displayed on the iPod/iPhone screen. You cannot directly control your iPod/iPhone while this mark is displayed. TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE d DOCK f INFO j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER k DISPLAY ks ke kp kw kf kb ka 1 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. J 1 : Controls on the iPod/iPhone can also be operated in simple playback mode. J 2 : Videos will not be displayed when your iPod or Yamaha iPod universal dock do not support the browser function for browsing video files. 3 Press jCursor B / C to select the content (music or video) that you want to play, and press jCursor E. J2 J 3 : When watching the video contents of iPod/iPhone, connect the VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack on this unit to the VIDEO input jack on the TV with a video pin cable (☞p. 16). En 40 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE ■ Shuffle/Repeat playback RECEIVER SLEEP You can use special playback functions such as shuffle playback and repeat playback by first displaying the Option menu. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING d TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN q DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU j k MUTE 1 2 3 4 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Press kDISPLAY to switch to menu browse mode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Shuffle Off Does not play back songs or albums in random order. Songs Plays “Songs” back in random order. Albums Plays “Albums” back in random order. Repeat Plays songs or albums repeatedly. d DOCK j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER k DISPLAY q OPTION Playback of the iPod/iPhone starts using the function selected in step 5. ■ To charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode TV CH MUTE Play the iPod/iPhone. Press jCursor B / C to select the desired playback function, “Shuffle” or “Repeat,” then press jENTER. INPUT TV VOL To close the Option menu, press qOPTION. To disable Shuffle/Repeat playback, redo the above steps, and return settings to “Off.” ENT TV Press jCursor D / E to select the desired playback function. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J1 Plays back songs or albums in random order. REC 5 6 7 Off Does not play back songs or albums repeatedly. One Plays a “Song” back repeatedly. All When all “Songs” have completed playback, returns to the start and repeats playback. If you connect an iPod/iPhone to the iPod universal dock the iPod/iPhone will always charge when this unit is turned on. This unit can charge an iPod/iPhone even when in standby mode (iPod Standby Charge function). Check the HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator on the front panel of this unit to check whether this unit is charging an iPod/iPhone during in standby mode. While charging an iPod/iPhone, the HDMI Through/ iPod Charge indicator lights. When Standby Through function is off, the indicator goes out after the charging is complete. 1 2 3 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. Use jCursor B / C to display “Standby Charge” and press jENTER. OPTION VOL. StandbyCharge 4 R SR Use jCursor D / E to switch the setting to “Off.” DOCK VOL. Charge;;;;;Off 5 SW C L SL SW C L SL R SR When setting is completed, press qOPTION to close the Option menu. To enable the Standby Charge function again, carry out this procedure again and change the “Standby Charge” setting back to “Auto.” If necessary, you can also disable the iPod Standby Charge function. J 1 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” (☞p. 44) for details on the Option menu. En 41 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as the YBA-10, sold separately) to this unit and enjoy wireless playback from Bluetooth-compatible portable music players. J1 HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING NOTE d TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY e ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT When playing back from a Bluetooth component for the first time, you must first pair the devices (register the Bluetooth components). When establishing a wireless connection you must carry out pairing on both this unit and on the Bluetooth component. Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver Pairing Bluetooth™ components SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the q DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection will be j complete when this unit is turned on. Be sure to carry out pairing when connecting a Bluetooth component for the first time, or when settings have been deleted. Refer to the operating instructions of your Bluetooth component as necessary when carrying out pairing. DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When the ninth device is paired, the pairing settings for the device which has not been used for the longest period of time will be deleted. MUTE REC DOCK COMPONENT VIDEO 1 2 3 4 PR 5 6 7 8 PB 9 0 10 ENT Y VIDEO TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 (CD) d DOCK e MEMORY j Cursor B / C j ENTER j RETURN q OPTION Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver CAUTION To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode before connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. 1 2 3 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair with and set it to pairing mode. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu and use jCursor B / C to select “Pairing.” OPTION Pairing 4 Press jENTER to start pairing. DOCK VOL. Searching... L SL SW C R SR • To cancel pairing, press jRETURN. • You can also press and hold eMEMORY on the front panel to begin pairing. 5 Make sure the Bluetooth component recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. When the device is recognized, it will appear in the Bluetooth component list, for example as “YBA-10 YAMAHA.” Continues to the next page VOL. L SL SW C R SR J 1 : This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile. En 42 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 6 HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK d FM AM MEMORY DOCK PRESET MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT 7 DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP BTconnected L SL SW C VOLUME ENTER RETURN q DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH ENT VOL. L SL SW C R SR R SR To finish pairing, press jRETURN. RADIO OPTION When wireless connection is complete VOL. Completed TUNING Use jCursor B / C to select “Connect” and press jENTER. J2 DOCK ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE 3 When pairing occurs correctly TUNER INFO Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the Bluetooth component list, and enter a pass key “0000” into the Bluetooth component. J1 Using Bluetooth™ components j When pairing is complete, carry out the following procedure to achieve a wireless connection between this unit and the Bluetooth component. When the wireless connection is complete, you playback from Bluetooth components. Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless connection is established automatically or by operating the Bluetooth components. In that case, it is not necessary to carry out the following procedure. “Not found” is displayed when there is an error connecting. Check that the following conditions have been satisfied, and try to establish a wireless connection again. • Both this unit and the Bluetooth component are paired. • The Bluetooth component is switched on. • The Bluetooth component is within 10 meters/32 feet of the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. 4 Operate the Bluetooth component for playback. To disconnect a wireless connection, repeat the same steps, and in step 3, select “Disconnect.” MUTE d DOCK j Cursor B / C j ENTER j RETURN q OPTION 1 2 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J 1 : Depending on Bluetooth components, wireless connection is carried out right after the pairing. In this case, “BT connected” is displayed instead of “Completed.” J 2 : “Disconnect” is displayed when a Bluetooth component has been connected. En 43 SETUP CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 4 This receiver has a unique option menu specific for each type of input source, such as volume trim for compatible input sources, audio/video data display for signals from playback devices, and other frequently used menu items. AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING AUDIO d Option menu display and setup 4 TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC 1 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION q VOLUME ENTER RETURN 2 j POP-UP MENU The Option menu appears for the desired input source. Option menu OPTION MUTE VolumeTrim REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 3 Option menu items The following menu items are provided for each input source. HDMI1-4 Press qOPTION. DISPLAY TOP MENU Parameters of the selected item are displayed. The parameters you can set differ depending on the menu items. DIRECT SCENE BD DVD Use the dInput selector on the remote control to select the Option menu you want to display. Select the desired menu item (or enable a function) using jCursor B / C / D / E and jENTER. • You can also use jRETURN to return to the previous screen or close the Option menu. • Certain selected menu items may automatically close the Option menu when their functions are carried out. VOL. AV1-2 AV3-4 L SL SW C R SR Select the desired control/setup item using jCursor B / C and press jENTER. The displayed Option menu items differ depending on the input source. For details, read the following Option menu items section. 5 To close the Option menu, press qOPTION. For a few seconds after closing the Option menu, the remote control keys may not function. If this occurs, reselect the input source. Decoder Mode EXTD Surround Audio In Signal Info Volume Trim Decoder Mode Audio In Signal Info Volume Trim Decoder Mode EXTD Surround Auto Preset EXTD Surround Signal Info AV5-6 Volume Trim AUDIO1-2 Volume Trim V-AUX Volume Trim TUNER Volume Trim FM Mode Clear Preset TrafficProgram J1 Volume Trim Shuffle Repeat Connect/ Disconnect Pairing iPod (DOCK) d Input selector j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER j RETURN q OPTION Volume Trim Bluetooth (DOCK) Standby Charge Volume Trim J 1 : U.K. and Europe models only. En 44 SETUP Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) ■ Adjusting volume between input sources Volume Trim Input source: ■ Selecting the 5.1-channel signal playback method EXTD Surround All Reduces any change in volume when switching between input sources by correcting volume differences in each input source. You can adjust this parameter for each input source. Adjustable range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB Default setting 0.0 dB Adjustment increments 0.5 dB steps Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1 Selects whether to reproduce 5.1-channel input signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back speakers are used. J2 Auto (Default) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if a flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. q PLIIx Movie Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when two surround back speakers are connected. q PLIIx Music Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when one or two surround back speakers are connected. EX/ES Automatically selects the most suitable decoder for input signals whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1-channel. Off Always reproduces original channels whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present. ■ Setting the format of digital audio signals Decoder Mode Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1 Sets the format of digital audio to playback to DTS. For example, if the format is not automatically detected correctly even during playback of DTS format audio, this menu item can be used to set the playback format to DTS. Auto (Default) The audio format is automatically selected to match the format of the input audio. DTS Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not reproduced. J 1 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when the “Audio Return Channel” function is on, and the source is used for the TV audio input (TVAudio). J 2 : This feature is available when connecting the surround back speakers via an external amplifier connected to the PRE OUT jacks on this unit. En 45 SETUP Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) ■ Combining HDMI/AV1-2 input source video and audio Audio In Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-2 Combines video from HDMI or AV input sources with analog/ digital audio inputs in situations such as: – an playback device is connected with an HDMI cable but cannot transmit audio through HDMI – an playback device with component video output and analog audio output (such as certain game consoles) are connected to the system • For details of settings, refer to “Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals from a jack other than HDMI” (☞p. 17) and “Component connections to analog audio output devices” (☞p. 18). • To return audio inputs to their previous settings, display this item again, and select the original input jack. HDMI1 Audio;;;;;;AV1 L SL SW C R SR Assignable audio input jacks To change assignments, select an input source (HDMI1-4 or AV1-2) as the video input first, and then select audio input jacks in this menu. Set as follows according on the desired combination of audio input jacks. Audio inputs Settings method Optical digital audio input Select AV1 or AV4. Connect the external component audio cable to the optical digital jack for the selected input. Coaxial digital audio input Select AV2 or AV3. Connect the external component audio cable to the coaxial digital jack for the selected input. Analog audio input Select one of AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2. Connect the external component audio cable to the audio jack for the selected input. Format of audio signals. CHAN The number of input signal channels (front/surround/ LFE). For example, if input signal channels are 3 front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE, “3/2/0.1” is displayed. If a channel that cannot be expressed as the above, a total number of channels such as “5.1ch” may be displayed. SAMPL The sampling frequency of analog-to-digital conversion. B RATE The bit rate of input signal per second. signals Signal Info HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1 Displays information on digital audio and video signals on the front panel display. VOL. FORMAT ■ Displaying information on audio/video Input source: Inputs that change the audio source Audio information Menu item FORMAT VOL. DolbyD Information L SL SW C R SR Video information V IN Format and resolution of video input signal. V OUT Format and resolution of video output signal. V.MSG (appears only when an error has occurred) Error messages about HDMI signals and components. Error message HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed. Device Over The number of connected HDMI components is over the limit. • “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are being received, and “---” is displayed if this unit cannot recognize the incoming signal. • The bit rate may vary during playback. J 1 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when the “Audio Return Channel” function is on, and the source is used for the TV audio input (TVAudio). En 46 SETUP Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) ■ Changing FM mode (Stereo/Monaural) FM Mode Input source: ■ Shuffle playback with iPod/iPhone Shuffle TUNER Sets this unit to automatically match FM broadcast frequencies in stereo, or to convert the frequency to monaural (☞p. 35). ■ Automatically presetting FM radio stations Auto Preset Input source: DOCK (iPod) Changes the shuffle playback style on iPod (☞p. 41). ■ Repeat playback with iPod/iPhone Repeat Input source: DOCK (iPod) Changes the repeat playback style on iPod (☞p. 41). Input source: TUNER Automatically detects radio stations in the FM frequency and registers them as preset stations (☞p. 35). ■ Clearing preset FM stations Clear Preset Input source: TUNER Clears the preset stations (☞p. 37). ■ Searching for traffic information (U.K. and Europe models only) TrafficProgram Input source: TUNER Automatically searches for traffic information with the Radio Data System (☞p. 38). ■ Connect / Disconnect Bluetooth component Connect Disconnect Input source: DOCK (Bluetooth) Switches communication with a Bluetooth component on and off (☞p. 43). ■ Pairing Bluetooth component Pairing Input source: DOCK (Bluetooth) Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component (☞p. 42). ■ Charging an iPod™/iPhone™ in standby mode Standby Charge Input source: DOCK (iPod) Charges an iPod/iPhone stationed in the iPod universal dock while the receiver is in standby mode (☞p. 41). En 47 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP You can configure various function settings of this unit using the Setup menu. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 Setup menu display and settings AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK 1 TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING STEREO STRAIGHT BD DVD TV CD RADIO i VOLUME ENTER RETURN j Speaker Setup DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV Set functions related to HDMI, such as HDMI Control functions. Func. Setup Sets functions such as changing input names and auto power down that make the unit easier to use. DSP Parameter Edit sound field programs. Memory Guard Protects settings against accidental alteration. TV CH i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER j RETURN Set parameters for speakers, such as speaker status, and volume adjustment for each speaker. HDMI Setup MUTE 2 L SL SW C R SR R SR Set functions related to audio output, such as adjustment of maximum volume and of dynamic range. INPUT TV VOL L SL SW C Sound Setup REC VOL. IniVol;;;;;Off VOL. Setup menu categories OPTION Use jCursor B / C to navigate the submenus to find the desired setting and press jENTER. SOUND ;SpeakerSetup DIRECT SCENE SETUP Press iSETUP on the remote control. SETUP ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 3 4 5 When multiple menu item is displayed, use jCursor B / C to select the desired item. 6 Press iSETUP to exit the Setup menu. Use jCursor D / E to change the setting. You can return to the previous screen by pressing jRETURN. You can change other items by repeating step 4 and 5. For a few seconds after closing the Setup menu, the remote control keys may not function. If this occurs, reselect the input source. Use the jCursor B / C to select the desired menu and press jENTER. SOUND ;Lipsync VOL. L SL SW C R SR Ex: Sound Setup menu En 48 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) Setup menu items ■ Manual speaker setup Manages settings for speakers Config Setup menu Speaker Setup Config Level Distance Equalizer Test Tone Sound Setup Lipsync Adaptive DRC D.Range Max Volume Init Volume HDMI Setup Control TVAudio J1 ReturnChan J1 Standby J1 Audio Subwoofer Front Center Sur. LR Sur.B Crossover SWFR Phase Extra Bass (speakers) (unit and speakers) (speakers and frequency bands) HDMI Auto Auto Manual Func. Setup Input Rename AutoPowerDown Dimmer DSP Parameter SETUP Adjusts the output characteristics of the speakers based on manually set parameters. VOL. ;SpeakerSetup L SL SW C R SR Speaker Setup submenu Config Manually manages speaker configuration, such as speaker size (sound production capacity), and bass audio processing. Level Manually adjusts the volume of each speaker. Distance Manually adjusts the output of each speaker based on distance to the listening point. Equalizer Selects an equalizer to adjust speaker output characteristics. Test Tone Generates test tones. In the Config submenu, you can select the speaker size characteristic (Large or Small). Select the size (sound reproduction capacity) that matches your speakers. Woofer diameter • 16 cm or larger → Large • 16 cm or smaller → Small When speaker size is set to “Small,” low-frequency components of the speakers that you configured are produced from the subwoofer (or from the front speakers if there is no subwoofer). Subwoofer Confirms the subwoofer. YES (Default) Select this when you have a subwoofer connected. During playback, the subwoofer will produce audio from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass audio from other channels. J2 NONE Select this when you do not have a subwoofer connected. The front speakers will produce audio from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass frequency audio from other channels. Memory Guard J 1 : This menu item appears depending on the “Control” setting. J 2 : Enabling the “Extra Bass” setting allows both the subwoofer and the front speakers to produce bass audio. En 49 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) Front Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front speakers. J1 Small (Default) Large Select this for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components. J2 Select this for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Center Selects the size of the center speakers. None Sur. B Selects the size of the surround back speakers. None (Default) Select this when no surround back speakers are connected. SMLx1 Select when one small surround back speaker is connected. SMLx2 Select when two small surround back speakers are connected. LRGx1 Select when one large surround back speaker is connected. LRGx2 Select when two large surround back speakers are connected. Select this when there is no center speaker. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. Small (Default) Select this when a small center speaker is connected. Large Select this when a large center speaker is connected. Sur. LR Selects the size of the surround speakers. None Select this when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio signals. Small (Default) Select this when the surround speakers are small. Large Select this when the surround speakers are large. • When set to “None,” no sound is produced from the surround back speaker even if that speaker is connected. • When set to “None,” the sound field programs will change to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. • When there are no surround speakers are inactive, the setting will automatically change to “None.” • You can set surround back audio signals, including from the playback source, to be mixed down and produced from a single speaker (6.1-channel layout) or produced from left and right surround back speakers (5.1-channel layout). SWFR Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer if the bass audio is lacking or unclear. NRM (Default) Does not change the subwoofer phase. REV Reverses the subwoofer phase. Extra Bass Allows the front channel low-frequency components to be produced exclusively by the subwoofer, or by both the subwoofer and the front speakers. ON The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components. OFF (Default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the front speakers or the subwoofer produce the front channel low-frequency components. When the “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” the “Extra Bass” setting is disabled. Crossover Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component output from speakers set to “Small.” Audio with a frequency below that limit will be produced from the subwoofer or the front speakers. J3 40Hz 110Hz 60Hz 120Hz 80Hz (Default) 160Hz 90Hz 200Hz 100Hz J 1 : When “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” you can only choose “Large.” If the front speaker setting is “Small” and you change “Subwoofer” to “None,” it will automatically change to “Large.” J 2 : You can set the low-frequency components of audio signals transmitted from the front speakers to the subwoofer by using “Crossover” setting. J 3 : If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set the crossover frequency to maximum and the volume to half (or slightly less). En 50 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Controlling the volume of each speaker Level ■ Manually setting speaker distance Distance Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker. Use jCursor B / C to select the desired speaker and adjust the volume with jCursor D / E. ■ Adjusting sound quality with the equalizer Equalizer Adjusts the timing at which the speakers produce audio so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. Selecting adjustment units FL Front speaker L FR Front speaker R C Center speaker SL Surround speaker L SR Surround speaker R SBL Surround back L SBR Surround back R Unit Selects the distance unit (meters or feet). SB J1 Surround back Front L Front speaker L SWFR Subwoofer Front R Front speaker R Center Center speaker Use jCursor B / C to display “Unit,” and then use jCursor D / E to choose the units of length (meters or feet). Adjusts sound quality of tone using a parametric or graphic equalizer. EQ Select Select an equalizer type. PEQ Uses the parametric equalizer to adjust sound quality. Selecting this setting applies the tone settings obtained using YPAO (☞p. 23). J2 GEQ (Default) Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust sound quality. By pressing jENTER, you can adjust the characteristics of the graphic equalizer. Off Disables the equalizer. Setting distances for each speaker Use jCursor B / C to display the speaker you want to configure, and then use jCursor D / E to set the distance from the speaker to your listening position. Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Sur. L Surround speaker L Default setting 0 dB (FL/FR/SWFR) -1.0 dB (C/SL/SR/SBL/SBR/SB) Sur. R Surround speaker R Sur. B L Surround back speaker L Adjustment increments 0.5 dB Sur. B R Surround back speaker R Sur. B J1 Surround back speaker SWFR Subwoofer Adjustable range 0.30 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft) Default setting 3.00 m (10.0 ft) (Front L/Front R/SWFR) 2.60 m (8.5 ft) (Center) 2.40 m (8.0 ft) (Sur. L/Sur. R/Sur.B L/Sur.B R/Sur.B) Adjustment increments 0.10 m (0.5 ft) J 1 : “SB” and “Sur.B” is displayed when using a 6.1 channel configuration only. J 2 : Using YPAO to carry out acoustic measurement selects “PEQ” automatically. “PEQ” does not appear if the measurement process has not been carried out at least once. En 51 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Generating test tones ■ Adjusting the graphic equalizer 1 2 When “EQ Select” is displayed, use jCursor D / E to select “GEQ” and press jENTER. 3 Raising volume: Press jCursor E. Lowering volume: Press jCursor D. Check that “Channel” selects and use jCursor D / E to select the speaker for which you want to adjust the equalizer. GEQ Press jCursor C repeatedly to select the frequency you want to adjust, then use jCursor D / E to adjust the volume. GEQ VOL. 63Hz L SL SW C Channel;FRNT L L SL Frequency band R SR Off (Default) Does not generate test tones. On Generates test tones. While “On” is selected, test tones are produced constantly. R SR VOL. SW C Test Tone Turns the test tone generator on or off. Setting the volume level for the selected frequency The speaker you are adjusting Frequency range 63 Hz/160 Hz/400 Hz/1 kHz/2.5 kHz/6.3 kHz/ 16 kHz Adjustable range -6.0 dB to 0 dB to +6.0 dB Default setting 0 dB Adjustment increments 0.5 dB You can use the test tone in a variety of circumstances. For example, you can adjust the volume balance settings for each speaker, or whenever you adjust the settings on the internal graphic equalizer, you can listen to the actual effect while operating this unit. Turn the test tone off when you have finished making adjustments. You can use jCursor B / C to select another frequency or return to step 2. Repeat steps 2-3 to adjust the tone to your liking. 4 When you have finished making adjustments, press iSETUP to close the Setup menu. En 52 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ;SoundSetup Lipsync Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync function). VOL. L SL SW C R SR HDMI Auto When connecting to a TV via HDMI, automatically adjusts output timing if the TV supports an automatic lipsync function. Sound Setup submenu Off (Default) Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. Adaptive DRC Auto-adjusting the sound level to make even low volumes more audible. D.Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for Dolby Digital and DTS playback. Max Volume Sets the maximum volume for this receiver. Init Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. On Select this when the connected monitor does not support the automatic lipsync function or you do not want to use the automatic lipsync function. Set the correction time in “Manual.” Select this when the monitor supports the automatic lipsync function. Fine-adjust the correction time in “Auto.” Auto Fine-adjust the audio output timing by entering the correction time provided when “HDMI Auto” is set to “On.” Adjustable range 0 ms to 240 ms Adjustment increments 1 ms ■ Auto-adjusting the sound level to make even low volumes more audible Adaptive DRC Adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level (from minimum to maximum). When you play audio at night or at low volumes, it is a good idea to set parameter to “Auto.” J1 Auto Adjusts the dynamic range automatically. Off (Default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically. When the “Auto” is selected, it adjusts the dynamic range as follows. Auto Off Input Level Volume: low Output Level SETUP ■ Synchronizing audio/video output Output Level Setting the audio output function of this unit Auto Off Input Level Volume: high Manual Manually adjusts the correction time. Select this when the monitor does not support the automatic lipsync function or “HDMI Auto” is set to “Off.” Adjustable range 0 ms to 240 ms Adjustment increments 1 ms Default setting 0 ms J 1 : The Adaptive DRC setting is also effective when you use headphones. En 53 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Auto-adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS dynamic range D.Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bitstream (Dolby Digital and DTS) signal playback. Min/Auto (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals. (Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD signals based on input signal information. STD Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for regular home use. Max (Default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. ■ Setting the maximum volume ■ Setting the startup volume Setting HDMI functions Init Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. When this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set at the level when the receiver last entered standby mode. J1 Adjustable range Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Default setting Off Adjustment increments 0.5 dB SETUP ;HDMISetup Adjustable range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB / +16.5 dB (Maximum volume) Default setting +16.5 dB Adjustment increments 5.0 dB L SL SW C R SR HDMI Setup submenu Control Turns the HDMI Control on or off. TVAudio J2 Chooses automatically selected audio input in conjunction with TV operation when the HDMI Control is turned on. ReturnChan J2 Transmits audio/video output to the TV and audio input from the TV through a single HDMI cable. Standby J2 Selects whether HDMI audio/video signals will be continue to be produced when this unit is on standby. Audio Selects the audio output device connected to this unit via HDMI jacks. Max Volume Sets a maximum volume level so that the audio is not played too loudly. The default setting of +16.5 dB produces the highest volume. VOL. J 1 : When you set the “Max Volume” at a lower level than “Init Volume,” the “Max Volume” setting has priority. J 2 : This menu item appears depending on the “Control” setting. En 54 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Receiver operation via TV (HDMI Control) Control Set the HDMI Control function to “On” to operate devices connected via HDMI. If the TV or other external components support HDMI Control (ex. Panasonic VIERA Link), you can use the remote controls of those devices to operate some of this unit’s functions, and to synchronize this unit with the operation of those devices. Please refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 68) for instructions. Off (Default) Sets HDMI Control to “Off.” On Sets HDMI Control to “On.” J1 If this unit is connected to HDMI devices that do not support the HDMI Control function, these functions will not operate. ■ Selecting an input source to assign audio input for the TV TVAudio Select the input source that matches operations carried out on the TV while the HDMI Control function is on. When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and the function is enabled, the audio input for the TV is assigned to the input source selected here. J2 AV1 to AV6 Assigns any of the AV1-6 input source for the audio input from the TV. AUDIO1/AUDIO2 Assigns AUDIO1 or AUDIO2 input source for the audio input from the TV. Default setting AV4 J 1 : When the HDMI Control is “On,” the Standby Through function is automatically enabled. When this unit enters standby mode, the audio and video signals from the last-selected HDMI input source will continue to be transmitted to the TV. • “TVAudio” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function (Control) is set to “On.” • Please refer to “Using the HDMI Control function” (☞p. 67) for setting instructions. • For details on inputting the audio signal from the TV, refer to “Listening to TV audio” (☞p. 16). ■ Listening to TV audio via single HDMI cable (Audio Return Channel) ReturnChan You can enable or disable the Audio Return Channel function. When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and the function is enabled, the TV’s audio output is transmit to this unit via an HDMI cable. The TV audio input to this unit is regarded as the input source selected in “TVAudio.” J2 By means of this function, you do not need to connect the TV’s audio output (digital audio output or analog audio output) to the unit. Off (Default) Sets the Audio Return Channel to “Off.” On Sets the Audio Return Channel to “On.” When the TV audio is input to the unit using Audio Return Channel, “TV” is displayed on the front panel display. TV AV4 ■ Transmitting HDMI audio/video to the TV during standby mode (Standby Through) Standby This function allows audio/video signals to continue to be transmitted to a TV connected to HDMI jacks 1-4 even when this unit is in standby mode. Off (Default) Sets Standby Through to “Off.” On Transmits audio/video signals from the selected HDMI input source to the TV. • When HDMI Control is “On,” Standby Through function is automatically enabled and “Standby” is not displayed. • When the Standby Through function is “On,” audio/video signals will continue to be transmitted to the TV from the selected HDMI input source when this unit is in standby mode. You can change the HDMI input source to transmit signals during the standby through mode by using dHDMI1-4 on the remote control. When the input source is changed, the HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator on the front panel blinks twice. • When the Standby Through function is on, the HDMI Through/ iPod Charge indicator on the front panel lights during the standby mode. When this indicator is lit, this unit consumes 1 to 3 W of power. VOL. L SL SW C R SR • “ReturnChan” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function (Control) is set to “On.” • Please refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return Channel function” (☞p. 69) for setting instructions. J 2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input source cannot be used. En 55 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Changing the output destination of HDMI input audio signals Audio Choose whether to playback audio from an external component such as a BD/DVD player connected via HDMI through this unit or through a TV. Amp (Default) Outputs audio through this unit only. When this setting is selected, the external component outputs an audio format compatible with this unit. TV Outputs audio through a TV only. When this setting is selected, the external component outputs an audio format compatible with the TV. J1 Amp+TV Outputs audio from the TV and this unit. When this setting is selected, the external component outputs an audio format compatible with this unit and TV. “Audio” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function (Control) is set to “Off.” J 1 : When “TV” is selected, the speakers of this unit do not output sound. En 56 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Making the receiver easier to use RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 SETUP AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING VOL. ;Func.Setup L SL SW C R SR 2 3 Select the input source that you want to rename using jCursor B / C. Use jCursor D / E to select a new name from the following templates. 2 3 Select the input source that you want to rename using jCursor B / C. Press jENTER. TUNER FM INFO Func. Setup submenu AM MEMORY Blu-ray Satellite Input Rename Changes the input source names. DVD VCR AutoPowerDown Goes enter standby mode if you leave it without operating. SetTopBox Tape Game MD TV PC DVR iPod CD HD DVD CD-R (blank) HDMI1 VOL. HDMI1 SW C L SL R SR ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO i Dimmer Sets the brightness of the front panel display. OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN j ■ Changing input source names Cursor 4 The following characters are available for input source. DISPLAY Input Rename POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT Changes the input source names to be displayed on the front panel display. You can change an input source name by choosing from a list of templates, or make one of your own. 4 ■ Selecting a template INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 1 Select “Input Rename” from the Setup menu and press jENTER. HDMI1 i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER j RETURN HDMI1 Renaming the input source ■ Entering an original name VOL. L SL SW C R SR 1 • • • • Confirm the new display name by pressing jRETURN. Press iSETUP to exit the Setup menu. To cancel a name change, select the original name and then press jRETURN to exit renaming. TV HDMI1 5 6 A to Z, a to z 0 to 9 Symbols (#, *, -, +, etc.) Space Repeat step 4 until you have entered the new input source name. Confirm the new display name by pressing jENTER. Press iSETUP to exit the Setup menu. To cancel a name change, press jRETURN. Select “Input Rename” from the Setup menu and press jENTER. HDMI1 Use jCursor B / C to select the characters you want to change, and use jCursor D / E to enter those characters. VOL. L SL SW C R SR Renaming the input source En 57 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Goes enter standby mode automatically when you leave it without operating AutoPowerDown ■ Setting the brightness of the front panel display You can set the parameters for the sound field programs (☞p. 59). Dimmer If you do not operate this unit or use the remote control for an extended period of time, it will automatically go into standby mode (Auto Power Down function). This function’s default setting is “Off.” When you want to enable this function, set the amount of time to pass before this unit will enter standby. Off (Default) Auto Power Down function is disabled. 4hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated this unit for four hours. 8hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated this unit for eight hours. 12hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated this unit for twelve hours. This unit starts a countdown of 30 seconds before entering the standby mode. Pressing any key of the remote control during the countdown cancels entering the standby mode and reset the timer. Setting the sound field program Sets the brightness of the front panel display. Lowering the setting dims the display. Adjustable range -4 to 0 Default setting 0 SETUP VOL. ;DSPParameter L SL SW C R SR Prohibiting setting changes SETUP ;Memory Guard VOL. L SL SW C R SR Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made to the settings on Setup menu. Off (Default) Settings are not protected. On Prohibits changes to the settings on Setup menu until it is returned to “Off.” While set to “On,” the unit displays “Memory Guard!” when an attempt is made to change the settings. En 58 SETUP Setting sound field program parameters CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP Although the sound field programs would satisfy you as they are with the default parameters, you can arrange the effect by setting the sound field elements (parameters). To adjust the sound effects suitable for acoustical conditions of audio/video sources or rooms, perform the following operations. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING 1 2 TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY Press iSETUP to display the Setup menu. MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT SETUP DIRECT BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO i VOLUME j OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU VOL. ;DSPParameter SCENE 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SW C R SR L SL SW C To set the parameters of the sound field program back to default, press jCursor C repeatedly during editing to select “Initialize” and press jCursor E. When following message is displayed, press jCursor E again to initialize. DSPPRM Press Again VOL. Sci-Fi 1 L SL Use jCursor D / E to choose the sound field program you want to edit. DSPPRM MUTE REC Once you have completed editing, press iSETUP to close the Setup menu. ■ To initialize the sound field parameters Use jCursor B / C to select “DSP Parameter” and press jENTER. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE 5 R SR VOL. L SL SW C R SR To cancel operations, press jCursor D when “Press Again” appears and return to the original display. Sound field program to be edited 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER 4 Press jCursor B / C to select the parameter that you want to change, and press jCursor D / E to change the parameter. DSPPRM VOL. DSPLevel;;0dB Sound field parameter L SL SW C R SR Choices When there are multiple parameters in the sound field program you are configuring, repeat step 4 as necessary to change other parameters. En 59 SETUP Setting sound field program parameters CINEMA DSP parameters Parameters usable in certain sound field programs <Dolby PLIIx Movie> 2ch Stereo only <Neo:6 Cinema> Selects a surround decoder to be used with a sound field program in the MOVIE category. J1 Dolby PLIIx Movie (Dolby PLII Movie) Selects the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (or Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) decoder. Neo:6 Cinema Selects the Neo:6 (Cinema) decoder. DSP Level Direct Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit depending on the condition of tone control etc., when an analog sound source is played back. You can enjoy a higher quality sound. Auto (Default) Off Change the effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking the sound effect. Adjustable range -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB Default setting 0 dB Adjust “DSP Level” as follows: • The effect sound is too soft. • There are no differences between effects of the sound field programs. → Increase the effect level. • The sound is dull. • The sound field effect is added too much. → Reduce the effect level. J 1 : Surround decoders cannot be changed when used with the following MOVIE Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone control circuit when both tone controls of “Bass” and “Treble” are set to 0dB. Does not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control circuit. SR Level Adjusts the volume of the surround R channel. J2 Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 100% SB Level Adjusts the volume of the surround back channel. J2 Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 35% (7.1-channel configuration) 50% (6.1-channel configuration) Straight Enhancer/7ch Enhancer only EFCT LVL 7ch Stereo only Adjusts the effect level of the compressed music enhancer mode. CT Level Adjusts the center channel volume. J2 Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 100% High (Default) Standard effect. Low Sets when the high-frequency signals of the source are emphasized excessively. SL Level Adjusts the volume of the surround L channel. J2 Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 100% J 2 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive. sound field programs. • Mono Movie • Sports • Action Game • Roleplaying Game En 60 SETUP Setting sound field program parameters Parameters usable in surround decoder When Neo:6 Music is selected Dolby PLIIx Music and Dolby PLII Music only Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. C.Image Panorama Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends front left/ right channels sounds to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Off (Default) Disables the effect. On Enables the effect. Adjustable range 0.0 to 1.0 Default setting 0.3 CT Width Spreads the center channel sound to the front left and right speakers to suit your needs or preferences. Set this parameter to 0 for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker only. Adjustable range 0 to 7 Default setting 3 Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative, and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value more positive. Adjustable range -3 to STD to +3 Default setting STD (Standard) En 61 SETUP CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP b c You can operate an external component such as TV and DVD player with the remote control of this unit by setting the code for external component (remote control code). The remote control code can be set for each input source. Individual setting allows you to switch external components seamlessly depending on the selected input source. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING Controlling other components with the remote control d Selecting input source connected to DVD player Keys connecting external components Default remote control code settings TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC DVD player ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION RETURN POP-UP MENU Selecting input source connected to CD player MUTE REC 1 CD player j DISPLAY TOP MENU Playback/Stop q VOLUME ENTER i k 2 5 6 9 0 3 7 10 DVD player 4 8 l TV VOL TV CH m Playback/Stop MUTE CD player b TRANSMIT c SOURCE A d Input selector i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER j RETURN k External component cSOURCE A Switches an external component on and off. jCursor, jENTER, jRETURN Operates the menus of external components. kDISPLAY Switches an external component display. kExternal component operation keys Functions as a recording or playback key of an external component, or a menu display key. lNumeric keys Functions as numeric keys of an external component. ENT TV INPUT The remote control keys for controlling external components are available only when the external components have corresponding control keys. If you are unable to operate this unit after operating an external component, press iSETUP or qOPTION and then try operating the remote control again. mTV control keys J1 The following remote control codes are assigned to input sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of available remote control codes, please refer to “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM. Input Category Manufacturer Remote control code HDMI1 Blu-ray player/ recorder Yamaha 2064 HDMI2 — — — HDMI3 — — — HDMI4 — — — AV1 — — — AV2 — — — AV3 CD player Yamaha 5095 AV4 — — — AV5 — — — AV6 — — — mINPUT Switches video inputs of TV. AUDIO1 — — — mMUTE Mutes TV volume temporarily. AUDIO2 — — — mTV VOL +/- Controls the volume of TV. V-AUX — — — mTV CH +/- Switches TV channels. A/B J2 — — — mA Turns on and off TV. DOCK DOCK Yamaha 5089 TUNER Tuner Yamaha 5085 operation keys k DISPLAY l Numeric keys m TV control keys m INPUT m MUTE m TV VOL +/m TV CH +/mA q OPTION J 1 : You can register remote control codes for external components to dInput selector and remote control codes for TVs in mA (mTV control keys). To register a TV remote control code to dInput selector: You can use the jCursor, lNumeric keys, and mTV To register a remote control code for a device other than a TV to dInput selector: You can use the jCursor and lNumeric keys etc to control external components, and the mTV control keys to control TVs registered in mA. J 2 : Use A/B for external component operations only. Set these keys to remote control codes if you want to perform external component operations without linking to input source selection of this unit. For example, it may be convenient to assign remote control codes for devices such as TVs. control keys to control a TV you have registered. En 62 SETUP Controlling other components with the remote control CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE n RECEIVER SLEEP MI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 d Registering remote control codes for external component operations AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK TUNING MEMORY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO h OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 l 1 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE • Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 2. • Remote control code of an external component cannot be set from the name or model number of a unit. Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to search the available remote control codes from the category or manufacturer of external components. • If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first code in the list, if it does not work then try the other codes. m Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CDROM to search the available remote control codes from the category or manufacturer of external components. “2064” can be used for a Yamaha BD player. 4 Enter a remote control code “2064” using lNumeric keys. J2 2 blinks twice 6 0 4 Once the remote control code is registered successfully the remote control will blink twice. TRANSMIT AM PRESET INFO Press nCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. The following section describes how to register remote control code using an example of the registration of the remote control codes of a Yamaha BD player connected to HDMI2 jack. TUNER FM 2 SOURCE CODE SET RECEIVER Registration successful: blinks twice Registration failed: blinks 6 times SLEEP HDMI 3 Press dHDMI2 on the remote control to switch the input source to HDMI2. J1 TRANSMIT SOURCE CODE SET RECEIVER SLEEP Perform the following steps to register the selected input source here to the remote control code. HDMI • If the registration fails, repeat the step 2. • In case of an external component with multiple remote control codes, the other remote control codes may be supported. Repeat from step 2 with the other remote control codes. 5 To switch between BD player linked to scene selections, press hSCENE and at the same time press dHDMI2 and hold it for approximately 3 seconds. Then you can operate the external components by switching the input source to HDMI2, or selecting HDMI2 in the registered scene. d HDMI2 h SCENE l Numeric keys m TV control keys mA n CODE SET Same steps for operating other external components, press hSCENE and at the same time press the input source key selected in step 3 and hold it for approximately 3 seconds. J 1 : When you want to register a remote control code to the mTV control keys, press mA (mTV control keys) in step 3. J 2 : When you want to register a remote control code to the mTV control keys, enter the TV remote control code in step 4. En 63 SETUP Controlling other components with the remote control CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE n RECEIVER SLEEP Resetting all remote control codes HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 Resetting all remote control codes for external components to the initial factory settings. AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT TV CD SETUP DIRECT 1 RADIO OPTION i Press nCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. 1 Once the remote control code is reset successfully the remote control will blink twice. Reset successful: blinks twice Reset failed: blinks 6 times POP-UP MENU SOURCE CODE SET RECEIVER HDMI blinks twice If setup fails, repeat from step 1. DISPLAY TOP MENU TRANSMIT SLEEP VOLUME ENTER RETURN 8 9 STEREO SCENE BD DVD Enter “9981” using lNumeric keys. 9 Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 2. TUNER FM 3 TRANSMIT MUTE REC SOURCE CODE SET RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL ENT l 2 Press iSETUP on the remote control. TV CH MUTE i SETUP l Numeric keys n CODE SET En 64 SETUP Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu) The Advanced Setup menu can be used for unit initialization and other useful extended functions. The Advanced Setup menu can be operated as follows. Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu 3 Use PROGRAM l / h to select the item to be set from the following items. Setting the impedance of speakers (U.S.A. and Canada models only) In the Advanced Setup menu, you can set the following settings. 1 2 Switch this unit to the standby mode. Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel. Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on the front panel display. After approximately a few seconds, the top menu items are displayed. A STRAIGHT YPAO MIC INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO SP IMP. J1 Sets the impedance of speakers. REMOTE ID Changes the remote control ID of a receiver. TU J2 Selects one of the following FM/AM frequency steps. INIT Initializes various settings for this unit. 4 5 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select the value you want to change. SPIMP.-8MIN Changes the unit settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. J3 6 MIN Select the impedance when 6Ω speakers are connected. 8 MIN (Default) Select the impedance when speakers above 8Ω are connected. Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then switch it on again. The settings become effective and the unit is powered on. If initialization is selected, it will be performed when the unit is powered on again. STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA PROGRAM l / h J 1 : U.S.A. and Canada models only. J 2 : Asia and General models only. J 3 : For detailed procedures of speaker impedance settings, refer to “(U.S.A. and Canada models only) Changing speaker impedance” (☞p. 12). En 65 SETUP Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE n RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV Avoiding crossing remote control signals when using multiple Yamaha receivers AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK ■ To change the remote control ID Changing FM/AM frequency steps (Asia and General models only) Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 1. TU-AM9/FM50 TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU REMOTEID-ID1 TUNING The remote control of the unit can only receive signals from a receiver which has an identical ID (remote control ID). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote i control ID for its corresponding receiver. On the contrary, if you are setting the same remote control ID for all receivers, you can use one remote control to operate 2 receivers. MUTE ID1 (Default) Receives the remote control signals set in ID1. ID2 Receives the remote control signals set in ID2. REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE l 1 2 3 Press nCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. You can select one of the following FM/AM frequency steps: J1 AM10/FM100 You can adjust the AM frequency by steps of 10kHz and FM by steps of 100kHz. AM9/FM50 (Default) You can adjust the AM frequency by steps of 9kHz and FM by steps of 50kHz. Press iSETUP on the remote control. Enter the desired remote control ID code. To switch to ID1: Enter “5019” using lNumeric keys. Initializing various settings for this unit To switch to ID2: Enter “5020” using lNumeric keys. Once the remote control code is registered successfully the remote control will blink twice. ENT ID1 is set for both remote control and receiver by default. To avoid crossing remote control, change the remote control ID for both remote control and receiver. Registration successful: blinks twice Registration failed: blinks 6 times TRANSMIT i SETUP l Numeric keys n CODE SET SOURCE CODE SET INIT-CANCEL Initializes various settings stored in this unit and sets it back to default. Select the items to be initialized from the following. DSP PARAM Initializes all parameters for the sound field programs. ALL Resets this unit to default factory settings. CANCEL (Default) Does not initialize. RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI • If setup fails, repeat from step 1. • Returns to ID1 after the remote control code is initialized (☞p. 64). J 1 : For details on setting FM/AM frequency steps, refer to “FM/AM tuning” (☞p. 34). En 66 SETUP Using the HDMI Control function This unit supports the HDMI Control function, which allows you to operate external components via HDMI. If you connect devices that support HDMI Control (ex. Panasonic VIERA Linkcompatible TVs, DVD/Blu-ray Disc recorders, etc.) J1, you can use the following operations with the remote control of any of those devices: – Power synchronization (on/standby) – Volume control, including Mute – Changing the volume of the audio output signal device (either the TV or this unit) 1 2 3 Connect the TV, DVD recorder supporting HDMI Control to this unit’s HDMI output jack. Turn on the TV and this unit. 7 If DVD recorder that supports the HDMI Control function are connected to this unit, turn them on. Receiver unit Confirm that the input source for the DVD recorder has been selected. If a different input source has been selected, please change it manually. TV/DVD Recorder Confirm that the video signal from the recorder is being properly received by the TV. Refer to the TV’s instruction manual on how to operate external components. Set the TV and this unit’s HDMI Control function to “On.” Operations 1-7 will not be required more than twice. TV Control signal (such as volume control) HDMI connection Receiver unit Confirm that “Control” in the Setup menu (HDMI Setup) is set to “On” (☞p. 55). J2 TV/DVD Recorder Check the instruction manuals for those devices. 4 Turn the TV off. 5 Turn the TV on. 6 Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that is connected to this unit (ex. HDMI1). HDMI Remote control of TV This unit NOTE Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the TV. If they are not synchronized, turn them off manually. Confirm that this unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If it is still off, turn it on manually. 8 Confirm that this unit is properly synchronized with the TV through the following operations by using the TV remote control. • Power On/Off • Volume Control • Switching between audio output devices If this unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check that the HDMI Control function is set to “On” for both devices. If they will not properly synchronize, unplugging and replugging the devices and turning them on and off may solve the problem. The following is an example of how to connect this unit, a TV, and a DVD recorder. Follow the instructions in your TV and DVD recorder manuals, as well as the ones written below. – Set the TV’s HDMI Control function to “On” – Follow the AV amplifier connection instructions, and connect this unit to the TV J 1 : We recommend that you use TVs and DVD/BD recorders from the same manufacturer whenever possible. J 2 : The default setting for the HDMI Control function is “Off.” En 67 SETUP Using the HDMI Control function CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ■ Switching the input source on this To use other jacks to input audio signals from TV, carry out the following procedure. When the HDMI Control (☞p. 67) is operating properly, the input source of this unit is automatically changed to match operations carried out on the TV. The default input jack is AV4. If the AV4 optical digital jack is connected to the TV’s audio output jack, then you can enjoy TV sound through this unit right away. 1 2 unit automatically when listening to TV audio HDMI TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI cable. HDMI Audio output (Optical) DIRECT ARC SCENE TV 5 CD SETUP RADIO i HDMI 1 ANTENNA OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM Input jack Optical digital audio output AV1 or AV4 (default) Coaxial digital audio output AV2 or AV3 Analog stereo output AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2 HDMI 2 GND AM OPTION 75ǡ PB VIDEO VIDEO Y R SR VOLUME ENTER j TV O DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 6 Available input jacks MUTE REC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM 4 7 R SR PR 75ǡ 8 VOL. TVAudio;;;;AV4 GND AM PR PB 6 H COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO 3 SW C Press jCursor C to select “TVAudio” and select the input jack connected in step 2 using jCursor D / E. HDMI ARC HDMI OUT DOCK 2 L SL Y MONITOR OUT 5 SW C VOL. Control;;;;;On PR O PB 1 L SL Make sure that “Control” is selected, and then use jCursor D / E to select “On.” HDMI TV output jack (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK PR RETURN VOL. Control;;;;Off Connect TV’s audio output to this unit. The input jacks listed below are available to input TV’s audio signals. Use the same jack type as used for the TV. Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup” and press jENTER. STEREO STRAIGHT BD DVD 4 L SL SW C R SR PB V VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OU 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT OPTICAL TV VOL TV CH AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) (TV) AV 3 AV 4 MUTE AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 7 Press iSETUP when you have finished changing the settings. If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this unit will automatically switch to the input source chosen in step 6. 3 i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER Press iSETUP. J1 J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 48) for details on the Setup menu. En 68 SETUP Using the HDMI Control function CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE ■ Single HDMI cable input to TV RECEIVER SLEEP 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV When using a TV that supports HDMI functions and Audio Return Channel function, audio/video output from this unit to the TV or audio output from the TV to this unit can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable (Audio Return Channel function). Audio signals transmitted from the TV to this unit can be assigned to any input source. AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup” and press jENTER. HDMI VOL. Control;;;;Off 4 L SL SW C R SR Make sure that “Control” is selected, and then use jCursor D / E to select “On.” STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD 3 audio with Audio Return Channel function HDMI TV CD SETUP RADIO i VOLUME j 1 HDMI Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI cable. VOL. Control;;;;;On L SL SW C R SR OPTION ENTER RETURN TV 5 Press jCursor C to select “TVAudio” and select the input source that you want to assign to the HDMI audio signals from the TV using jCursor D / E. J2 TV audio output 6 Press jCursor C to select “ReturnChan” and press jCursor E to select “On.” HDMI DISPLAY HDMI POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Video / Audio output The Audio Return Channel function will turn on. HDMI ENT SPEAK TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT MUTE HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 FRONT COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER ReturnChan;;On GND AM PR 75ǡ 2 L SL SW C R SR PB VIDEO i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER VOL. VIDEO Press iSETUP. J1 7 Press iSETUP when you have finished changing the settings. If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this unit will automatically switch to the input source chosen in step 6. J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 48) for details on the Setup menu. J 2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input source cannot be used. En 69 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. General Problem Cause Remedy See page The power will not turn on. The protection circuitry operated 3 times consecutively. As a safety precaution, when the protection circuitry operates 3 times consecutively, the capability to turn on the power is disabled. Please contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. — The unit enters standby mode soon after the power is turned on. The power cable is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall outlet. — (When this unit is turned back on and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The protection circuitry has been activated because this unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit and speakers are connected properly. 12 The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again. — The batteries in the remote control may have lost their charge. Replace all batteries. 4 The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the speaker with an impedance of at least 6Ω. — (U.S.A. and Canada models) Check that the speaker impedance settings are correct. 12 This unit cannot be turned off or does not work properly. The unit enters standby mode. Problem Cause Remedy See page After display of a countdown on the front panel, the unit goes into standby mode. If you do not use take any action, the Auto Power Down function operates. Turn on the unit, and play the source again. — In the Setup menu “AutoPowerDown” (“Func. Setup” → “AutoPowerDown”), increase the time until switching to standby mode, or turn off the Auto Power Down function. 58 Sound/images suddenly go off. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other, then turn the unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off the unit. Turn on the unit, and play the source again. — En 70 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Problem No sound. No picture. Cause Remedy See page Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 17 If a DVI-HDMI cable is used to connect the unit with an external component, then it is necessary to use an audio input jack for a different input to output audio. Display the HDMI Input Option menu for the connected cable, select “Audio In,” and select the jack to use for audio input. 46 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 12 The HDMI components connected to the unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 46 The audio input into the device is set to playback through the TV. In the Setup menu, set the HDMI Audio Out (“Sound Setup” → “Audio”) to other than “TV.” 56 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with Input selector. 28 The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. — Signals that this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CDROM. Use an input source that has signals that can be reproduced on this unit. — An output video jack type used to display content on the TV is different from the one of the input video (ex. Video input → HDMI output). Use video jacks of the same type (ex. Video input → Video output) to connect to the TV. 15 An appropriate video input is not selected on the TV. Select an appropriate video input on the TV. Problem No sound is output from a specific speaker. — Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. Cause See page Remedy The speaker is malfunctioning. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator lights up, connect another speaker and check if sound is output. If sound is not output, the unit may be malfunctioning. The playback component or speakers are not connected properly. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12, 17 Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off, try the following. 1) Change to a different input source. 2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not output from that speaker. Select another sound field program. 3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on this unit. Display “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu, and set respective parameters to enable output from that speaker (“Speaker Setup” → “Config”). 7, 49 The volume of that speaker is set to the minimum in “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu. Display “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu and adjust the volume (“Speaker Setup” → “Level”). 51 (If hardly any sound comes from one channel) Speaker output balance is not set correctly. Balance the volume of each speaker from “Level” in the Setup menu (“Speaker Setup” → “Level”). 51 Sound may not be output from certain channels, depending on the input source or sound field program. Try another sound field program. 29 When a monaural source sound field program is applied, for some surround decoders, sound from all channels is output from the center speaker. Try another sound field program. 29 En 7 71 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Problem No sound is heard from the surround speakers. No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. No sound is heard from the subwoofer. Cause Remedy See page This unit is in straight decoding mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press STRAIGHT to exit straight decoding mode. 30 Sound may not be output from certain channels depending on input sources or sound field programs. Try another sound field program. 29 An external amplifier is not connected to the external SURROUND BACK jacks. Connect an external amplifier to the SURROUND BACK jacks and then connect surround back speakers. An external amplifier or surround back speakers are not connected correctly to the external SURROUND BACK jacks. Check if the connection is correct. An external amplifier for surround back speakers is not set correctly. • The power is off. • An input source that is connected from the SURROUND BACK jacks is not selected. • The volume is too low. Set the external amplifier correctly. “EXTD Surround” in the Option menu is set to “Off,” or an input signal does not contain a surround back flag with “EXTD Surround” set to “Auto.” Set “EXTD Surround” other than “Off” or “Auto.” 45 A subwoofer is not connected, or it is inactive. Check that a subwoofer is connected correctly, and from the Setup menu “Subwoofer” (“Speaker Setup” → “Config” → “Subwoofer”), set the subwoofer to “On.” 49 Turn the subwoofer power on. If the subwoofer includes an Auto Power Off function, then lower the Auto Power Off sensitivity settings. — The subwoofer is turned off. The source does not contain LFE (☞p. 77) or low frequency signals. 11 — — Problem Cause See page Remedy The right combination of audio / video jacks to connect cannot be found. Combine input connected to the external component video output with another input audio jack. Display the Input Audio menu for the connected video output, select “Audio In,” and select the jack to use for audio input. 46 The audio input sources cannot be played in the desired digital audio signal format. The connected component is not set to output the desired digital audio signals. Set the playback component properly referring to its instruction manual. — There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — Noise/hum noise is heard. Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this unit by digital connection and playback the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved, the problem may results from the playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback component. 2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option menu after selecting the input source and set ‘‘Decoder Mode’’ to ‘‘DTS.’’ — The component connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned on. When the component connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned on, the sound may be distorted, or the volume may decreased due to the nature of AV receivers. Turn on all components connected to this unit. — “Max Volume” is set to a low value. Set it to a higher value. 54 The volume cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. En 72 APPENDIX Troubleshooting HDMI™ Problem Tuner (FM/AM) Cause Remedy See page FM Problem The front panel display HDMI indicator is flashing. No picture or sound. (When using HDMI Control function) TV sound is not output from this unit when operating the remote control of the TV. An error with the HDMI connection has occurred. Try re-inserting the HDMI cable. — Confirm that HDMI video that is not supported by the unit is not being input (HDMI Input → Option menu → “Signal Info”). 46 The number of components is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI components. — The connected HDMI component does not support high-bandwidth digital copyright protection (HDCP). Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. — The TV audio output is not connected to this unit, or the setting to match operations carried out on TV is not set. Connect the TV audio output to this unit, and then select the connected input source in “TVAudio” (Setup menu → HDMI Setup → TVAudio). 55 (When using Audio Return Channel function) The Audio Return Channel function is not working. Make sure that your TV supports Audio Return Channel. Set the Audio Return Channel function to on (Setup menu → HDMI Setup → ReturnChan). 55 FM stereo reception is noisy. Cause You are too far from the station transmitter, or the input from the antenna is weak. See page Remedy Check the antenna connections. 22 Switch to monaural mode. 35 Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna. — There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. You are in an area far from a station, or input from the antenna is weak. Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi element antenna. — Use TUNING H / I to manually select the station. 34 “No Presets” is displayed. No preset stations are registered. Register stations you want to listen to as preset stations before operation. 35 “Wrong Station” is displayed. An invalid FM/AM frequency has been input. Input a frequency that can be received. — En 73 APPENDIX Troubleshooting iPod™/iPhone™ AM Cause The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak, or the antenna connections are loose. Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 22 Use the manual tuning method. 34 Automatic station preset does not work. Automatic station preset is not available for AM stations. Use manual station preset. 34 Continuous crackling and hissing noises are heard. The supplied AM loop antenna is not connected. Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even if you use an outdoor antenna. 22 The noises may be caused by lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise, but it can be reduced by installing and properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna. 22 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — Buzzing and whining noises are heard. Remedy See page Problem Display Loading... Connect error Cause See page Remedy The unit is in the process of recognizing the connection with your iPod/iPhone. — The unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod/iPhone. — There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod/iPhone to the unit. Turn off the unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK jack of the unit. 39 Remove your iPod/iPhone from the Yamaha iPod universal dock and then place it back in the dock. 39 Connect an iPod/iPhone supported by the unit. — Unknown iPod The iPod/iPhone being used is not supported by the unit. iPod connected Your iPod/iPhone is properly placed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. — Disconnected Your iPod/iPhone is removed from the Yamaha iPod universal dock. — Unable to play The unit cannot playback the songs currently stored on your iPod/iPhone. Check that songs are currently stored on your iPod/iPhone. En — 74 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Bluetooth™ Display Searching... Remote control Cause Remedy See page The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the process of pairing. — The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the process of establishing a connection. — Completed The pairing is completed. — Canceled The pairing is canceled. — BT connected The connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component is established. — The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. — Disconnected Not found The Bluetooth component is not found. During pairing: – pairing must be performed on the Bluetooth component and this unit simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth component is in pairing mode. During connecting: – check if the Bluetooth component is turned on. – check if the Bluetooth component is within 10 m (32 feet) of the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. External components cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause See page Remedy Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m / 20 ft, and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. — Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 4 The remote control ID of the remote control and this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit and the remote control. 66 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “Remote control code search” on the CDROM. — Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “Remote control code search” on the CD-ROM. — If this unit does not work when you press Cursor B / C / D / E, do the following. When the key does not work during DVD disc menu operation: press the Input selector again. When the key does not work during Option menu/Setup menu operation: press the key corresponding to the current menu operation again. — — Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. — En 75 APPENDIX Glossary Audio information Audio and video synchronization (lip sync) Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem, and the capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction. Bi-amplification connection A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5 full-range channels, and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Digital Surround Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. DTS Express This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while playing the main program. Dolby TrueHD DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. En 76 APPENDIX Glossary DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack. LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5-channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems. Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced. Sound field program information CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. Compressed music enhancer The Compressed music enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in compression artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field program, so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers, by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. Video information Component video signal Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. Deep Color Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and audio/video monitors (such as digital televisions), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http:// www.hdmi.org/.” “x.v.Color” A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics. With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the PB and PR signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. En 77 APPENDIX Information on HDMI™ ■ HDMI signal compatibility NOTES Audio signals Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. • If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can playback the audio sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the digital audio input (optical or coaxial) connections. • Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately. • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details. To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). • This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content. Video signals This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: – – – – 480i/60 Hz 576i/50 Hz 480p/60 Hz 576p/50 Hz – 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz – 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz – 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz About trademarks Bluetooth™ Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. “HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. iPod™, iPhone™ “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “iPhone” is a trademark of Apple Inc. En 78 APPENDIX Specifications ■ Input jacks ■ HDMI • Analog audio Audio x 5 (AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, V-AUX) • HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lips Sync, ARC (Audio Return Channel) • Digital audio Optical x 2 (AV1, AV4) Coaxial x 2 (AV2, AV3) • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - VGA - 480i/60 Hz - 576i/50 Hz - 480p/60 Hz - 576p/50 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz • Video Composite x 5 (AV3, AV4, AV5, AV6, V-AUX) Component x 2 (AV1, AV2) • Other HDMI x 4 DOCK x 1 (AUDIO, VIDEO [Composite]) ■ Output jacks • Analog Audio Speaker out x 5ch (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R) PRE OUT x 2 (SURROUND BACK L/R) Subwoofer out x 1 AV OUT x 1 AUDIO OUT x 1 • Video MONITOR OUT - Component x 1 - Composite x 1 AV OUT - Composite x 1 • Other HDMI OUT x 1 • Audio Format - Dolby Digital - DTS - DSD 6ch - Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby TrueHD - DTS-HD - PCM 2ch-8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible ■ Compatible Decoding Formats • Decoding Format - Dolby True HD, Dolby Digital Plus - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS Express - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX - DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema ■ AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) FRONT L/R ....................................................................... 105 W/ch CENTER................................................................................. 105 W SURROUND L/R .............................................................. 105 W/ch [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) FRONT L/R ....................................................................... 105 W/ch CENTER................................................................................. 105 W SURROUND L/R .............................................................. 105 W/ch • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A. and Canada models] Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω...................................110/130/160/180 W [Other models] Front Speakers 6/4/2 Ω .............................................110/130/150 W • Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) [China, Korea, General and Asia models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ............................................................ 140 W • Maximum Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................... 120 W • IEC Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models] Front Speakers 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ..................... 105 W+105 W • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models] 8 Ω .......................................................................................... 0.2 dB En 79 APPENDIX Specifications ■ VIDEO SECTION ■ GENERAL • Maximum Input Voltage AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................... 2.3 V or more • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ........................ NTSC [Other models] ........................................................................... PAL • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT ............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo & Front: Small)................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ • Signal Level Composite ..................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component ...................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ..................................100 mV/470 Ω • Maximum Input Level ..............................................1.5 Vp-p or more • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General models] ................. AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] ........................................................ AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] ........................................................ AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ..................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia models]......................................AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance AV5, etc .....................................................................200 mV/47 kΩ • Frequency Response AV5 to FRONT..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/-3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion AV5, etc. to FRONT (DIRECT) [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ....... 0.06% or less [Other models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 6 Ω) ............................. 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................... 50 dB or more • Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT] Component ................................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB ■ FM SECTION • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) AV5, etc. (DIRECT) Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers) ...............................................................................100 dB or more • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models]............................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models]............87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ................................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front Speakers ............................................................150 µV or less • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono .....................................................................3.0 µV (20.8 dBf) • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) ........................... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo..................................................................74 dB/69 dB • Volume Control ...................................... MUTE / -80 dB to +16.5 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo........................................................................0.3/0.3% • Tone Control (Front Speakers) BASS Boost/Cut .............................................±10 dB/2 dB at 50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................... 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut......................................±10 dB/2 dB at 20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency.............................................. 3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back)............. 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer)............................................................ 24 dB/oct. • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .....................................270 W/320 VA [Other models] ........................................................................ 280 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control off / Standby Through off ....................0.2 W or less HDMI Control on / Standby Through off .....................1.2 W or less HDMI Control on/ Standby Through on..........................3 W or less • Dimensions (W x H x D) 435 x 151 x 364 mm (17-1/8 x 6 x 14-3/8 in) • Weight 8.4 kg (18.5 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Antenna Input (unbalanced)......................................................... 75 Ω ■ AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models]...................................530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models]..................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ........................................................531 to 1611 kHz En 80 APPENDIX Index Numerics D 5.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 10 6.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 10 7.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 10 D.Range, Sound Setup ................................................................ Decoder Mode, Option menu...................................................... Dimmer, Func. Setup .................................................................. Direct mode................................................................................. Disconnect, Option menu............................................................ Distance, Speaker Setup.............................................................. DSP Parameter ............................................................................ DVD player connection............................................................... A Adaptive DRC, Sound Setup ....................................................... 53 Advanced Setup menu ................................................................. 65 AM antenna connection ............................................................... 22 AM tuning.................................................................................... 34 Audio In, Option menu ................................................................ 46 AUDIO jack ................................................................................. 14 Audio Return Channel function ................................................... 69 Audio, HDMI Setup..................................................................... 56 Auto Preset................................................................................... 35 Auto Preset, Option menu............................................................ 47 Automatic traffic information reception ...................................... 38 AutoPowerDown, Func. Setup .................................................... 58 B BD player connection .................................................................. 17 Bluetooth™ component playback................................................ 42 J 54 45 58 31 47 51 59 17 L Level, Speaker Setup................................................................... 51 Lipsync, Sound Setup.................................................................. 53 Low-frequency sound adjustment ............................................... 28 M Equalizer, Speaker Setup ............................................................ 51 EXTD Surround, Option menu ................................................... 45 External component connection.................................................. 14 Manual Preset .............................................................................. 36 Max Volume, Sound Setup ......................................................... 54 Memory Guard ............................................................................ 58 Multi information display.............................................................. 7 MUTE indicator ............................................................................ 7 F N FM antenna connection ............................................................... 22 FM Mode, Option menu.............................................................. 47 FM tuning.................................................................................... 34 Front panel .................................................................................... 5 Front panel display........................................................................ 7 Front speaker ................................................................................. 9 Func. Setup.................................................................................. 57 Normal tuning.............................................................................. 34 H Pairing, Option menu .................................................................. 47 PHONES jack................................................................................ 5 Portable audio player connection ................................................ 21 PORTABLE jack......................................................................... 14 Preset tuning ................................................................................ 35 E C Cable plug .................................................................................... 14 Center speaker................................................................................ 9 Changing speaker impedance ...................................................... 12 CINEMA DSP indicator ................................................................ 7 Clear Preset, Option menu ........................................................... 47 COAXIAL jack ............................................................................ 14 COMPONENT VIDEO jack........................................................ 14 Config, Speaker Setup ................................................................. 49 Connect, Option menu ................................................................. 47 Connecting speakers .................................................................... 11 Connections.................................................................................... 9 Control, HDMI Setup................................................................... 55 Cursor indicators ............................................................................ 7 Jack.............................................................................................. 14 HDMI Control function............................................................... 67 HDMI indicator............................................................................. 7 HDMI jack .................................................................................. 14 HDMI Setup ................................................................................ 54 High-frequency sound adjustment .............................................. 28 I Init Volume, Sound Setup ........................................................... INIT, Advanced Setup menu....................................................... Input Rename, Func. Setup ......................................................... iPhone™ playback ...................................................................... iPod™ playback .......................................................................... 54 66 57 39 39 O OPTICAL jack ............................................................................ 14 Option menu ................................................................................ 44 P R Radio Data System tuning........................................................... 37 Rear panel...................................................................................... 6 Remote control .............................................................................. 8 Remote control battery installation ............................................... 4 Remote control, Controlling other components .......................... 62 REMOTE ID, Advanced Setup menu ......................................... 66 Repeat playback, iPod/iPhone..................................................... 41 En 81 APPENDIX Index Repeat, Option menu ................................................................... 47 ReturnChan, HDMI Setup ........................................................... 55 S SCENE function........................................................................... 29 Setup menu................................................................................... 48 Shuffle playback, iPod/iPhone..................................................... 41 Shuffle, Option menu................................................................... 47 Signal Info, Option menu............................................................. 46 Sound field program .................................................................... 29 Sound field program parameter setting........................................ 59 Sound Setup ................................................................................. 53 SP IMP., Advanced Setup menu.................................................. 65 Speaker connection ........................................................................ 9 Speaker indicators.......................................................................... 7 Speaker layout.............................................................................. 10 Speaker setting ............................................................................. 23 Speaker Setup............................................................................... 49 Standby Charge, Option menu..................................................... 47 Standby, HDMI Setup.................................................................. 55 Straight decoding mode ............................................................... 30 Subwoofer ...................................................................................... 9 Supplied accessories ...................................................................... 4 Surround back speaker ................................................................... 9 Surround back speaker connection .............................................. 11 Surround speaker ........................................................................... 9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR............................................................... 6 VOLUME...................................................................................... 5 VOLUME indicator ...................................................................... 7 Volume Trim, Option menu........................................................ 45 Y YPAO.......................................................................................... 23 T Test Tone, Speaker Setup ............................................................ 52 Tone control ................................................................................. 28 TrafficProgram, Option menu...................................................... 47 TU, Advanced Setup menu .......................................................... 66 Tuner indicator............................................................................... 7 TV monitor connection ................................................................ 15 TVAudio, HDMI Setup ............................................................... 55 V VIDEO AUX input cover .............................................................. 4 Video cameras connection ........................................................... 21 VIDEO jack ................................................................................. 14 En 82 © 2010 Yamaha Corporation YC504B0/OMEN List of remote control codes Lista de códigos de mando a distancia Liste des codes de commande Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes Liste der Fernbedienungscodes Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder Elenco dei codici di telecomando TV A.R. Systems Acme Acura ADC Admiral 0320 0342 0323, 0343 0337 0054, 0178, 0336, 0337, 0339, 0346, 0347 Advent 0158 Adventura 0057 Adyson 0277, 0282, 0342 Agashi 0277, 0282 Agazi 0337 Aiko 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0343 Aim 0320 Aiwa 0078, 0379 Akai 0050, 0055, 0109, 0159, 0181, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, 0349, 0350 Akiba 0320, 0340 Akura 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340 Alaron 0277 Alba 0161, 0277, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0351, 0372, 0382 Albatron 0140 Alcyon 0171 Alleron 0059 Allorgan 0282 Allstar 0320, 0350 America Action 0179 AMOi 0276 Amplivision 0161, 0282, 0321, 0342 Amstrad 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, 0343 Amtron 0058 Anam 0179, 0343 Anam National 0052, 0058 Anglo 0323, 0343 Anitech 0171, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0343 Ansonic 0161, 0168, 0320, 0323, 0341, 0343 AOC 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053 Apex 0039, 0111, 0217 Arcam 0277, 0282 Arcam Delta 0342 Aristona 0320, 0349, 0350 Arthur Martin 0321 ASA 0339, 0347 Asberg 0171, 0320, 0350 Astra 0343 Asuka 0277, 0282, 0337, 0340, 0342 Atlantic 0277, 0320, 0342, 0349, 0350 Atori 0323, 0343 Auchan 0321 Audiosonic 0161, 0282, 0320, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350 AudioTon 0161, 0282, 0342 Audiovox 0058, 0179, 0194 Ausind 0171 Autovox 0171, 0282, 0337, 0339, 0342 Aventura 0051 Awa 0277, 0282 Axion Baird Bang & Olufsen Basic Line 0156 0282 0180, 0339 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, 0350 Bastide 0282, 0342 Baur 0320, 0349 Bazin 0282 Beko 0161, 0269, 0294, 0302, 0311, 0320, 0328, 0351 Belcor 0008 Bell & Howell 0019, 0054 Benq 0097, 0242, 0361 Beon 0320, 0349, 0350 Best 0161 Bestar 0161, 0320, 0350 Binatone 0282, 0342 Blue Sky 0320, 0340 Blue Star 0348 Boots 0282, 0342 BPL 0320, 0348 Bradford 0058, 0179 Brandt 0322, 0345 Brillian 0182 Brinkmann 0320 Brionvega 0320, 0339, 0349, 0350 Britannia 0277, 0282, 0342 Brockwood 0008 Broksonic 0109, 0179 Bruns 0339 BTC 0340 Bush 0269, 0282, 0283, 0304, 0320, 0323, 0328, 0332, 0340, 0343, 0344, 0346, 0348, 0349, 0350, 0372, 0382, 0463, 0470, 0472 Candle 0008, 0026, 0050, 0057 Capsonic 0337 Carena 0320 Carnivale 0050 Carrefour 0344 Carver 0010 Cascade 0320, 0323, 0343 Casio 0367 Cathay 0320, 0349, 0350 CCE 0183, 0282 Celebrity 0055, 0107 Celera 0039 Centurion 0320, 0349, 0350 Century 0339 CGE 0161, 0171 Changhong 0039 Chimei 0273 Cimline 0323, 0343 Citizen 0007, 0008, 0026, 0050, 0058 City 0323, 0343 Clarion 0179 Clarivox 0349 Clatronic 0161, 0171, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0350, 0351 CMS 0277 CMS Hightec 0282 Coby 0197 Colortyme 0008, 0026 Commercial Solutions 0021 Concerto 0008, 0026 Concorde 0323, 0343 Condor 0161, 0277, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0350, 0351 Contec 0179, 0277, 0323, 0342, 0343, 0344 Contec/Cony 0012, 0058 Continental Edison 0345 Cosmel 0323, 0343 Craig 0058, 0179 Crosley 0010, 0037, 0171, 0339 Crown 0058, 0161, 0171, 0179, 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349, 0350, 0351 CS Electronics 0277, 0340, 0342 CTC Clatronic 0341 CTX 0205 Curtis Mathes 0007, 0008, 0010, 0019, 0021, 0026, 0049, 0050, 0178 CXC 0058, 0179 Cybertron 0340 Cytron 0152 Daewoo 0007, 0008, 0026, 0037, 0053, 0167, 0266, 0275, 0277, 0282, 0315, 0320, 0323, 0331, 0335, 0342, 0343, 0350, 0381, 0465 Dainichi 0277, 0340 Dansai 0277, 0282, 0320, 0337, 0349, 0350 Dantax 0161, 0349 Dawa 0320 Daytron 0007, 0008, 0026, 0323, 0343 De Graaf 0346 Decca 0282, 0320, 0342, 0349, 0350 Dell 0145, 0245 Denver 0358, 0362 Desmet 0320, 0349, 0350 Diamant 0320 Diamond 0277 DiamondVision 0135, 0143 Dimensia 0049 Disney 0219 Dixi 0282, 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349, 0350 Dream Vision 0461, 0498 DTS 0323, 0343 Dual 0282, 0320, 0342 Dual-Tec 0342, 0343 Dumont 0008, 0030, 0062, 0282, 0339, 0341, 0342 Durabrand 0031, 0051, 0179, 0215 Dux 0349 Dwin 0178 Dynatron 0320, 0349, 0350 Dynex 0228, 0231 Elbe 0161, 0168, 0282, 0320 Elcit 0339 Electa 0348 ELECTRO TECH 0343 Electroband 0055, 0107 Electrograph 0176 Electrohome 0008, 0026, 0052, 0055 Element 0230 -1- Elin Elite Elman Elta Emerson Emprex Envision Epson Erres ESA ESC Etron Eurofeel Euro-Feel Euroline Euroman Euromann Europhon Expert Exquisit Fenner Ferguson Fidelity Filsai Finlandia Finlux FIRST LINE Firstline Fisher Flint Formenti Formenti/Phoenix Fortress Fraba Friac Frontech Fujitsu Fujitsu General Fujitsu Siemens Funai Futuretech Galaxi Galaxis Gateway GBC GE Geant Casino GEC Geloso General Technic 0277, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0349, 0350 0320, 0340, 0350 0341 0277, 0323, 0343 0000, 0007, 0008, 0012, 0013, 0019, 0026, 0031, 0037, 0051, 0058, 0059, 0161, 0179, 0320, 0339 0154 0008, 0026, 0050 0155, 0206, 0359 0320, 0349, 0350 0051 0282 0343 0282 0337 0349 0161, 0277, 0282 0320, 0337, 0342, 0350 0277, 0282, 0320, 0341, 0342, 0350 0321 0320 0323, 0343 0322, 0345, 0349 0277, 0320, 0342, 0346 0282 0346 0171, 0282, 0320, 0339, 0341, 0342, 0349, 0350 0342, 0343, 0350 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323 0019, 0161, 0282, 0339, 0342, 0344, 0351 0320, 0350 0171, 0277, 0336, 0339, 0342, 0349 0277 0336, 0339 0161, 0320 0161 0282, 0323, 0337, 0343, 0346, 0347 0059, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0282 0282 0504, 0505, 0507, 0510, 0511 0051, 0058, 0059, 0112, 0113, 0115, 0118, 0119, 0179, 0337 0058, 0179 0320, 0351 0161, 0320 0176, 0177, 0241 0323, 0343, 0344 0008, 0021, 0023, 0026, 0027, 0031, 0034, 0049, 0052, 0056, 0209 0321 0282, 0320, 0342, 0347, 0349, 0350 0323, 0343, 0346 0323, 0343 Genexxa 0320, 0340, 0347, 0350 GFM 0128, 0227 Giant 0282 Gibralter 0008, 0030, 0050, 0062 GoldHand 0277 Goldline 0320 GoldStar 0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031, 0050, 0053, 0161, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0343, 0346, 0349, 0350 Goodmans 0246, 0272, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0350, 0462, 0473, 0477 Gorenje 0161, 0351 GPM 0340 GPX 0129 Gradiente 0240 Graetz 0347 Granada 0171, 0282, 0320, 0321, 0342, 0344, 0346, 0349, 0350 Grandin 0340, 0343, 0348, 0349 Gronic 0282 Grundig 0160, 0161, 0171, 0310, 0320 Grunpy 0058, 0059, 0179 Haier 0157, 0233 Halifax 0277, 0282, 0337, 0342 Hallmark 0008, 0026, 0031 Hampton 0277, 0282, 0342 Hanseatic 0161, 0168, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0350 Hantarex 0320, 0323, 0343 Hantor 0320 Harman/Kardon 0010 Harvard 0058, 0179 Harwood 0320, 0323 Havermy 0178 HCM 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0342, 0343, 0348 Hema 0282, 0323 Hewlett Packard 0192 Higashi 0277 HiLine 0320 Hinari 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0350 Hisawa 0321, 0340, 0348 Hisense 0247 Hitachi 0008, 0012, 0026, 0066, 0084, 0092, 0093, 0120, 0172, 0173, 0255, 0270, 0271, 0282, 0320, 0335, 0338, 0342, 0344, 0346, 0347, 0365, 0382, 0448, 0456, 0467 Hornyphon 0320, 0350 Hoshai 0340 Huanyu 0277, 0342 Hygashi 0277, 0282, 0342 Hyper 0277, 0282, 0323, 0342, 0343 Hypson 0282, 0320, 0321, 0337, 0342, 0348, 0349, 0350 Hyundai 0141 Iberia 0320 ICE 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0350 ICeS 0277 Ilo 0148, 0153 IMA 0058 Imperial 0161, 0171, 0320, 0347, 0350, 0351 Indiana 0320, 0349, 0350 Infinity InFocus 0010 0250, 0327, 0363, 0479, 0508 Ingelen 0347 Ingersol 0323, 0343 Initial 0153 Inno Hit 0171, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350 Innovation 0337, 0343 Insignia 0131, 0228, 0236, 0238 Inteq 0030 Interactive 0161 Interbuy 0323, 0343 Interfunk 0161, 0320, 0339, 0347, 0349, 0350 International 0277 Intervision 0161, 0282, 0320, 0337, 0341, 0342 Irradio 0171, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, 0349, 0350 Isukai 0320, 0340 ITC 0282, 0342 ITS 0277, 0320, 0340, 0348, 0350 ITT 0343, 0347 ITV 0320, 0343, 0349 Janeil 0057 JBL 0010 JC Penney 0007, 0008, 0026, 0027, 0049, 0053, 0056 JCB 0055, 0107 Jensen 0008, 0026 JVC 0012, 0014, 0015, 0056, 0064, 0065, 0067, 0169, 0174, 0297, 0314, 0344, 0350, 0375 Kaisui 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0348 Kamosonic 0342 Kamp 0277, 0342 Kapsch 0347 Karcher 0161, 0320, 0342, 0343, 0349 Kawasho 0008, 0026, 0055, 0277 KEC 0179 Kendo 0161, 0320, 0341, 0346 Kenwood 0008, 0026, 0050 KIC 0282 Kingsley 0277, 0342 KLH 0039 Kloss Novabeam 0057, 0058 Kneissel 0161, 0168, 0320 Kolster 0320, 0350 Konka 0340 Korpel 0320, 0349, 0350 Korting 0161, 0339 Kosmos 0320 Koyoda 0343 KTV 0007, 0050, 0058, 0179, 0183, 0282, 0342 Kyoto 0277, 0282 Lasat 0161 Lenco 0323, 0343 Lenoir 0323, 0342, 0343 Leyco 0320, 0337, 0349, 0350 LG 0031, 0053, 0066, 0116, 0117, 0140, 0161, 0164, 0175, 0195, 0269, 0277, 0282, 0300, 0309, 0317, 0320, 0323, 0328, 0342, 0343, 0346, 0349, 0350, 0366, 0368, 0377, 0466, 0471, 0478 LG/GoldStar 0164 Liesenk 0349 Liesenkotter 0320 Life 0337, 0343 Lifetec 0320, 0323, 0337, 0343 Lloyds 0323 Loewe 0161, 0168, 0265, 0320, 0330, 0352 Loewe Opta 0339, 0349, 0350 Logik 0054 Luma 0320, 0323, 0346, 0349 Lumatron 0282, 0320, 0346, 0349, 0350 Lux May 0350 Luxman 0008, 0026 Luxor 0282, 0342, 0346 LXI 0010, 0019, 0021, 0026, 0027, 0031, 0049, 0111 M Electronic 0342, 0343, 0345, 0347, 0349, 0350 MAG 0096 Magnadyne 0339, 0341, 0349 Magnafon 0171, 0277, 0341, 0342 Magnavox 0008, 0009, 0010, 0013, 0026, 0032, 0033, 0048, 0050, 0128, 0211, 0212, 0224, 0226, 0239 Magnum 0337, 0343 Majestic 0054 Mandor 0337 Manesth 0282, 0320, 0337, 0342, 0349, 0350 Marantz 0008, 0010, 0026, 0050, 0204, 0320, 0349, 0350 Marelli 0339 Mark 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0349, 0350 Masuda 0282 Matsui 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0343, 0344, 0346, 0349, 0350, 0455 Matsushita 0017 Maxent 0147, 0176 Mediator 0320, 0349, 0350 Medion 0320, 0337, 0343 Megapower 0140 Megatron 0026, 0031 MElectronic 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323 Melvox 0321 Memorex 0019, 0026, 0031, 0053, 0054, 0137, 0215, 0323, 0343 Memphis 0323, 0343 Mercury 0320, 0323 Metz 0339 MGA 0008, 0026, 0031, 0050, 0053 Micromaxx 0337, 0343 Microstar 0337, 0343 Midland 0007, 0021, 0023, 0027, 0030, 0056, 0062 Minerva 0171 Minoka 0320, 0350 Mintek 0153 Mitsubishi 0008, 0026, 0031, 0053, 0066, 0084, 0093, 0098, 0150, 0178, 0289, 0320, 0339, 0344, 0350, 0376 Mivar 0161, 0168, 0171, 0277, 0282, 0342 Monivision 0140 Montgomery Ward 0054 Motion 0171 Motorola 0052, 0178 MTC 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053, 0161, 0277 Multi System 0349 -2- Multitech Murphy NAD Naonis NEC Neckermann NEI Net-TV Neufunk New Tech New World NewTech Nicamagic Nikkai Nikko Nobliko Nokia Norcent Nordic Nordmende Nordvision Novatronic Oceanic Okano Olevia ONCEAS Onwa Opera Oppo Optimus Optoma Optonica Orbit Orion Orline Osaki Oso Otto Versand Pael Palladium Palsonic Panama Panasonic Panavision Pathe Cinema Pausa Penney Perdio Perfekt Philco Philharmonic Philips 0058, 0161, 0179, 0183, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0341, 0342, 0343, 0344, 0346, 0349 0277, 0342 0026, 0031, 0111 0346 0008, 0026, 0050, 0052, 0053, 0072, 0103, 0282, 0344 0161, 0282, 0320, 0339, 0342, 0346, 0349, 0350, 0351 0320, 0349, 0350 0176 0320, 0323 0343, 0350 0340 0282, 0320, 0323 0277, 0342 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, 0342, 0349, 0350 0026, 0031, 0050 0171, 0277, 0341, 0342 0347 0201 0282 0339, 0345, 0347, 0350 0349 0320 0321, 0347 0161, 0320, 0351 0102, 0199, 0200, 0207, 0222 0342 0058, 0179 0320 0130 0017, 0019 0144 0178 0320, 0350 0043, 0146, 0283, 0320, 0323, 0328, 0343, 0349, 0350 0320 0282, 0320, 0337, 0340, 0342 0340 0282, 0320, 0336, 0342, 0344, 0348, 0349, 0350 0277, 0342 0161, 0282, 0320, 0342, 0351 0282 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0342, 0343 0016, 0017, 0020, 0022, 0023, 0035, 0052, 0056, 0084, 0085, 0133, 0163, 0193, 0284, 0286, 0290, 0292, 0320, 0325, 0347, 0356 0320 0161, 0168, 0277, 0321, 0342 0323, 0343 0021, 0023, 0031, 0050, 0111 0277, 0320 0320 0008, 0009, 0010, 0012, 0026, 0050, 0052, 0053, 0161, 0171, 0320, 0339 0282, 0342 0008, 0009, 0010, 0011, 0012, 0032, 0048, 0049, 0052, 0122, 0128, 0134, 0186, 0187, 0213, 0221, 0224, 0226, 0239, 0256, 0257, 0259, 0261, 0263, 0267, 0280, 0281, 0287, 0296, 0299, 0301, 0303, 0305, 0313, 0319, 0320, 0324, 0333, 0339, 0342, 0349, 0350, 0353, 0357, 0360, 0380, 0383, 0452, 0459, 0460 Philips Magnavox 0011, 0032, 0033 Phoenix 0161, 0277, 0320, 0339, 0349, 0350 Phonola 0277, 0320, 0339, 0349, 0350 Pilot 0007, 0008, 0050 Pioneer 0008, 0026, 0094, 0095, 0161, 0320, 0345, 0347, 0349, 0350, 0458 Plantron 0320, 0323, 0337, 0350 Playsonic 0282 Polaroid 0039, 0142, 0202, 0234 Poppy 0323, 0343 Portland 0007, 0008, 0026, 0053 Prandoni-Prince 0171, 0346 Precision 0282, 0342 Prima 0157, 0243, 0323, 0343, 0347 Princeton 0140 Prism 0023, 0056 Profex 0323, 0343 Profi-Tronic 0320, 0350 Proline 0320, 0350 Proscan 0021, 0027, 0049 Prosonic 0161, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0342, 0349 Protech 0282, 0337, 0341, 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350 Proton 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031 Protron 0196 PROVIEW 0096, 0246 Provision 0320, 0349 Pulsar 0008, 0030, 0062 Pye 0256, 0320, 0349, 0350, 0378 Pymi 0323, 0343 Quandra Vision 0321 Quasar 0017, 0023, 0052, 0056 Quelle 0282, 0320, 0337, 0342, 0349, 0350 Questa 0344 Radialva 0320 RadioShack 0019, 0021, 0031, 0050, 0179, 0320 RadioShack/Realistic 0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0049, 0058 Radiola 0282, 0320, 0349, 0350 Radiomarelli 0320, 0339 Radiotone 0161, 0320, 0323, 0350 Rank 0344 RCA 0008, 0021, 0024, 0025, 0026, 0027, 0042, 0049, 0052, 0053, 0063, 0136, 0225 Realistic 0019, 0031, 0050, 0179 Recor 0320 Redstar 0320 Reflex 0320 Revox 0161, 0320, 0349, 0350 Rex 0337, 0346, 0347 RFT 0161, 0168, 0339 Rhapsody 0277 R-Line 0320, 0349, 0350 Roadstar 0323, 0337, 0340, 0343 Robotron Rowa Royal Lux RTF Runco Saba 0339 0277, 0282 0161 0339 0030, 0050, 0062 0298, 0322, 0339, 0345, 0347 Saisho 0282, 0323, 0337, 0342, 0343 Salora 0346, 0347 Sambers 0171, 0341 Sampo 0007, 0008, 0026, 0050, 0176 Samsung 0004, 0005, 0006, 0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031, 0036, 0050, 0053, 0076, 0077, 0079, 0114, 0124, 0125, 0126, 0127, 0139, 0161, 0183, 0185, 0190, 0191, 0258, 0264, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0334, 0337, 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350, 0351, 0373, 0453, 0468 Sandra 0277, 0282, 0342 Sansui 0043, 0109, 0320, 0350 Sanyo 0008, 0019, 0068, 0070, 0071, 0099, 0161, 0168, 0223, 0237, 0277, 0282, 0288, 0295, 0323, 0342, 0344, 0369, 0469 SBR 0320, 0349 Sceptre 0235, 0244 Schaub Lorenz 0347 Schneider 0282, 0316, 0318, 0320, 0333, 0340, 0342, 0349, 0350, 0382 Scotch 0026, 0031 Scott 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031, 0058, 0059, 0149, 0179 Sears 0008, 0010, 0019, 0021, 0026, 0027, 0031, 0049, 0051, 0059, 0111 SEG 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0341, 0342, 0344, 0349, 0382 SEI 0320 SEI-Sinudyne 0339, 0341, 0347 Seleco 0344, 0346, 0347 Sencora 0323, 0343 Sentra 0323 Serino 0277 Sharp 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0060, 0088, 0089, 0091, 0138, 0165, 0170, 0178, 0198, 0229, 0262, 0278, 0279, 0291, 0308, 0312, 0336, 0344, 0354, 0370, 0449, 0450, 0451, 0464, 0474, 0476 Sheng Chia 0178 Shogun 0008 Siarem 0320, 0339, 0341 Sierra 0320, 0350 Siesta 0161 Signature 0054 Silva 0277 Silver 0344 Singer 0321, 0339, 0341 Sinudyne 0320, 0339, 0341, 0349 Skantic 0347 Solavox 0347 Sonitron 0161, 0282 Sonoko 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350 Sonolor 0321, 0347 Sontec 0161, 0320, 0349, 0350 Sony 0038, 0044, 0045, 0047, 0055, 0104, 0105, 0107, 0110, 0123, 0184, 0220, 0248, 0249, 0251, 0252, 0254, 0326, 0343, 0344, 0371, 0374, 0457, 0475 Sound & Vision 0340, 0341 Soundesign 0008, 0026, 0031, 0058, 0059, 0179 Soundwave 0320, 0349, 0350 Squareview 0051 SSS 0008, 0058, 0179 Standard 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0350 Starlite 0058, 0179, 0320, 0323, 0349 Stenway 0348 Stern 0346, 0347 Strato 0320, 0323 Stylandia 0282 Sunkai 0343 Sunstar 0320, 0323 Sunwood 0320, 0323, 0343, 0350 Superla 0277, 0282, 0342 Superscan 0013, 0178 SuperTech 0277, 0320, 0323 Supra 0323, 0343 Supre-Macy 0057 Supreme 0055, 0107 Susumu 0340 Sutron 0323, 0343 SVA 0151 Sydney 0277, 0282, 0342 Sylvania 0008, 0009, 0010, 0011, 0013, 0026, 0048, 0050, 0051, 0128, 0227, 0253 Symphonic 0051, 0058, 0062, 0128, 0179, 0215 Syntax 0199 Syntax-Brillian 0199 Sysline 0349 Sytong 0277 Tandy 0178, 0282, 0336, 0340, 0342, 0347 Tashiko 0277, 0282, 0342, 0344, 0346 Tatung 0052, 0177, 0282, 0320, 0342, 0349, 0350 TCM 0337, 0343 Teac 0282, 0320 Tec 0282, 0323, 0342, 0343 Technics 0017, 0023, 0056 TechniSat 0274, 0496, 0497, 0499 Techwood 0008, 0023, 0026, 0056 TEDELEX 0282 Teknika 0007, 0008, 0010, 0012, 0026, 0053, 0054, 0058, 0059, 0179 Teleavia 0345 Telecor 0282, 0320 Telefunken 0320, 0322, 0345, 0350 Telegazi 0320 Telemeister 0320 Telesonic 0320 Telestar 0320 Teletech 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349 Teleton 0282, 0342 Televideon 0277 Televiso 0321 Tensai 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, 0350 -3- Tesmet Tevion Texet 0350 0337, 0343 0277, 0282, 0323, 0342 Thomson 0162, 0188, 0189, 0285, 0320, 0322, 0342, 0345, 0350 Thorn 0320, 0349 TMK 0008, 0026, 0031 TNCi 0030 Tokai 0282, 0320, 0350 Tokyo 0277, 0342 Tomashi 0348 Toshiba 0018, 0019, 0040, 0041, 0046, 0073, 0100, 0103, 0108, 0109, 0111, 0121, 0132, 0166, 0208, 0210, 0214, 0217, 0260, 0268, 0282, 0283, 0293, 0304, 0306, 0307, 0329, 0344, 0355, 0454 Totevision 0007 Towada 0282, 0347 Trakton 0282 Trans Continens 0282, 0320 Transtec 0277 Trident 0282 Triumph 0320 Uher 0161, 0171, 0320, 0347, 0350 Ultravox 0277, 0320, 0339, 0341, 0342 Unic Line 0320 United 0349 Universum 0161, 0171, 0282, 0320, 0337, 0349, 0350, 0351 Univox 0320 Vector Research 0050 Vestel 0282, 0320, 0346, 0347, 0349, 0350, 0351 Vexa 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349 Victor 0015, 0344, 0350 VIDEOLOGIC 0277 Videologique 0277, 0282, 0340, 0342 VideoSystem 0320, 0350 Videotechnic 0277, 0282 Vidikron 0010 Vidtech 0008, 0026, 0031, 0053 Viewsonic 0176, 0203, 0232, 0364 Viking 0057 Viore 0148 Visiola 0277, 0342 Vision 0282, 0320, 0350 Vizio 0008, 0177, 0218, 0242, 0500, 0501, 0502, 0503, 0506 Vortec 0320, 0349, 0350 Voxson 0171, 0320, 0339, 0346, 0347, 0350 Waltham 0282, 0320, 0342 Wards 0008, 0009, 0010, 0026, 0031, 0048, 0049, 0050, 0053, 0054, 0059 Watson 0320, 0349, 0350 Watt Radio 0277, 0341, 0342 Waycon 0111 Wega 0320, 0339, 0344 Wegavox 0323 Weltblick 0282, 0320, 0349, 0350 Westinghouse 0107, 0216, 0220 White Westinghouse 0037, 0090, 0277, 0320, 0341, 0342, 0349 Wincom 0101, 0106 Xrypton 0320 Yamaha Yamishi Yokan Yoko Yorx Zanussi Zenith 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053, 0080, 0081, 0082, 0083, 0086, 0087 0282, 0320 0320 0161, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350 0340 0282, 0346 0008, 0028, 0029, 0030, 0031, 0054, 0061, 0062 VCR ABS Adventura Adyson Aiwa 1016 1069 1008 1024, 1026, 1027, 1069 Akai 1021, 1027 Akiba 1008, 1029 Akura 1008, 1027, 1029 Alba 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029, 1030 Alienware 1016 Ambassador 1030 American High 1068 Amstrad 1008, 1009, 1026 Anitech 1008, 1029 Apex 1088 ASA 1028, 1031 Asha 1070 Asuka 1008, 1026, 1028, 1029, 1031 Audio Dynamics 1064 Audiosonic 1009 Audiovox 1071 Baird 1009, 1025, 1026, 1027 Bang & Olufsen 1017 Basic Line 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029, 1030 Baur 1028 Beaumark 1070 Bell & Howell 1065 Bestar 1009, 1025, 1030 Black Panther Line 1009, 1025 Blaupunkt 1028 Bondstec 1008, 1030 Broksonic 1100 Bush 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029, 1049, 1051, 1063, 1217 Calix 1071 Candle 1070, 1071 Canon 1068 Cathay 1009 Catron 1030 CGE 1026, 1027 Cimline 1008, 1024, 1029 CineVision 1104 Citizen 1070, 1071 Clatronic 1008, 1030 Colortyme 1064 Condor 1009, 1025, 1030 Craig 1070, 1071 Crown 1008, 1009, 1025, 1029, 1030 Curtis Mathes 1064, 1068, 1070 Cybernex 1070 CyberPower 1016 Daewoo 1009, 1025, 1030, 1038, 1069, 1223 Dansai 1008, 1009, 1029 Dantax 1024 Daytron 1009, 1025 DBX 1064 De Graaf 1028 Decca 1026, 1027, 1028 Dell 1016 Denko 1008 DiamondVision 1096 DigiFusion 1014 DIRECTV 1019, 1105, 1110, 1111, 1113, 1116, 1122 Dish Network 1018 Dishpro 1018 Dual 1009, 1027, 1028 Dumont 1026, 1028 Durabrand 1114 Dynatech 1069 Echostar 1018 Elbe 1009 Elcatech 1008 Electrohome 1071 Electrophonic 1071 Elsay 1008 Elta 1008, 1009, 1029 Emerson 1008, 1020, 1068, 1069, 1071 ESC 1009, 1025 Etzuko 1008, 1029 Expressvu 1018 Ferguson 1027 Fidelity 1008, 1026 Finlandia 1028 Finlux 1026, 1027, 1028 Firstline 1008, 1024, 1029, 1031 Fisher 1065 Flint 1024 Formenti/Phoenix 1028 Frontech 1030 Fuji 1068 Fujitsu 1026 Funai 1026, 1069 Galaxy 1026 Garrard 1069 Gateway 1016 GBC 1029, 1030 GE 1068, 1070 GEC 1028 Geloso 1029 General 1030 General Technic 1024 GOI 1018 GoldHand 1008, 1029 Goldstar 1026, 1031, 1064, 1071 Goodmans 1008, 1009, 1025, 1026, 1029, 1030, 1031 Gradiente 1069 Graetz 1027 Granada 1028 Grandin 1008, 1009, 1025, 1026, 1029, 1030, 1031 Grundig 1028, 1029 Hanseatic 1009, 1028, 1031 Harley Davidson 1069 Harman/Kardon 1064 Harwood 1008 HCM 1008, 1029 Headquarter 1065 Hewlett Packard 1016 Hinari 1008, 1009, 1024, 1029 Hisawa 1024 Hitachi 1011, 1026, 1027, 1028, 1046, 1062 HNS 1110 Howard Computers 1016 HP 1016 HTS 1018 Hughes 1111, 1113, 1122 Hughes Network Systems 1110, 1116 Humax 1012, 1110, 1113 Hush 1016 Hypson 1008, 1009, 1024, 1029 iBUYPOWER 1016 Impego 1030 Imperial 1026 Inno Hit 1008, 1009, 1025, 1028, 1029, 1030 Innovation 1024 Instant Replay 1068 Interbuy 1008, 1031 Interfunk Intervision Irradio ITT ITV JC Penney 1028 1009, 1026 1008, 1029, 1031 1027 1009, 1025, 1031 1064, 1065, 1068, 1070, 1071 JCL 1068 JVC 1007, 1018, 1027, 1039, 1064, 1065, 1066, 1067, 1078, 1089, 1092, 1093, 1094, 1095, 1113, 1208, 1209, 1212, 1213, 1215, 1218 Kaisui 1008, 1029 Karcher 1028 Kendo 1008, 1024, 1025, 1030 Kenwood 1027, 1064, 1065 Kodak 1068, 1071 Korpel 1008, 1029 Kyoto 1008 Lenco 1025 Leyco 1008, 1029 LG 1010, 1026, 1031, 1047, 1054, 1056, 1071, 1103, 1221 Lifetec 1024 Linksys 1016 Lloyd's 1069 Loewe Opta 1028, 1031 Logik 1008, 1029 Lumatron 1009, 1025 Luxor 1008 LXI 1071 M Electronic 1026 Magnavox 1020, 1068, 1114, 1126 Magnin 1071 Manesth 1008, 1029 Marantz 1028, 1064, 1065, 1068 Mark 1009 Marta 1071 Matsui 1024, 1031 Matsushita 1068 Media Center PC 1016 Mediator 1028 Medion 1024 MEI 1068 Memorex 1023, 1026, 1031, 1065, 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071, 1098, 1114 Memphis 1008, 1029 MGN Technology 1070 Micromaxx 1024 Microsoft 1016 Microstar 1024 Migros 1026 Mind 1016 Mitsubishi 1026, 1028, 1079 Motorola 1068 MTC 1070 Multitech 1008, 1026, 1028, 1029, 1030, 1069, 1070 Murphy 1026 NEC 1027, 1064, 1065 Neckermann 1027, 1028 NEI 1028 Nesco 1008, 1029 Nikkai 1008, 1009, 1030 Nikko 1071 Niveus Media 1016 Noblex 1070 Nokia 1009, 1027 Nordmende 1027 Northgate 1016 Oceanic 1026, 1027 Okano 1008, 1009, 1024 Olympus 1068 Optimus 1071 Orion 1023, 1024, 1051, 1115, 1217 Orson 1026 Osaki 1008, 1026, 1029, 1031 -4- Otto Versand Palladium 1028 1008, 1027, 1029, 1031 Panasonic 1000, 1022, 1044, 1055, 1068, 1072, 1085, 1090, 1091, 1120, 1121, 1214 Pathe Marconi 1027 Perdio 1026 Philco 1008, 1068 Philips 1006, 1013, 1028, 1035, 1040, 1045, 1046, 1050, 1058, 1059, 1061, 1068, 1076, 1101, 1110, 1113, 1116, 1117, 1122, 1126, 1210, 1211 Philips Magnavox 1076 Phonola 1028 Pilot 1071 Pioneer 1028, 1036 Polaroid 1088, 1099 Portland 1009, 1025, 1030 Prinz 1026 Profex 1029 Proline 1026 Proscan 1019 Prosonic 1009, 1024 Pulsar 1114 Pye 1028, 1102 Quarter 1065 Quartz 1065 Quasar 1068 Quelle 1026, 1028 Radialva 1008 RadioShack 1071 RadioShack/Realistic 1065, 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071 Radiola 1028 Radix 1071 Randex 1071 RCA 1019, 1068, 1070, 1075, 1110, 1113, 1122, 1125 Realistic 1065, 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071 ReplayTV 1022, 1123 Rex 1027 RFT 1008, 1028, 1030 Ricavision 1016 Roadstar 1008, 1009, 1025, 1029, 1031 Royal 1008 Runco 1114 Saba 1027 Saisho 1024, 1029 Samsung 1002, 1034, 1041, 1043, 1057, 1060, 1070, 1084, 1110, 1116, 1122, 1124, 1220, 1222 Samurai 1008, 1030 Sanky 1114 Sansui 1023, 1027, 1106, 1115 Sanyo 1032, 1065, 1070 Saville 1009 SBR 1028 Schaub Lorenz 1026, 1027 Schneider 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1026, 1028, 1029, 1030, 1031 Sears 1065, 1068, 1071 SEG 1008, 1009, 1029 SEI-Sinudyne 1028 Seleco 1027 Sentra 1008, 1030 Sentron 1008, 1029 Sharp 1003, 1033, 1077, 1107, 1127, 1219 Shintom 1008, 1029 Shivaki 1031 Shogun 1070 Siemens 1031 Silva 1031 Silver 1009 Singer 1068 Sinudyne Solavox Sonic Blue Sonneclair Sonoko Sontec Sony 1028 1030 1022, 1123 1008 1009, 1025 1031 1001, 1016, 1048, 1053, 1073, 1074, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083, 1108, 1118, 1216 Stack 1016 Stack 9 1016 Standard 1009, 1025 Stern 1009 STS 1068 Sunkai 1024 Sunstar 1026 Suntronic 1026 Sunwood 1008, 1029 Superscan 1020 Sylvania 1020, 1068, 1069, 1102, 1126 Symphonic 1008, 1069, 1126 Systemax 1016 Tagar Systems 1016 Taisho 1024 Tandberg 1009 Tandy 1065 Tashiko 1026, 1071 Tatung 1026, 1027, 1028 TCM 1015, 1024, 1042 Teac 1009, 1069 Tec 1008, 1009, 1030 Technics 1068 Teknika 1068, 1069, 1071 Teleavia 1027 Telefunken 1027 Teletech 1008, 1009 Tenosal 1008, 1029 Tensai 1008, 1026, 1029, 1031 Tevion 1024 Thomson 1005, 1027 Thorn 1027 Tivo 1108, 1110, 1111, 1113, 1117, 1118, 1119, 1122 TMK 1070 Tokai 1008, 1029, 1031 Tonsai 1029 Toshiba 1004, 1016, 1027, 1028, 1037, 1049, 1052, 1086, 1087, 1097, 1109, 1112, 1194 Totevision 1070, 1071 Touch 1016 Towada 1008, 1029 Towika 1008, 1029 TVA 1030 Uher 1031 UltimateTV 1019 Ultravox 1009 Unitech 1070 United Quick Star 1009, 1025 Universum 1026, 1028, 1031 Vector Research 1064 Video Concepts 1064 Videon 1024 Videosonic 1070 Viewsonic 1016 Voodoo 1016 Wards 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071 Weltblick 1031 XR-1000 1068, 1069 Yamaha 1064, 1065 Yamishi 1008, 1029 Yokan 1008, 1029 Yoko 1008, 1029, 1030, 1031 Zenith 1114 ZT Group 1016 DVD 4Kus 2051 Accurian Advent AEG Airis Aiwa Akai 2142 2155, 2251 2362 2364 2322 2145, 2177, 2179, 2248 Akura 2356 Alba 2064, 2165, 2186, 2337, 2346 Alco 2149 Alize 2361 Allegro 2133 Amitech 2362 Amphion MediaWorks 2195 AMW 2195, 2363 Apex 2030, 2124, 2125, 2126, 2127, 2130, 2131 Apple 2241 Arrgo 2138 Asono 2364 Aspire 2152, 2222 Astar 2240 ATACOM 2364 Audiovox 2061, 2149 Avious 2367 Awa 2363 Axion 2249 Bang & Olufsen 2128 Baze 2367 BBK 2364 Bellagio 2363 Best Buy 2359 Blaupunkt 2131 Blue Parade 2157 Boghe 2382 Brainwave 2362 Brandt 2148, 2188 Broksonic 2145, 2146 Bush 2064, 2110, 2170, 2268, 2290, 2346, 2358, 2367, 2383 California Audio Labs 2151 Cambridge Audio 2354 CAT 2352, 2353 CAVS 2192 Centrum 2353 CGV 2354, 2362 Changhong 2140 Cinetec 2363 CineVision 2133, 2237 Clatronic 2358, 2367 Coby 2031, 2046, 2360 Conia 2383 Continental Edison 2363 Crown 2362 C-Tech 2355 Curtis Mathes 2139 CVG 2377 CyberHome 2022, 2098, 2138, 2187, 2336 Cytron 2244 Daenyx 2363 Daewoo 2001, 2133, 2276, 2298, 2330, 2362, 2363, 2377 Daewoo International 2363 Dalton 2357 Dansai 2362, 2381 Daytek 2184, 2195, 2363 Dayton 2363 DEC 2358 Decca 2362 Denon 2059, 2151, 2193, 2332 Denver 2356, 2358, 2360, 2370 Denzel 2380 Desay 2205 Diamond 2354, 2355 DiamondVision 2225, 2232 Disney 2010, 2028 DK Digital 2339 Dmtech 2176 Dual 2380 Durabrand 2136 DVX 2355 Easy Home 2359 Eclipse 2354 E-Dem 2364 Electrohome 2362 Elin 2362 Elta 2341, 2361, 2362 Emerson 2129, 2137, 2150 Enterprise 2129 Enzer 2380 Epson 2247 ESA 2137 Finlux 2354, 2362, 2367 Fintec 2377 Fisher 2134 Funai 2137 Gateway 2051 GE 2029, 2131, 2156 Gericom 2351 GFM 2226 Giec 2382 Global Solutions 2355 Global Sphere 2355 Go Video 2133, 2213 Goodmans 2165, 2280, 2291, 2358, 2371, 2376, 2382 GPX 2227 Gradiente 2151 Graetz 2380 Greenhill 2131 Grundig 2349 Grunkel 2362, 2366 GVG 2377 H&B 2358 H_her 2364 Haaz 2354, 2355 Haier 2254 Harman/Kardon 2047, 2135 HiMAX 2359 Hitachi 2062, 2090, 2115, 2274, 2282, 2316, 2359, 2380 Hiteker 2130 Home Tech Industries 2364 Hyundai 2366 Ilo 2245 Initial 2131, 2245 Innovation 2182 Insignia 2002, 2137, 2253 Integra 2157 Irradio 2053 iSymphony 2246 JBL 2135 JVC 2020, 2096, 2097, 2099, 2100, 2101, 2102, 2103, 2106, 2107, 2160, 2257, 2260, 2262, 2263, 2321, 2324, 2326, 2327, 2343, 2464, 2465, 2468, 2469, 2471 Jwin 2198 Kansai 2360 Kawasaki 2149 Kennex 2362 Kenwood 2041, 2151, 2348 KeyPlug 2362 Kiiro 2362 Kingavon 2358 Kiss 2380 KLH 2131, 2149 Koda 2358 Koss 2013, 2148, 2158 KXD 2359 Landel 2143 Lasonic 2132 Lawson 2355 Lecson 2381 Lenco 2358, 2362, 2367 Lenoxx 2136, 2153 -5- LG Life Lifetec Limit Liquid Video Liteon Loewe LogicLab Magnavox Magnex Majestic Marantz Marquant Matsui McIntosh Mecotek Medion Memorex MiCO Micromaxx Microsoft Microstar Minoka Minowa Mintek Mitsubishi Mizuda Monyka Mustek Mx Onda Mystral Naiko Nesa Neufunk Nevir Next Base Nexxtech NU-TEC Onkyo Oopla Oppo Optim Optimus Orava Orbit Orion Oritron P&B Pacific Panasonic Parasound peeKTON Philips Phonotrend Pioneer 2002, 2033, 2038, 2057, 2129, 2133, 2189, 2191, 2223, 2238, 2270, 2288, 2335, 2373, 2375 2182 2182 2355 2158 2043, 2051, 2142 2320 2355 2025, 2050, 2137, 2150, 2159, 2224, 2230, 2358 2367 2360 2328 2362 2148, 2378 2199 2362 2182 2028, 2145, 2234 2354, 2382 2182 2156 2182 2362 2367 2131, 2245 2003 2358, 2359 2380 2186 2354 2366 2362 2131 2380 2362 2143 2243 2383 2159, 2368 2051 2196, 2255 2381 2180 2358 2363 2073, 2110 2148, 2158 2358 2355 2011, 2024, 2034, 2042, 2058, 2062, 2066, 2067, 2093, 2116, 2117, 2118, 2119, 2120, 2121, 2122, 2123, 2151, 2159, 2164, 2166, 2167, 2172, 2173, 2175, 2209, 2214, 2275, 2277, 2278, 2281, 2282, 2283, 2301, 2374, 2470 2197 2364 2008, 2012, 2025, 2044, 2050, 2051, 2053, 2060, 2072, 2108, 2111, 2147, 2159, 2163, 2169, 2174, 2181, 2185, 2230, 2261, 2266, 2267, 2286, 2287, 2289, 2295, 2300, 2302, 2317, 2328, 2338, 2342, 2350, 2467 2367 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2035, 2092, 2094, 2095, 2109, 2157, 2180, 2190, 2212, 2269, 2272, 2299, 2304, 2305, 2306, 2307, 2308, 2309, 2310, 2311, 2344, 2345, 2347, 2379 Pointer 2362 Polaroid 2125, 2215, 2235 Portland 2362 Powerpoint 2363 Prima 2252 Proceed 2130 Proscan 2156 Prosonic 2360, 2377 Protron 2202 Provision 2358 Pye 2144 Qwestar 2148 Raite 2380 RCA 2021, 2029, 2104, 2105, 2131, 2149, 2156, 2157, 2229 RedStar 2356, 2360, 2362 Regent 2153 Reoc 2355 Rimax 2361 Rio 2133 Roadstar 2331, 2358 Ronin 2363 Rotel 2203 Rowa 2154, 2383 Rownsonic 2353 Saba 2148, 2188 Sabaki 2355 Saivod 2362 Sampo 2141 Samsung 2000, 2045, 2077, 2112, 2113, 2114, 2115, 2151, 2200, 2216, 2219, 2228, 2264, 2265, 2271, 2279, 2294, 2303, 2329, 2365 Sansui 2073, 2145, 2354, 2355, 2362 Sanyo 2134, 2145, 2217, 2292 ScanMagic 2186 Schaub Lorenz 2362 Schneider 2176 Scientific Labs 2355 Scott 2161, 2357 Seeltech 2364 SEG 2162, 2355, 2363, 2380 Sharp 2006, 2040, 2088, 2091, 2182, 2194, 2220, 2221, 2231, 2236, 2293, 2340 Shinsonic 2245 Sigmatek 2359, 2364 Silva 2356 Singer 2354, 2355 Skymaster 2325, 2355 Skyworth 2356 Slim Art 2362 SM Electronic 2355 Sonic Blue 2133 Sontech 2366 Sony 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009, 2014, 2015, 2023, 2026, 2027, 2052, 2068, 2069, 2070, 2071, 2074, 2075, 2084, 2085, 2087, 2168, 2171, 2208, 2210, 2211, 2258, 2273, 2284, 2285, 2312, 2313, 2314, 2315, 2318, 2319, 2466 Soundmaster 2355 Soundmax 2355 Spectra 2363 Spectroniq 2201 Standard 2355 Star Cluster 2355 Starmedia 2358, 2364 Sungale 2204 Sunkai 2362 Superscan 2150 Supervision 2355 Sylvania 2012, 2137, 2150, 2178, 2230, 2239 Symphonic 2108, 2230 Synn 2355 T.D.E. Systems 2366 Tatung 2001, 2362 TCM 2182, 2297 Teac 2149, 2333, 2355, 2383 Tec 2356 Technics 2151 Technika 2362, 2367 Telefunken 2353 Tensai 2362 Tevion 2182, 2355, 2357 Theta Digital 2157 Thomson 2183, 2188, 2334, 2372 Tokai 2356, 2380 Top Suxess 2364 Toshiba 2032, 2036, 2037, 2039, 2048, 2049, 2054, 2055, 2072, 2073, 2076, 2078, 2079, 2086, 2145, 2159, 2218, 2233, 2256, 2259, 2296, 2369 TRANScontinents 2363, 2367 Transonic 2367 Trio 2362 Trutech 2242 TruVision 2359 TSM 2364 Umax 2361 United 2367 Urban Concepts 2159 US Logic 2245 Venturer 2149 Viewmaster 2364 Vocopro 2206 VocoStar 2207 Waitec 2364 Welltech 2382 Westinghouse 2063, 2250 Wharfedale 2354, 2355 Woxter 2361, 2364 Xbox 2156, 2183 Xlogic 2355, 2362 XMS 2362 Xoro 2382 Yamada 2051, 2361, 2363 Yamaha 2056, 2064, 2065, 2080, 2081, 2082, 2083, 2089, 2118, 2151, 2323 Yamakawa 2363, 2380 Yukai 2186 Zenith 2002, 2129, 2133, 2159, 2223 Blu-ray Disc LG Panasonic Pioneer Samsung Sharp Sony Yamaha 2033 2011, 2209, 2214 2212 2045, 2113 2194, 2220, 2221 2075 2064 DVR Bush Hitachi Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA Samsung Sharp Sony Toshiba Yamaha 2110 2090 2066, 2067, 2093, 2116, 2117, 2119, 2120, 2122, 2123 2108, 2111 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2092, 2094, 2095, 2109 2105 2113, 2219 2088, 2091 2084, 2085, 2087 2086 2089, 2118 DVD Recorder Aspire Astar Broksonic Go Video Hitachi Insignia Irradio JVC LG Liteon Panasonic Philips Pioneer Pye Samsung Sansui Sanyo Sony Sylvania Toshiba Yamaha 2222 2240 2146 2213 2062 2002 2053 2100, 2101, 2106, 2107 2033, 2057, 2223, 2238 2043 2011, 2034, 2058, 2062, 2116, 2117, 2119, 2120, 2121, 2123 2008, 2044, 2050, 2051, 2147 2017, 2035 2144 2000, 2112, 2216 2073 2217 2004, 2005, 2007, 2052, 2068, 2069, 2074, 2208, 2210, 2211 2239 2032, 2036, 2037, 2039, 2049, 2054, 2055, 2076 2056 Cable ABC 3002, 3003, 3017, 3066, 3067, 3086, 3093, 3119, 3122 ADB 3020 Adelphia 3081 Alcatel 3016 Americast 3124 Amstrad 3022, 3098 Antronix 3065, 3070 Archer 3070 Arcon 3098 AT&T 3095 Axis 3098 Bell South 3124 Cable Vision 3092 Cabletenna 3065 Cabletime 3104 Cableview 3087 Clearmaster 3127 ClearMax 3127 Clyde Cablevision 3105 Colour Voice 3068 Comcast 3084, 3088, 3117 Comcrypt 3107 Comtronics 3069 Contec 3074 Coolmax 3127 COX 3084 Cryptovision 3110 Director 3084 Eastern 3075 Everquest 3123 Fidelity 3098 Filmnet 3107 Filmnet Cablecrypt 3111 Filmnet Comcrypt 3111 Finlux 3097 Focus 3126 Foxtel 3022 France Telecom 3100, 3101 Freebox 3023 GC Electronics 3070 GE 3066, 3093 GEC 3105 Gemini 3072, 3123 General Instrument 3017, 3025, 3066, 3084, 3090, 3096, 3117 -6- Goldstar Gooding Grundig Hamlin Hirschmann Hitachi HomeChoice Humax ITT Nokia Jasco Jerrold 3120 3099 3098, 3099 3073, 3078 3097 3066 3106 3021, 3080, 3083 3097 3123 3017, 3018, 3025, 3066, 3072, 3084, 3090, 3096, 3119, 3123 JVC 3099 Kabel Deutschland 3024, 3027, 3121 Macab 3101 Magnavox 3079 Maspro 3099 Matsui 3099 MegaCable 3117 Memorex 3076, 3122 Minerva 3099 Mnet 3107 Motorola 3025, 3026, 3084, 3088, 3090, 3095, 3117 Movie Time 3077, 3109 Mr Zapp 3101 Multichoice 3107 Multitech 3127 NEC 3064 NET Brazil 3085 Nokia 3097 Noos 3101 NSC 3077 Oak 3074 Pace 3006, 3089, 3121 Palladium 3099 Panasonic 3112, 3118, 3122 Paragon 3122 Philips 3068, 3071, 3079, 3099, 3100, 3101, 3103 Pioneer 3001, 3006, 3094, 3098, 3114, 3116, 3120 Popular Mechanics 3126 Proscan 3066, 3093 Pulsar 3122 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 3018 Quasar 3122 RadioShack 3123, 3127 RCA 3030, 3031, 3087, 3118 Realistic 3070 Recoton 3126 Regal 3078 Regency 3075 Rembrandt 3066 Runco 3122 Sagem 3101 Samsung 3069, 3089, 3114, 3120 SAT 3098 Scientific Atlanta 3000, 3001, 3002, 3003, 3006, 3028, 3029, 3081, 3086, 3089, 3094, 3095, 3108 Signal 3072, 3123 Signature 3066 Sony 3092, 3125 Sprucer 3118 Standard Component 3115 Starcom 3017, 3072, 3119, 3123 Stargate 3072, 3123 Starquest 3072, 3123 Supercable 3090 Supermax 3127 Tele+1 3107, 3111 Telepiu 3107 Thomson 3082, 3091 TIME WARNER 3084 Tocom Torx Toshiba Tristar Tudi Tusa TV86 Unika United Cable Universal Universum V2 Videoway View Star Viewmaster Vision Visiopass Vortex View Wittenberg Zenith Zentek 3067 3017 3122 3127 3102 3072, 3123 3077 3065, 3070 3018, 3119 3065, 3070 3097, 3099 3127 3019 3074, 3077, 3079 3127 3127 3097, 3100, 3101 3127 3098 3113, 3122, 3124 3126 Satellite AB Sat AccessHD ADB AGS Akai Alba 4216, 4217 4104 4220 4216 4053, 4055 4001, 4004, 4006, 4007, 4062, 4217 Aldes 4005, 4007, 4010 Allsat 4048, 4053, 4055 Allsonic 4005, 4008, 4024 Alltech 4217 Alpha 4053 Alpha Digital 4104 Alphastar 4077 Amitronica 4217 Amstrad 4011, 4035, 4217, 4218 Anglo 4217 Ankaro 4005, 4008, 4024, 4217 Anttron 4001, 4004 Apollo 4001 Armstrong 4011, 4053 Artec 4100 Asat 4053, 4055 ASLF 4217 Astacom 4216 Astra 4009, 4011, 4054, 4217, 4219 Astro 4004, 4008, 4010, 4015, 4024, 4213, 4218, 4219 AudioTon 4004, 4048 Aurora 4222 Austar 4222 Axiel 4216 Axis 4008, 4009, 4024, 4050 Best 4008, 4024 Blaupunkt 4015 Blue Sky 4217 Boca 4011, 4054, 4059, 4217 Boston 4216 Brain Wave 4013 Broadcast 4012 Broco 4217 BSkyB 4035, 4041 BT 4216 Bubu Sat 4217 Bush 4006, 4045 Cambridge 4218 Canal Satellite 4213 Canal+ 4213 CaptiveWorks 4099 Channel Master 4007, 4110 Chaparral 4075 CHEROKEE 4216 Chess 4212, 4217 CityCom 4006, 4215, 4219 Clatronic 4013 CNT 4010 Comag 4080, 4081, 4082, 4083, 4086 Commlink Comtech Condor Connexions Conrad 4005 4050 4008, 4024, 4219 4014, 4024 4024, 4215, 4218, 4219 Conrad Electronic 4217, 4219 Contec 4050 Coolsat 4096 Cosat 4048 Coship 4109 Crown 4011 Daeryung 4014 Daewoo 4057, 4217 DDC 4007 Delega 4007 Dew 4050 Diamond 4051 Digiality 4219 Digital Stream 4105 DIRECTV 4056, 4064, 4067, 4068, 4070, 4071, 4074, 4107, 4116, 4119, 4121, 4122, 4123, 4127, 4192, 4193, 4194, 4195, 4196, 4197, 4198, 4199, 4200, 4201, 4202, 4203, 4206, 4207, 4221 Discoverer 4212 Discovery 4216 Diseqc 4216 Dish Network 4018, 4065, 4089, 4092, 4094, 4095, 4117 Dishpro 4018, 4117 Distrisat 4053 Ditristrad 4048 DNT 4014, 4053, 4055 Drake 4072 DStv 4222 Dune 4024 Echostar 4014, 4018, 4065, 4089, 4117, 4217 Einhell 4001, 4005, 4011, 4217, 4218 Elap 4216, 4217 Elekta 4010 Elsat 4217 Elta 4001, 4008, 4024, 4048, 4053, 4055 Emanon 4001 Emme Esse 4008, 4024 Engel 4217 Ep Sat 4006 EURIEULT 4031 Eurodec 4052 Europa 4053, 4218, 4219 Europhon 4219 Eurosat 4011 Eurosky 4024, 4011, 4008, 4215, 4218, 4219 Eurostar 4011, 4215, 4219 Eutelsat 4217 Exator 4001, 4004 Expressvu 4117 Fenner 4024, 4212, 4217 Ferguson 4006, 4052, 4214 Fidelity 4218 Finlandia 4006 Finlux 4006 FinnSat 4050, 4052 Flair Mate 4217 Foxtel 4222 Freecom 4001, 4049, 4218 FTEmaximal 4024, 4217 Fuba 4024, 4001, 4008, 4014, 4015, 4055, 4215 Galaxis 4024, 4005, 4008, 4009, 4050, 4048, 4215, 4222 GE 4093, 4066, 4111, 4197 General Instrument 4073, 4019 GMI 4011 GOI 4117 Goldbox GoldStar Goodmans Goodmind Grandin Grothusen Grundig 4213 4049 4029, 4002, 4006 4111 4031 4001, 4049 4006, 4004, 4015, 4035, 4211, 4218, 4222 Hänsel & Gretel 4219 Hantor 4001, 4013 Hanuri 4010 Hauppauge 4044 Heliocom 4219 Helium 4219 Hinari 4007 Hirschmann 4024, 4015, 4210, 4218, 4219, 4216 Hisawa 4013 Hisense 4016 Hitachi 4114, 4006, 4199, 4203 Homecast 4087, 4084, 4085 Houston 4048 HTS 4117 Hughes 4064, 4068, 4194, 4192, 4196, 4202 Hughes Network Systems 4071 Humax 4097, 4025, 4030, 4060 Huth 4005, 4011, 4012, 4013, 4050, 4048, 4219, 4223 Hypson 4031 Ilo 4016 Imex 4031 Innovation 4008 Insignia 4107 Intertronic 4011 Intervision 4048, 4219 ITT Nokia 4006 Jerrold 4019 Johansson 4013 JOK 4216 JSR 4048 JVC 4089, 4065, 4117, 4029 Kamm 4217 Kathrein 4015, 4055, 4053, 4063, 4034, 4042, 4215, 4216, 4217 Kathrein Eurostar 4215 Klap 4216 Konig 4219 Kosmos 4049 KR 4004 Kreiselmeyer 4015 K-SAT 4217 Kyostar 4001 L&S Electronic 4024 Lasat 4024, 4010, 4008, 4054, 4215, 4212, 4219 Lasonic 4108 Lenco 4024, 4001, 4049, 4215, 4219, 4217 Leng 4013 Lennox 4048 Lenson 4218 Lexus 4053 LG 4103, 4107, 4049 Lifesat 4024, 4008, 4212, 4217 Lifetec 4008 Lorenzen 4219 Lorraine 4049 Lupus 4024, 4008 Luxor 4218 Lyonnaise 4052 Macab 4052 Magnavox 4127, 4101 Manata 4031, 4216, 4217 Manhattan 4006, 4010, 4048, 4216 Marantz 4055 Mascom 4010 Maspro 4006, 4217 Matsui 4216 -7- Max Mediabox Mediamarkt Mediasat Medion Medison Mega Memorex Metronic 4219 4213 4011 4009, 4213, 4218 4024, 4008, 4217 4217 4055, 4053 4127 4031, 4028, 4001, 4004, 4005, 4010, 4217 Metz 4015 Micro electronic 4218, 4219, 4217 Micro Technology 4217 MicroGem 4106 Micromaxx 4024, 4008 Microstar 4008 Microtec 4217 Minerva 4015 Mitsubishi 4006, 4015, 4202 Mitsumi 4054 Morgan's 4011, 4054, 4055, 4053, 4217 Motorola 4090, 4091, 4088, 4019 Multichoice 4222 Multitec 4212 Muratto 4049 Mysat 4217 Navex 4013 Neuhaus 4009, 4048, 4218, 4219, 4217 Neusat 4217 Next Level 4019 NextWave 4223 Nikko 4011, 4217 Nokia 4006, 4040 Nordmende 4001, 4006, 4007, 4010, 4052 Nova 4222 Novis 4013 Oceanic 4051 Octagon 4001, 4004, 4050 Okano 4011 Optex 4048 Optus 4213, 4222, 4223 Orbitech 4001, 4212, 4213, 4218 OSat 4004 Otto Versand 4015 Pace 4006, 4015, 4035, 4043, 4047, 4216 Pacific 4051 Packsat 4216 Palcom 4007 Palladium 4011, 4218 Palsat 4212, 4218 Panasat 4222 Panasonic 4121, 4126, 4124, 4006, 4035, 4036, 4221, 4198 Panda 4006, 4219 Pansat 4125 Patriot 4216 Paysat 4127 PCT 4110 Philco 4101 Philips 4071, 4068, 4127, 4006, 4055, 4053, 4061, 4033, 4213, 4216, 4196, 4202, 4203, 4201, 4206 Phoenix 4050 Phonotrend 4006, 4005, 4048 Pioneer 4046, 4213 Polsat 4052 Predki 4013 Premiere 4048, 4213 Priesner 4011 Primestar 4076 Profile 4216 Promax 4006 Prosat 4007, 4005 Proscan 4093, 4066, 4122, 4197 Protek 4051 Proton 4016 Provision 4010 Quadral Quelle Quiero RadioShack Radiola Radix Rainbow RCA Realistic Redpoint Redstar RFT Roadstar Roch Rover Saba Sabre Sagem Sakura Samsung SAT Sat Cruiser Sat Partner Sat Team Satcom Satec Satelco Satford Satmaster Satplus Schneider Schwaiger SCS Seemann SEG Seleco Servi Sat Siemens Silva Skantin Skardin 4024, 4007, 4005, 4008, 4216 4015, 4215, 4219 4052 4019 4055, 4053 4014, 4037 4004 4093, 4066, 4112, 4113, 4118, 4119, 4116, 4122, 4197, 4207 4078 4009 4024, 4008 4005, 4055, 4053 4217 4031 4024, 4217 4010, 4215, 4219, 4216 4006 4023, 4052 4050 4064, 4071, 4069, 4123, 4120, 4003, 4000, 4001, 4032, 4196, 4200 4007, 4218 4223 4001, 4004, 4010, 4013, 4049, 4218 4217 4012, 4219 4217 4024 4012 4012 4212 4008, 4212, 4216 4051, 4212, 4219 4215 4011, 4009, 4014 4024, 4001, 4008, 4013 4048 4031, 4217 4015 4049 4217 4009 Skinsat SKR Skymaster Skymax SkySat Skyvision SM Electronic Smart Sony SR Star Choice Starland Starring Start Trak Strong STS STVI Sumida Sunny Sound Sunsat Sunstar Supermax Tandberg Tandy Tantec TCM Techniland TechniSat Technology Technosat Technowelt Teco Telanor Telasat Telecom Telefunken Teleka Telemaster Telesat Telestar Televes Telewire Tempo Tevion 4218 4217 4017, 4022, 4005, 4212, 4217 4055, 4053 4212, 4218, 4219, 4217 4048 4212, 4217 4215, 4217 4067, 4070, 4213 4011, 4054 4019 4217 4013 4001 4024, 4001, 4004, 4008, 4049, 4222 4115 4031 4011 4024 4217 4024, 4011, 4054 4223 4052 4004 4006 4008 4012 4021, 4026, 4027, 4014, 4053, 4038, 4039, 4212, 4213, 4218 4222 4223 4219 4011, 4054 4007 4215, 4219 4217 4017, 4001, 4216 4004, 4011, 4014, 4218, 4219 4010 4219 4212, 4213, 4218 4006, 4218 4048 4223 4008, 4217 Thomson Thorens Thorn Tivax Tivo Tokai Tonna Toshiba Triad Triasat Triax Turnsat Tvonics Twinner UEC Uher UltimateTV Uniden Unisat Unitor Universum US Digital Variosat Vega Ventana Viewsat Visiosat Voom Vortec Welltech WeTeKom Wevasat Wewa Winersat Wisi Woorisat Worldsat Xrypton XSat Zehnder Zenith Zodiac © 2010 Yamaha Corporation 4020, 4006, 4052, 4058, 4208, 4215, 4213, 4219, 4216, 4217 4051 4006 4104 4196 4053 4006, 4012, 4048, 4218, 4217 4194, 4202, 4203 4049 4218 4015, 4215, 4218, 4217 4217 4214 4031, 4217 4222 4212 4070 4079, 4127 4011, 4050, 4053 4013 4015, 4215, 4219 4016 4015 4024 4055, 4053 4098 4013, 4048, 4216, 4217 4019 4001 4212 4212, 4218 4006 4006 4013 4006, 4014, 4015, 4218, 4219 4010 4216 4024 4217 4024, 4010, 4008, 4209, 4215 4102, 4107, 4195 4004 CD Yamaha 5082, 5095 CD Recorder Yamaha 5083 MD Yamaha 5080, 5081, 5086 Tape Yamaha 5084, 5087 Tuner Yamaha 5066, 5071, 5085, 5088, 5090, 5092, 5094 XM Yamaha 5091, 5093 SIRIUS Yamaha 5064, 5067 DOCK Yamaha 5068, 5089 NET Yamaha 5076, 5079 LD Yamaha 2080 Amplifier Yamaha 5019, 5020 YC506C0/RC -8--
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-V467 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-V467 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha RX-V467 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha RX-V467 Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha RX-V467 El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V467 Bedienungsanleitung
- português: Yamaha RX-V467 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha RX-V467 Brugervejledning
- suomi: Yamaha RX-V467 Omistajan opas
- svenska: Yamaha RX-V467 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V467 El kitabı
- română: Yamaha RX-V467 Manualul proprietarului
Gerelateerde artikelen
-
Yamaha HTR-4063 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V371 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V367 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V779 Remote Control Code
-
Yamaha RX-A1050 Remote Control Code
-
Yamaha HTR-4065 Remote Control Code
-
Yamaha RX-V573 de handleiding
-
-
Yamaha RX-A3010 Remote Control Code
-